The Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania
Renovations to the Williams Hall Building
and David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Philadelphia, PA 19104
LDS Project Number: 2012-03
Project Manual
2 April 2012
Designer/Project Manager:
Electrical Engineers:
Lennox Design Studios
2801 Soni Drive
Trooper, Pennsylvania 19403
phone: 610-277-4953
Mulhern and Associates
321 South York Road
Hatboro, Pennsylvania 19040
phone: 215-293-9900
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Bidding and Contracting Requirements:
Solicitation for Bids
Instructions to Bidders
Form of Bid
General Conditions
Form of Agreement
Form of Bonds
Wavier of Liens
Schedule of Milestones
List of Drawings:
G-001
G-002
A-101
A-102
A-103
A-104
A-105
A-200
A-201
A-201
A-202
A-203
A-204
A-205
A-206
FN-201
E-101
E-201
E-202
E-300
E-301
Cover Page
General Details, Notes and Schedules
DRL 4N30 Plans and Notes
DRL 4E9 Plans and Notes
DRL 4E19 Plans and Notes
DRL 4N30 and 4E9 Elevations
DRL 4E19 Elevations
Williams Hall Demolition Plans
Williams Hall Demolition Plans
Williams Hall Plans and Notes
Williams Hall Plans and Notes
Williams Hall Interior Elevations
Williams Hall Interior Elevations
Williams Hall Interior Elevations
Williams Hall Classroom 843 Plans and Notes
Classroom Furniture Layouts (Informational Use Only)
DRL - Electrical Lighting and Power Plans
Williams Hall - Electrical Lighting and Power Plans
Williams Hall - Electrical Lighting and Power Plans
Electrical Notes and Schedules
Electrical Panel Schedules
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Specifications:
Division 1
01000
01001
01002
01100
01140
01200
01210
01230
01310
01330
01400
01500
01600
01731
01732
01760
01770
01781
01782
General Requirements
University of Pennsylvania Instructions for Bidders
University of Pennsylvania General Conditions
University of Pennsylvania Construction Services Agreement
Summary
Work Restrictions
Project Procedures
Allowances
Alternates
Project Management and Coordination
Submittal Procedures
Quality Requirements
Temporary Facilities
Product Requirements
Cutting and Patching
Selective Demolition
Protecting Existing Construction
Closeout Procedures
Record Documents
Operation Manuals
Division 2
Site Work
Section Not Used
Division 3
03301
Concrete
Concrete
Division 4
Masonry
Section Not Used
Division 5
05500
Metal Fabrications
Division 6
06105
06402
Metals
Woods and Plastics
Miscellaneous Carpentry
Interior Architectural Woodwork
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 7
07210
07841
07920
Building Insulation
Through Penetration Firestop Systems
Joint Sealants
Division 8
08710
08800
Equipment
Projection Screens
Division 12
12492
12494
Specialties
Visual Display Boards
Wall Guard System
Division 11
11132
Finishes
Gypsum Plaster
Gypsum Board Assemblies
Acoustical Tile Ceilings
Carpet
Vinyl Coated Fabric Wallcovering
Painting and Coatings
Division 10
10100
10260
Door and Windows
Door Hardware
Glazing
Division 9
09210
09260
09512
09680
09720
09900
Thermal and Moisture Protection
Furnishings
Vertical Blinds
Shades
Division 13
Special Construction
Section Not Used
Division 14
Conveying Systems
Section Not Used
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 3
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 15
Mechanical
Notes on Drawings
Division 16
16100
16200
16300
16400
16510
16550
Electrical
General Electrical
Electrical Work Practices
Electrical Materials
Electrical Lighting System
Fire Alarm Modifications
Telecommunications
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 4
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
School of Arts and Sciences
Williams Hall Classroom Renovations
And David Rittenhouse Classroom Renovations
The University of Pennsylvania
Philadelphia, PA 19104
Lennox Design Studios
2801 Soni Drive
Trooper, PA 19403
Phone: 610-277-4953
Fax: 610-277-4954
E-mail: cplennox@verizon.net
www.lennoxdesignstudios.com/vpul2012.htm
4/2/2012
UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
DIVISION OF FACILITIES SERVICES
DEPARTMENT OF DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
THE LEFT BANK
3101 WALNUT STREET
PHILADELPHIA, PA 19104-6289
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Solicitation For Bids
Instructions to Bidders
Bid Preparation and Submission
Interpretations and Addenda
Responsibility, Qualifications and Obligations of Prospective Contractor
Late Submissions and Withdrawal of Bids
Pre Bid Conference
Form of Bid
Project Schedule
Identification of Bidder
Bid Security
Bid Opening
Acceptance and Rejection of Bids
Descoping
Contract Award
Time for Completion
Performance and Payment Bonds; Assurance of Completion
Letter of Intent
Use of AFL-CIO Labor
Preconstruction Conference
Form of Bid
General Conditions
Form of Agreement
Form of Bonds
Waiver of Liens
Special / Supplemental Conditions
Schedule and Milestones
List of Drawings
Technical Specifications
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
SOLICITATION FOR BIDS
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA (“Owner”), a Pennsylvania nonprofit
corporation, invites bids for the construction and completion of:
Williams Hall Classroom Renovations
as shown on the Drawings and as described in the Specifications, in accordance with the General
Conditions, Supplementary or Special Conditions, Addenda, if any, and other Documents listed on the
Table of Contents and referred to herein, subject to the terms and conditions contained herein.
Bids shall be submitted on the accompanying bid forms and shall be based upon and in conformity with
the solicitation attached. Bids shall be addressed to:
Ms. Colleen Reardon, Procurement Specialist
Department of Acquisition Services
The University of Pennsylvania
3401 Walnut Street, Suite 421A
Philadelphia, PA 19104-6228
Bids must be received by the Owner at the above address prior to the date and time specified in either
the Solicitation Letter or contained herein.
If scheduled, the date, time and location for the Pre Bid Conference for this project is specified in the
solicitation notice or contained herein. ATTENDANCE BY THE BIDDER AT THE PRE BID
CONFERENCE IS MANDATORY.
A complete set of Construction Documents will be made available to prospective bidders in accordance
with the information contained in the Solicitation Letter. The cost of such Construction Documents is
due upon receipt of the Construction Documents and is non-refundable.
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Bid Preparation and Submission
Bids shall be submitted in triplicate on the accompanying Form of Bid. All blank spaces shall be
completed in ink or type. Each bid shall be sealed in an envelope marked “BID” which contains on
the outside the title of the project and the name and address of the bidder. The Owner may
consider as informal and unsatisfactory any bid not prepared and submitted in accordance with the
provisions contained herein.
Bidders are expected to examine the specifications, drawings, all instructions, and, if applicable, the
construction site. Failure to do so will be at the bidder’s risk.
All bids must be submitted on the Forms provided. Bidders shall furnish all the information required
by the Solicitation. Bids must be signed and the bidder’s name typed or printed on the Form of Bid
and each continuation sheet which requires the entry of information by the bidder. Erasures or other
changes must be initialed by the person signing the bid. Bids signed by an agent shall be
accompanied by evidence of that agent’s authority.
If this Solicitation requires bidding on all items, failure to do so may disqualify the bid. If bidding is
not required, bidders should insert the words “NO BID” in the space provided for any item on which
no price is submitted.
Unless expressly authorized elsewhere in this Solicitation, alternate or conditional bids may not be
considered.
Unless expressly authorized elsewhere in this Solicitation, bids submitted by telegraph, by facsimile
machines or electronically will not be considered.
2. Interpretations and Addenda
Any prospective Bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation of the Solicitation, Specifications,
Drawings, etc., must request it at least five (5) working days before the scheduled time for bid
receipt. Requests shall be in writing and addressed to the Architect. Any information given a
prospective Bidder concerning this Solicitation will be furnished promptly to all other prospective
Bidders as a written addendum to the solicitation, if that information is necessary in submitting bids,
or if the lack of it would be prejudicial to other prospective Bidders.
Any and all interpretations and supplemental instructions will be made in the form of written
Addenda to the General Conditions, Supplementary or Special conditions, or Specifications, as the
case may be, and will be mailed, faxed or electronically transmitted to all prospective Bidders at
least three (3) working days prior to the date scheduled for receipt of bids. Such Addenda shall
become part of the Contract Documents and the failure of any Bidder to acknowledge receipt of
such Addenda shall not relieve the Bidder from any obligation under his bid as submitted.
Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda with their bid. Bids which fail to acknowledge the
bidder’s receipt of any Addendum may result in the rejection of the bid if the Addendum contained
information which substantively changed the requirements of the Owner.
3. Responsibility, Qualifications and Obligations of Prospective Bidders
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
The Owner will award contracts only to responsible prospective contractors who, in the opinion of
the Owner, have the ability to perform successfully under the terms and conditions of the proposed
Contract. In determining the responsibility of a bidder, the Owner will consider such matters as the
Bidder’s:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Integrity
Record of past performance; and
Financial and technical resources (including construction and technical equipment).
The Owner may make such investigations as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work. The Bidder may be requested by the Owner to submit a statement or
other documentation regarding any of the items above. Failure by the Bidder to provide such
additional information may render the Bidder nonresponsible and ineligible for award.
Each Bidder must inform himself fully as to the conditions under which the Work will be performed,
the contents of all of the Contract Documents and the provisions of all applicable laws, ordinances,
regulations, wage rates and labor conditions. Failure to do so will not relieve the accepted Bidder of
his obligation to execute and deliver the contract and fully perform the Work.
4. Late Submissions and Withdrawal of Bids
Any bid received at the place designated in the Solicitation after the exact time specified for receipt
will not be considered unless it:
(1)
(2)
(3)
was sent by registered or certified mail not later than five (5) calendar days before the
date specified for receipt of bids;
was sent by mail, or if authorized by the Solicitation, was sent by telegram, via facsimile
or electronically, and it was determined by the Owner that the late receipt was due solely
to mishandling by the Owner after receipt by the Owner;
was sent by U. S. Postal Service Express Mail Next Day Service – Post Office to
Addressee, not later than 5:00 PM at the place of mailing two (2) working days prior to
the date specified for receipt of bids.
Bids may be withdrawn by written notice from the Bidder at any time prior to the specified bid
receipt time.
In all other instances, no bid may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) calendar days following the
receipt of bids.
5. Pre Bid Conference
A Pre Bid Conference and site visit may be scheduled by the Owner. If scheduled, the date, time
and location of the Pre Bid Conference is detailed in the Solicitation Notice or contained herein.
Attendance at the Pre Bid Conference is mandatory. Failure of the Bidder to attend the Pre Bid
conference will result in the rejection of the Bidder’s proposal.
6. Form of Bid
The following Documents shall be submitted by the Bidder by the date and time specified for receipt
of bids. The Bidder’s failure to submit any of the following information with the bid may result in the
Owner’s rejection of the bid:
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Construction Services:
a) Form of Bid
b) Project Schedule
c) Project Organization Chart
d) Bid Security
e) Other Provisions (as applicable)
Construction Management Services:
Pre-Construction and/or Construction Services
a) Form of Bid
b) General Conditions Work Itemization
c) Direct Cost of the Work Itemization (by CSI Divisions)
d) Assumptions and Clarifications to the GMP (as applicable)
e) Rental Rates for Owned Equipment
f) Project Organization Chart and Resumes
g) Schedule of Salaried Personnel
h) Project Staffing Plan including Man-hour distribution
i) Project Schedule
j) List of Proposed Trade Contractors
k) Bid Security
l) Sample Project Financial Report
m) Other Provisions (as applicable)
Pre-Construction Services Only
a) Form of Bid
b) Project Organization Chart and Resumes
c) Schedule of Salaried Personnel
d) Project Staffing Plan including Man-hour distribution
e) Project Schedule
f) Other Provisions (as applicable)
7. Project Schedule
The Bidder shall submit with his bid a copy of a practical schedule showing the order in which the
bidder proposes to perform the work. The schedule shall identify the start and completion of the
salient features of the work, including acquiring labor, materials and equipment. The schedule shall
be in the form of a progress chart of suitable scale to indicate the percentage of work scheduled for
start and completion by any given date and shall conform to any milestones listed herein.
8. Identification of Bidder
Each bid shall be executed under seal in the exact legal title or name of the Bidder. The Bidder’s
business address and telephone number shall also be provided where indicated on the Form of Bid.
9. Bid Security
Each bid shall be accompanied by bid security in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the maximum
total amount of the bid, including all applicable additive alternates, as a guarantee that if the bid is
accepted the Bidder will promptly execute the Agreement and all related documents.
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Bid security shall be in the form of a certified check or Cashiers Check or bid Bond in a form
acceptable to the Owner and executed by the Bidder, as principal and by a Corporate Surety,
acceptable to the Owner, as surety.
After opening of bids, such security will be returned within a reasonable time to all Bidders whose
proposals are not being considered for acceptance; and the remaining security will be returned after
the accepted bidder has executed and delivered to the Owner the agreement and all related
documents.
10. Bid Opening
All bids received by the date and time of receipt specified in the solicitation will be opened and
considered by the Owner. The bid opening is not open to the public or any Bidder, or their proposed
Subcontractors.
11. Acceptance and Rejection of Bids
The Owner, at its sole discretion, may waive any informality in any bid, may accept or reject any bid
or portion thereof or may reject any or all bids for any reason. The Owner will identify the accepted
bid subsequent to receipt of bids and after the decision to award has been made, but such
announcement shall not be construed as a rejection of any other bid pending execution of the
Contract Documents by the accepted Bidder. The accepted Bidder shall promptly execute and
return the Contract Document and all related Documents, including the Agreement, Waivers of Lien,
Form of Bonds (if applicable) and Certificate of Insurance which shall be compiled by the Owner
substantially in accordance with the accompanying forms. Upon failure of the accepted Bidder to
execute and return such documents within ten (10) business days after they have been presented
for execution, such Bidder may, at the Owner’s discretion, forfeit as damages the security deposited
with his bid.
12. Descoping
Subsequent to the Owner’s receipt of bids but prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner may
require any or all Bidders to participate in a “descoping” process. The intent of this process is to
discuss and review with the Bidder(s) the components of their bid.
The Bidder shall participate in this process and shall provide any additional or supporting
documentation as required by the Owner to support the components of the bid including but not
limited to detailed bid breakdown, component pricing, labor classifications and rates, subcontractor
identification and costs, and material and equipment manufacturer delivery and installation
schedules.
13. Contract Award
The Owner will evaluate bids in response to this solicitation and will award a contract to the
responsible Bidder whose bid, conforming to this solicitation is considered to be most advantageous
to the Owner.
The Owner may reject any bid as nonreponsive if it is believed to be materially unbalanced as to the
prices for the various items of work to be performed. A bid is materially unbalanced when it is based
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
on prices significantly less than the cost for some work and prices which are significantly overstated
for other work.
14. Time for Substantial Completion
Time for Substantial Completion of the Work is established as the number of consecutive calendar
days from the Commencement Date of the written Notice to Proceed or a date based on a
Commencement Date established in the Form of Bid.
15. Performance and Payment Bonds; Assurance of Completion
The accepted bidder shall, if requested by the Owner, furnish Corporate Surety Bonds covering
faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder. The
bonds shall be substantially in the forms provided herein and shall be procured from a surety or
sureties acceptable to the Owner. The bond or bonds shall be in an amount equal to the Contract
price (100% performance bond, 100% payment bond). The Owner and such other persons or
entities as the Owner designates shall be named as obligees on the bond or bonds.
The Bidder shall identify with his bid, the cost of obtaining such bonds separate from the Base Bid
or the cost for any Unit, Alternate or Allowance pricing.
16. Letter of Intent
The Owner, at its sole discretion, may issue a Letter of Intent to the successful Bidder. The Letter of
Intent will be issued in advance of the Contractor executing the Contract Document and allows a
Contractor to begin work prior to the execution of a Contract Document. The Letter of Intent may
authorize the Contractor’s start of work for complete services or a portion of services; provided
however that the Contractor has returned to the Owner Waiver of Liens and Certificates of
Insurance evidencing coverages specified in the Contract Documents prior to the start of work.
The Letter of Intent shall be countersigned by the Contractor and returned to the Owner within ten
(10) days of the date of the Letter prior to the start of work.
No payment can be made to the Contractor in the absence of an executed Contract and the terms
and conditions applicable to the Letter of Intent shall expire after sixty (60) days from the date of the
Letter.
17. Use of AFL-CIO Labor
All labor required to facilitate the complete manpower requirements of this project shall be
performed utilizing appropriate, qualified and experienced AFL-CIO Trade Union Labor personnel to
work in total harmony with all other tradespeople on the job site.
18. Pre-construction Conference
After award of a Contract under this solicitation (or issuance of a Letter of Intent) and prior to the
start of work, the successful bidder and major subcontractors will be required to attend a Preconstruction Conference with representatives of the Owner and its Architects/Engineers, and other
interested parties convened by the Owner. The Owner will provide the successful Bidder with the
date, time and location of the conference.
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
FORM OF BID
Construction Services
Name of Project:
Project No.:
The undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all materials and perform all of the Work for the erection,
construction and completion of the subject Project as shown on the Drawings, described in the
Specifications and specified in the General Conditions, Supplemental or Special Conditions, Addenda,
if any, and other Contract Documents, or as referred to in the “Solicitation For Bids” and “Instructions to
Bidders” for the following amounts:
BASE BID:
(DOLLARS)
($
)
[Insert here provisions for allowance, alternate or unit price(s) as required]
In addition to the above amount(s), the undersigned agrees to furnish Performance and Labor and
Material Payment Bonds in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following amount:
COST OF BONDS:
(DOLLARS)
($
)
The undersigned agrees to Substantially Complete the Work in accordance with the following
scheduling requirements:
[delete the inapplicable schedule criteria below]
Within [insert number of days] calendar days after the Commencement Date established by the Owner
in the Notice to Proceed.
By [insert date], 20___, based on a Commencement Date of [insert date], 20___ .
In addition, the undersigned agrees that the anticipated Final Completion of the Project shall occur
within (_________) consecutive calendar days after the date of the Substantial Completion.
The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda to the Construction
Documents and further acknowledges that the information and changes contained in these Addenda
has been taken into account and included in the bid price.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Dated
Dated
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Dated
Dated
- Page 1 of 3 PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 GC Form of Bid 1-093000
FORM OF BID
Construction Services
BASE BID BREAKDOWN:
Identify All
Applicable
Specification
Sections
Division
Base Bid Amount
(inclusive of all
mark-ups)
01000
Total Division 1 – Gen Requirements
02000
Total Division 2 – Sitework
03000
Total Division 3 – Concrete
04000
Total Division 4 – Masonry
05000
Total Division 5 – Metals
06000
Total Division 6 – Wood & Plastics
07000
Total Division 7 – Therm & Moist Prot
08000
Total Division 8 – Doors & Windows
09000
Total Division 9 – Finishes
10000
Total Division 10 – Specialties
11000
Total Division 11 – Equipment
12000
Total Division 12 – Furnishings
13000
Total Division 13 – Special Construction
14000
Total Division 14 – Conveying Systems
15000
Total Division 15 – Mechanical
16000
Total Division 16 - Electrical
Name of Proposed
Subcontractor(s)
TOTAL BASE BID
- Page 2 of 3 PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 GC Form of Bid 1-093000
FORM OF BID
Construction Services
By submitting this bid, the undersigned understands that the right is reserved by the Trustees of the
University of Pennsylvania to reject any or all bids up to the time that a contract is fully executed by the
Owner. The undersigned agrees to execute and deliver an agreement and related documents to the
Owner in the prescribed form within ten (10) days after the Agreement is presented to the undersigned
for signature.
Until the Agreement or Letter of Intent is signed by both parties, the Owner may rescind the award and
the bidder will be deemed to have waived any and all rights to obtain an Agreement with the Owner or
seek damages against the Owner.
The undersigned acknowledges that this bid is made subject to all of the terms and conditions
contained in the “Solicitation For Bid” and “Instructions to Bidders” dated
, and is
executed pursuant to the terms and conditions contained therein.
Name of Firm
Signature of Authorized Proposer
Street Address of Firm
Name of Signatory (Print)
City, State, Zip Code
Title of Signatory
Telephone Number
Date
Fax Telephone Number
E-Mail Address
PLACE CORPORATE SEAL HERE
- Page 3 of 3 PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 GC Form of Bid 1-093000
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES AGREEMENT
Revised January 2007
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Article
ARTICLE 1
INTERPRETATION
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
Contract Documents
The Contractor and All Subcontractors Bound
No Third Party Rights
Limitation of Claims of Subcontractors and Others
Other Contractors
Enumerations of Items
The Work
Alternate Materials, Manufacturers and Processes
Reference Standards
Current Editions
Definitions
1
2
2
2
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
ARTICLE 2
CONSTRUCTION PROGRAM
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Management Plan
Drawings and Specifications
Schedule of Values
Quality Assurance Plan
Safety Program
Permits
10
11
11
11
11
11
ARTICLE 3
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Codes, Laws, and Ordinances
Adherence to Contract Documents
Compliance With Project Schedule
Quality of Workmanship and Material
Defective Work or Materials
Required Tests and Inspections
Work Performed Without Inspection
Other Tests and Inspections
Required Re-Testing and Re-Inspections
12
12
12
12
12
13
13
14
14
Revised January 2007
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
3.38
3.39
3.40
3.41
3.42
3.43
3.44
3.45
3.46
3.47
3.48
Access to the Work
Contractor's Responsibility for
Construction Means and Methods
Contractor's Work Force
Project Manager
Conduct of Contractor's Personnel
Procurement of Material
Storage and Delivery of Material
Responsibility for Work and Materials
Contractor's Responsibility to Detect
and Avoid Errors
Conditions Affecting the Work
Security of Project Area
Safety Requirements
Loss Prevention Program
Destruction of Project
Reports of Accidents
Contractor's Responsibility in Emergencies
Contractor's Equipment and Services
Clean-up
Cutting and Patching
Covering and Uncovering the Work
Repair and Replacement of Defective Work
As-Built Drawings and Specifications
Signs
Final Clean-up
Owner's Right to Stop the Work
Owner's Right to Perform Contractor's
Work and Backcharge
Warranty of Contractor and Subcontractors
to the Owner
Owner's Right to Take Possession
Project Meetings
Monthly Status Report
Removal and Relocation of Utilities
Temporary Services and Facilities
Hazardous Materials
Written Warranties and Close-out Documents
Patents
Walk Through
Existing Structures
Taxes
Lay-Down Area
14
14
15
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
19
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
22
23
23
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
27
27
28
28
Revised January 2007
ARTICLE 4
THE ARCHITECT
AND THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
General
Architect
The Owner's Representative
Limits of Authority
29
29
30
30
ARTICLE 5
CHANGES IN THE WORK AND
AMENDMENTS TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
Unauthorized Changes Prohibited
Scope Changes
Field Changes
Specified Variations
Compliance with Owner's Instructions
Change Initiated by Contractor
Change Initiated by Owner
Pricing and Payment of Approved Change Orders
Disputed Change Order
Allowable Costs
Allowance for Overhead and Profit
Contractor's Change Order Request
Contract Time
Documentation of Time and Material Charges
and Cost Adjustments
31
31
31
31
31
31
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
35
ARTICLE 6
SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES AND PRODUCT DATA
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
Schedule of Submittals
Submission by Contractor
Form of Submission
Verification of Data and Coordination
Composite Shop Drawings
Review and Approval
Contractor's Responsibility
Compliance with Drawings and Specifications
Work to be Performed in Accordance with
Approved Shop Drawings
Substitutions
Preliminary Submissions
Testing
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
38
Revised January 2007
ARTICLE 7
COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION
OF THE PROJECT AND THE PROJECT SCHEDULE
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Commencement
Project Schedule
Acceleration
Extensions of Time
No Damage for Delays
38
38
39
39
40
ARTICLE 8
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
8.15
8.16
Progress Payments
Schedule of Payments
Application for Payment
Title
Contractor's Affidavit
Time and Material Work
Direct Payments or Joint Checks
Final Payment -- Time of Application
Application for Final Payment
Final Payment
Releases of Lien - Final Payment
Owner's Right to Withhold Payments
Payment for Materials
Removal of Liens
Interest
Sales and Use Tax Refunds
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
43
43
44
45
45
45
45
ARTICLE 9
CLAIMS
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Notice of Claims
Opportunity to Claim
Waiver of Claim
Time to Bring Suit - Limitation of Actions
Work to Continue During Disputes
47
48
48
49
49
Revised January 2007
ARTICLE 10
INDEMNIFICATION
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
Generally
Personal Injury and Property Damage
Liens
Claims Against Owner
No Limit on Indemnity
49
49
50
50
50
ARTICLE 11
INSURANCE AND BONDING
11.1
11.2
11.3
Insurance Requirements
Bonding Requirements
Subrogation
50
52
52
ARTICLE 12
BACKGROUND CHECK
12.1
Background and Reference Checks
52
Revised January 2007
THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS are agreed to by the Owner and the
Contractor this day of 20__.
ARTICLE 1
INTERPRETATION
1.1
Contract Documents. The Contractor shall perform the services
provided for in the Agreement in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The
Contract Documents consist of the following:
(a)
Change Orders;
modifications to the Agreement, if any, including approved
(b)
the Agreement, including exhibits;
(c)
these General Conditions;
(d)
Documents; and
any
modifications
or
addenda
to
the
Construction
(e)
the Construction Documents, including Drawings and
Specifications (including Division 1 thereof) prepared by the Architect / Engineer
(A/E), and excluding shop drawings and bid documents, such as the Invitation to
Bid or Contractor's Bid.
The various documents comprising the Contract Documents are intended
to be interpreted in a complementary fashion; however, in the event of any
inconsistency between them, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner and the A/E
of any such inconsistency, and unless the Owner directs otherwise, the order of
precedence shall be as set forth in this Section 1.1, with the highest authority listed as
(a).
To the extent that the requirements of the Drawings or Specifications are
inconsistent with, or are more detailed or specific than, these General Conditions, the
rules of interpretation set forth in this Section 1.1 shall govern.
The most recently issued approved version of a document shall take
precedence over previous issues of the same document.
The Drawings and Specifications are to be equal in authority and priority.
However, each item of the Work is not necessarily mentioned in both the Drawings and
the Specifications. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by all.
Should any Drawing or Specification be internally inconsistent, or
Revised January 2007
1
inconsistent with another Drawing or Specification, the Contract Price shall be based
upon the most expensive combination of quality and quantity of Work indicated.
If any omissions or errors or inconsistencies between the Drawings and
Specifications are noted the Contractor shall immediately call them to the attention of
the Owner and A/E. The intent of the Drawings and Specifications, in the event of the
above-mentioned conflicts, shall be determined by the Owner in consultation with the
A/E who shall consult with the Owner in regard to such matters. Any Work done by the
Contractor without consulting the A/E and the Owner, or without obtaining required
decisions or approvals, shall be done at the cost of the Contractor, without any payment
therefor, and shall be subject to the provisions of Section 3.5 of these General
Conditions, if such Work proves to be non-conforming.
1.2
The Contractor and All Subcontractors Bound. These General
Conditions constitute a part of the Agreement for Construction Services entered into by
the Owner with the Contractor in connection with the Project.
All Subcontracts entered into by the Contractor for Work in connection
with the Project shall be subject to these General Conditions.
With respect to any Work that is subcontracted by the Contractor, the
Subcontractor shall have the same obligations to the Contractor that the Contractor has
to the Owner under these General Conditions. In the event of any inconsistency
between these General Conditions and the terms of any Subcontract, these General
Conditions shall prevail, unless otherwise expressly agreed by the Owner and the
Contractor.
1.3
No Third Party Rights. Nothing in these General Conditions or the
Contract Documents shall be deemed to create a joint venture or partnership between
the Owner and the Contractor or any direct or indirect contractual relationship between
the Owner and any of the Subcontractors, except as provided in Section 5.6 of the
Agreement; nor shall anything contained in the Contract Documents be deemed to give
any third party any claim or right of action against the Owner or the Contractor.
1.4
Limitation of Claims of Subcontractors and Others.
(a)
No Subcontractor or other person or entity performing any of
the Work shall have any claim or cause of action against the Project, the Owner, the
Architect, or persons representing or acting on their behalf arising out of a Subcontract
or other transaction with the Contractor;
(b)
Subcontractors shall look only to the Contractor for payment
or other remedy in the event that any dispute arises out of the Contract Documents;
(c)
All claims shall be made within the time and according to the
procedures set out in Article 9 of these General Conditions.
Revised January 2007
2
(d)
The Contractor shall notify the Owner within two (2) days
after the day on which Contractor becomes aware or should have become aware of the
existence of any mechanic's or materialman's lien upon or attaching the Site or the
Project.
(e)
Unless the Owner has waived in writing the requirement that
Contractor post a Payment Bond, the Contractor shall require each of the
Subcontractors, and each of their Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers, to execute and deliver
to the Owner, at least three (3) days before such Subcontractor or Subsubcontractor/Supplier commences any Work, a separate Waiver of Liens, in the forms
attached as Exhibits C-1 and C-2 to the Agreement, in which the Subcontractor and
Sub-subcontractor/Supplier shall relinquish all rights to have, file or maintain any
mechanics' or materialmen's liens.
1.5
Other Contractors.
1.5.1 Owner’s Contractors. The Owner reserves the right to engage
other contractors to perform work in connection with the Project not otherwise within the
Contractor's scope of work, including, but not limited to, work associated with the
furnishings, fixtures, equipment and tenant finishes to be installed or used in the Project.
The Owner also reserves the right to remove portions of work from the Contractor's
scope of work, in which event the Contract Price will be appropriately reduced by
Change Order. It is the express obligation and duty of the Contractor under the
Agreement to coordinate its Work with the work of other contractors. The Contractor
acknowledges that the Owner may be having work performed which will require specific
coordination and cooperation with the Work of the Contractor. The Contractor shall not
unreasonably impede, hinder or delay the Owner or any contractor in the performance
of its work. The Contractor acknowledges that it is the Contractor's specific obligation
under the Agreement to coordinate the Work with the work of the Owner, to cooperate
with the Owner, and to complete the Work in a timely fashion and in accordance with
the Project Schedule so as to permit the Owner and such contractors to perform their
work in a timely fashion in accordance with their respective contracts.
It is the Contractor's duty under the Agreement to communicate with any
contractor who will be performing work which may depend upon, connect, complement
or interfere with the Work and attempt to resolve any disputes or coordination problems
with such contractor.
In the event that any other contractor performing work should hinder,
delay or damage the Work, the Contractor agrees that it shall request that the Owner
present any claim by the Contractor to the responsible contractor. The Owner will then
attempt to obtain a recovery for the Contractor (the cost and expense of obtaining any
such recovery shall be paid by the Contractor) and, in addition, the Contractor may, if it
is determined that the Contractor was, in fact, injured, hindered, or delayed by any other
contractor, request an extension of the Contract Time pursuant to Section 7.4 of these
General Conditions. The Contractor agrees that any recovery obtained by the Owner
and any extension of the Contract Time granted pursuant to Section 7.4 shall be the
Revised January 2007
3
Contractor's sole remedy against the Owner for delays or damages incurred due to
hindrance, delays, or damages to the Work caused by other contractors.
The Contractor agrees that it will be directly responsible to any contractor
performing work depending upon, related to or connected with the Project for any loss,
injury, damage or delay caused by the Contractor. The Contractor and its performance
bond surety shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner and the Architect
from and against any claim, cost, loss or expense (including attorneys' fees) asserted
against any of them as a result of the Contractor's alleged acts or omissions.
If any part of the Contractor's Work depends upon the work of any other
contractor or the Owner for proper execution or results, the Contractor shall, before
proceeding with such Work, promptly report to the Owner in writing any discrepancies or
defects in such other work which can be identified upon reasonable inspection and
which would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results. Failure to so notify
the Owner shall constitute the Contractor's acceptance of such work as suitable.
1.6
Enumerations of Items. Lists of "Work Included" and "Work
Excluded" are not intended to enumerate each and every item of Work or appurtenance
required, but shall be used in conjunction with other portions of the Contract
Documents.
1.7
The Work. The term "Work" shall mean the construction
contemplated by the Construction Documents, read as a whole. The Work shall include
provision of all the labor, materials, tools, equipment, services, and facilities necessary
to construct the Project so that it is complete, safe and properly built in full accordance
with the Contract Documents, regardless of whether each such item has been
specifically identified in the Contract Documents.
1.8
Alternate Materials, Manufacturers and Processes.
The Contractor shall conform to the requirements of the
Construction Documents regarding the use of substituted products and/or materials.
(a)
The Contractor may propose the use of alternate materials
equivalent to those named in the Contract Documents. The Owner, in consultation with
the A/E, shall be the judge of the quality and suitability of proposed alternative
equipment, materials, articles or processes. The burden of proving the quality and
suitability of an alternative shall be upon the Contractor. Information required by the
Owner or the A/E in judging an alternative shall be supplied in written form by the
Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Any additional cost incurred by the Owner or
the A/E, whether the proposal is accepted or rejected, shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
(b)
Where use of an alternative material involves redesign of or
changes to, other parts of the Work, the cost and the time required to effect such
redesign or change will be considered in evaluating the suitability of the alternative
Revised January 2007
4
material. Redesign and changes in other parts of the Work and costs relating thereto
shall be at the Contractor's expense.
(c)
No action relating to the approval of alternative materials will
be taken by the Owner until the request for substitution is made by the Contractor in
writing, accompanied by complete data as to the quality, suitability and cost of the
materials proposed. Any such request shall be made in ample time to permit a decision
to be made without delaying the Work. Approval by the Owner shall not relieve the
Contractor of its duty to use only conforming materials in the Work.
(d)
Where classification, rating, or other certification by a body
such as, but not limited to, UL, NEMA, or AREA, is a part of the specification for any
material, proposals for use of alternative materials shall be accompanied by reports
from the listed body, or an equivalent independent testing laboratory, indicating
compliance with the Specification requirements. Testing required to prove equality of
the material proposed shall be at the Contractor's expense.
(e)
Approval of an alternative material will be only for the
characteristics and use named in such approval, and shall not change or modify any
requirement of the Contract Documents, or establish approval of the material for any
other use.
1.9
Reference Standards. When reference standards are included as
part of the requirements, the provisions they contain shall apply, except for the portions
that:
(a)
are less stringent than those given in the Contract
Documents; and/or
(b)
imply exclusions, limitations or waivers that are inconsistent
with the Contract Documents.
1.10 Current Editions. When the Work is governed by reference to
standards, building codes, manufacturer's instructions or other reference documents the
current editions in effect as of the date of issue of the Specifications or addenda shall
apply, whether or not the current edition is specified. Such references shall be
considered as part of the Specifications to the same extent as if the pertinent portions of
those standard specifications were printed herein in their entirety. When a newer
edition becomes effective during the execution of the Work, the original edition shall
apply unless a change is properly authorized by the A/E.
1.11
terms shall apply:
Definitions. For purposes of the Contract Documents the following
1.11.1 Agreement. The Agreement for Construction Services
between the Owner and the Contractor with respect to the Project.
Revised January 2007
5
1.11.2 Allowance. A lump sum allocated in the Contract Price to
cover costs of an element of the Work for which sufficient estimating data were not
available or for which, by agreement with the Owner, the scope of work was not
determined before establishing the Contract Price. Items covered by allowances shall
be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct.
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, an Allowance shall cover the
cost to the Contractor, less any applicable trade discount, of the materials and
equipment required by the Allowance delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes.
Costs for unloading and handling at the Site, construction labor, overhead, profit,
installation costs, and other expenses contemplated for the Allowance shall be included
in the Contract Price and not the Allowance. Whenever the cost of the items included in
the Allowance is more than or less than the Allowance, the Contract Price shall be
adjusted accordingly by Change Order, but without any allowance for overhead or profit.
1.11.3 Architect / Engineer. The named Architect / Engineer or such
other architect and/or engineer as the Owner may designate, or an authorized
representative thereof.
1.11.4 As-Built Drawings. Construction drawings, prepared by the
Contractor or Subcontractors as appropriate, revised to show changes in the Drawings
and Specifications made during construction, accurately reflecting as-built conditions of
the Project, particularly the location and detail of concealed, embedded, or buried work.
1.11.5 Change Order. A written order to the Contractor signed by
the Owner, issued after the execution of the Agreement, authorizing a change in the
Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. The Contract Price
and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order.
1.11.6 Change Order Proposal. The Contractor's response to a
request for a Job Modification submitted by the Owner pursuant to Section 5.6 hereof.
1.11.7 Change Order Request. The Contractor's request for
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time submitted as a Job Modification
prepared pursuant to Section 5.7 hereof.
1.11.8 Codes. Regulations, ordinances or statutory requirements
of any governmental unit, other authority having jurisdiction over the Project or any part
thereof, or the Board of Fire Underwriters or similar body, relating to building
construction, use and occupancy. The term Codes shall include such regulations,
ordinances or statutory requirements as have been enacted as of the date of execution
of the Agreement, and which become applicable to building construction, use or
occupancy during the term of the Agreement.
1.11.9 Commencement Date. The date upon which the Contractor
is issued a notice to proceed by the Owner.
1.11.10 Construction Documents.
The Drawings, Specifications
Revised January 2007
6
and other documents, if any, prepared by the A/E and listed in Exhibit A to the
Agreement, setting forth detailed requirements for the construction of the Project.
1.11.11 Construction Equipment. All equipment, tools, machinery,
implements, and other items used in connection with the Work, but not incorporated into
the Work.
1.11.12 Construction Phase. The phase of the Project during which
the Contractor constructs the Project.
1.11.13 Contract Documents. This term is defined in Section 1.1.
1.11.14 Contract Price. This term is defined in Article 4 of the
Agreement.
1.11.15 Contract Time. The time between the commencement of
the Work and the Scheduled Completion Date.
1.11.16 Contractor. The named contractor or any successor or
replacement approved by the Owner, which is a party to the Agreement and responsible
for construction of the Project.
1.11.17 CPM Schedule. Any schedule, for whatever purpose
developed, from which a critical path for the completion of the activities on the Project or
a segment thereof can be determined.
1.11.18 Date of Substantial Completion. The date on which
Substantial Completion is achieved in accordance with the Contract Documents, as
certified by the Architect and confirmed by the Owner.
1.11.19 Day. Calendar day.
1.11.20 Drawings. The portion of the Construction Documents
showing in graphic or pictorial form the design, location and dimensions and specific
details of the elements of the Work, including, but not limited to, site drawings, plans,
elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams for existing grades, new finish
grades, paving, curbs, utility lines, utility structures, architectural aspects, structural
systems, mechanical systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems and electrical
systems.
1.11.21 Final Acceptance. The Owner's acceptance of the Work
from the Contractor, which shall not be deemed to have occurred until (I) the A/E has
certified and the Owner has determined that the Work is complete and in accordance
with the Contract Documents, (ii) the Owner has received all required documents,
manuals, certificates and other items provided for under the Agreement, and (iii) the
Contractor has complied with all of the other obligations of the Contractor under the
Contract Documents.
Revised January 2007
7
1.11.22 Force Majeure. Civil commotion, warlike operation,
invasion, rebellion, hostilities, upsurge power, sabotage, actions by governmental
authorities or agencies, Acts of God, sudden actions of the elements, unusually adverse
weather (as defined in Section 7.4 of these General Conditions), fire, unusual delays to
deliveries which could not be reasonably foreseen or prevented by the Contractor or
any Subcontractor, or similar unforeseeable occurrences which are beyond the
reasonable control of, and without the fault of, the party claiming Force Majeure and any
of its subcontractors of any tier, agents and employees. Strikes or other labor
stoppages do not constitute Force Majeure events unless, in addition to the foregoing,
the conditions in Section 7.4 of these General Conditions for a time extension have
been met.
1.11.23 General Conditions. These General Conditions.
1.11.24 Hazardous Materials. "Hazardous substances" or
"contaminants" as defined pursuant to the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
Compensation and Liability Act, as amended by the Superfund Amendments and
Reauthorization Act of 1986, "regulated substances" within the meaning of Subtitle I of
the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, as amended by the Superfund
Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986, "hazardous waste" as defined pursuant
to the Pennsylvania Solid Waste Management Act, or any other substances which may
be the subject of liability pursuant to the Pennsylvania Clean Streams Law, and any
substances identified as hazardous or dangerous pursuant to any applicable Code
relating to worker safety or health, including, without limitation, the Federal Occupational
Safety and Health Act.
1.11.25 Materials. All materials, supplies, appliances, equipment,
fixtures and other items to be incorporated into the Work or consumed in connection
with the Work.
Illustrations, standard schedules,
1.11.26
Product Data.
performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished
by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.
1.11.27 Project Schedule. The schedule for performance of the
Work submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Owner pursuant to Article 7
hereof.
1.11.28 Project Manual. The manual prepared by the Architect,
including bidding requirements, conditions of the contract and the Specifications.
1.11.29 Project Manager. The Contractor's senior person assigned
to the Project.
1.11.30 Samples. Physical examples furnished by the Contractor
for the review and action by the A/E, which illustrate materials, equipment or
Revised January 2007
8
workmanship proposed for use in the Project.
1.11.31 Scheduled Completion Date. The date referred to in
Section 3.1 of the Agreement by which the Owner and the Contractor have agreed the
Work will be Substantially Completed.
1.11.32 Services. All labor, supervision, transportation, utilities
(including, but not limited to, water, heat, electricity and telephone), storage, and all
other construction-related services required in connection with the Work.
1.11.33 Shop Drawings. Drawings, diagrams, illustrations,
schedules, performance charts, and other data specifically prepared for the Project by
the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, which
illustrate in appropriate detail how specific portions of the Work will be fabricated or
installed, or both.
1.11.34 Site. The physical location of the Project, on the Owner’s
campus in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
1.11.35 Specifications. The written (non-pictorial, non-graphic)
requirements of the Contract Documents for materials, equipment, design standards,
quality and workmanship of the Work.
1.11.36 Subcontractor. A person or entity, other than the
Contractor or any affiliate, partner, subsidiary or other business entity related to the
Contractor, which has a direct or indirect contract with the Contractor to perform or
supply any of the Work, which term includes, where appropriate, subsubcontractors of
any tier.
1.11.37 Submittals. Shop Drawings, Samples, and Product Data,
test results and other materials furnished by the Contractor to the A/E as evidence of
the materials to be incorporated into the Work, the manner of construction to be used,
or the progress of the Work.
1.11.38 Substantial Completion. The point in the progress of the
Work, as determined and certified to by A/E, and confirmed by the Owner, when the
Work, or a designated portion thereof that the Owner has agreed to accept separately,
satisfies all of the following conditions (except to the extent the same shall be
specifically waived or modified in writing by Owner):
(a)
The Work or such designated portion thereof has been
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents
(except for minor punch list Work);
(b)
All elevators included in the Work or such designated
portions thereof (except temporary elevators), are complete
in accordance with the Contract Documents;
Revised January 2007
9
(c)
All heating, plumbing, ventilating and air conditioning
systems included in the Work, or such designated portions
thereof, are functioning in accordance with the Contract
Documents;
(d)
All life safety systems included in the Work are functioning in
accordance with the Contract Documents;
(e)
The Work, or such designated portion thereof, is suitable for
its intended use;
(f)
Final unconditional state and local certificates of use and
occupancy, and any other permits or approvals necessary to
allow use and occupancy of the Project, have been issued;
and
(g)
The A/E has issued a Certificate of Substantial Completion,
as required by Section 4.2.6. The date upon which the
Work is deemed to be Substantially Complete is referred to
as "Substantial Completion" in the Contract Documents.
1.11.39 Supplier or Materialman. A Subcontractor having an
agreement with the Contractor or a Subcontractor to supply, by sale or lease, directly or
indirectly, any Materials or Construction Equipment for the Work.
1.11.40 Updated Project Schedule. The update of the Project
Schedule, prepared at least once a month, to show the current status of the schedule
and any schedule deviations or changes from the previous update. The Owner shall
have the right to approve the Updated Project Schedule.
Capitalized terms used, but not defined, in these General Conditions have
the meaning set forth in the Agreement.
ARTICLE 2
CONSTRUCTION PROGRAM
2.1
Management Plan. Prior to commencing any of the Work, the
Contractor shall provide to the Owner the Contractor's comprehensive written
management plan, which shall set forth in detail the Contractor's program for managing
the Work and coordinating the Subcontractors.
Revised January 2007
10
2.2
Drawings and Specifications.
The Owner shall provide the
Contractor with one (1) set of reproducible Construction Documents (and any revisions
thereof) as issued by the A/E for purposes of construction. The Contractor and the
Subcontractors shall use the Construction Documents for the sole purpose of
completing the Work. All Construction Documents prepared in connection with the
Project are and shall remain the property of the Owner, and may not be used by any
person other than the Owner, unless expressly authorized in writing by the Owner.
2.3
Schedule of Values. The Contractor shall maintain and submit to
the Owner and the A/E, prior to the commencement of the Work, and if requested by the
Owner, at any time thereafter, an updated, detailed schedule of values of the various
portions of the Work, including quantities, prepared in the form specified by the Owner
(each, a "Schedule of Values"). The Schedule of Values shall be subject to the Owner's
approval. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the Contract Price to the various
portions of the Work, and the Contractor shall provide such data to substantiate the
Schedule of Values as the Owner may require. The Schedule of Values, when
approved by the Owner, shall serve as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for
Payment.
2.4
Quality Assurance Plan. Prior to commencing any of the Work, the
Contractor shall provide to the Owner the Contractor's comprehensive written quality
assurance plan setting forth in detail the Contractor's program for assuring compliance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
2.5
Safety Program. Prior to commencing any of the Work, the
Contractor shall prepare for the review and approval of the Owner and, if applicable, the
Owner's insurers, a written safety program to govern all activity on the Site. The
Contractor shall incorporate into the program any comments of the Owner or its insurers
providing insurance for the Project. However, the review or approval of the safety
program by the Owner or its insurers shall not relieve the Contractor from its complete
and full responsibility for Project safety.
The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's
organization at the Site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. That person
shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor
in writing to the Owner and the A/E.
2.6
Permits. The Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, obtain
all licenses, permits, variances, certificates of occupancy and other approvals
necessary for the Project, except that the Owner shall apply for the general building
permit and variances (which shall be physically obtained and paid for by the
Contractor). The Contractor shall perform its duties under this Section 2.6 in a timely
manner and in accordance with the Project Schedule.
Revised January 2007
11
ARTICLE 3
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
3.1
Codes, Laws, and Ordinances. The Contractor shall, at all times,
comply strictly with (I) all applicable Codes, and all orders of public authorities having
jurisdiction over the Project or the Work, as those Codes or orders apply to the
execution of construction (expressly recognizing that the Contractor is not responsible
for those duties solely allocable to a design professional), (ii) all laws applicable to
payment of subcontractors and materialmen, (iii) all laws applicable to employees, (iv)
all requirements of all other applicable laws, (v) all work and safety rules of the Owner's
insurance carrier, and (vi) all other regulations which may reasonably be established
from time to time by the Owner with respect to the Project, even if the Contractor
believes that such requirements or orders are invalid, and regardless of the cost of such
compliance. The Contractor may, in good faith, challenge any such requirement or its
applicability to the Project, but the Contractor shall nevertheless comply with such
requirement or order pending the disposition of its challenge.
3.2
Adherence to Contract Documents. The Contractor shall perform
the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not
depart from the scope of the Work as defined in the Contract Documents unless
authorized to do so pursuant to Article 5 of these General Conditions.
3.3
Compliance With Project Schedule. The Contractor shall perform
the Work in accordance with the Project Schedule. Time is of the essence for the
Contractor's performance of its obligations under the Contract Documents.
3.4
Quality of Workmanship and Material. The Contractor shall perform
the Work in accordance with the best modern practice and shall employ only materials
and workmanship of the highest quality, subject to the specific requirements of the
Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for
deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the A/E's approval of
Shop Drawings or other Submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the
A/E and the Owner, in writing, of the deviation at the time of submittal and the A/E and
the Owner have given written approval of the specific deviation. The Contractor shall
not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings or other
submittals by the A/E's approval thereof.
3.5
Defective Work or Materials. Contractor furnished Work (including
Materials) not conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents are hereby
deemed to be rejected, whether in place or not, and regardless of whether or not such
Work has been expressly rejected by the A/E.
Rejected Work shall be immediately removed from the Site, and the
Contractor shall promptly thereafter replace such rejected Work and shall repair and
replace any contiguous Work (including work of any other contractors or the Owner)
which is damaged in the course of the removal and replacement of the non-conforming
Revised January 2007
12
Work, all at the Contractor's sole expense and without any increase in the Contract
Price and without any extension of the Contract Time. If the Contractor fails promptly
and satisfactorily to comply with a request by the Owner to remove and replace nonconforming or damaged Work and replace it with work in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the Owner may:
(1)
cause the removal and replacement of the
Work and charge the Contractor the cost thereof; or
(2)
terminate the Agreement or the Contractor's
right to proceed with the Work in accordance with the default
provisions of the Agreement.
No rejected Material, the defects of which have been subsequently
corrected, shall thereafter be used in the Work, unless its use has been approved, in
writing, by the Owner, and unless the Contractor furnishes to the Owner such additional
warranties and guarantees as the Owner may deem proper.
If the Owner elects to accept Work which is not in conformity with the
requirements of the Contract Documents, rather than requiring its removal and
replacement hereunder, the Contract Price shall be reduced as appropriate and
equitable, regardless of whether or not Final Payment has been made. However, the
Contractor shall not have the right to require the Owner to accept any non-conforming
Work, with or without a credit.
3.6
Required Tests and Inspections. Unless the Specifications provide
to the contrary, all inspections, tests and approvals of methods or means of
construction, materials or workmanship included in the Work shall be performed at such
times as the Owner shall approve, by independent inspection and testing agencies
selected and compensated by the Owner. Representatives of the A/E and the testing
laboratories and inspectors shall have access to the Work at all times. The Contractor
shall furnish samples of all materials and component parts of the Work required as test
specimens in connection with the tests and inspections and shall furnish labor and
facilities at the Site as deemed necessary by the A/E or the testing and inspection
agencies to support the testing and inspection of the Work. Such inspections and tests
are for the sole benefit of the Owner and shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility of providing quality control measures to assure that the Work complies
with the Contract Documents. Except to the extent specified in writing by the Owner, no
inspection or test shall be construed as constituting or implying acceptance.
Inspections or tests shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or
loss of the Work before Final Acceptance of the completed Work.
3.7
Work Performed Without Inspection. Any Work done without
proper inspection or testing as required by the Contract Documents shall be subject to
rejection. If any Work should be covered up before the required inspection or testing
approval or without the consent of the Owner, it must be uncovered for inspection and
testing and properly restored as provided for in Section 3.29 of these General
Revised January 2007
13
Conditions.
3.8
Other Tests and Inspections. The Owner may require testing or
inspection, not required by the Specifications or by applicable Codes, of any means of
construction, material or workmanship in order to determine the acceptability thereof
under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall furnish samples of all Materials
and component parts of the Work required as test specimens in connection with the
testing and inspection services. All inspection or testing shall be done in a timely
manner so as to avoid unnecessary delay in the completion of the Work by the
Contractor. The cost of any testing and inspection and of the labor and facilities in
connection with such testing and inspection shall be borne by the Owner unless it is
determined that the means or methods of construction, materials or workmanship were
not in conformity with or acceptable under the Contract Documents, in which case such
costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
When the Owner requests testing or inspection of numerous units of
completed or partially completed Work pursuant to this Section 3.8, an initial test or
inspection will be conducted on a statistical sampling basis agreed to between the
Owner, the A/E and Contractor. If the initial test or inspection demonstrates that the
Work complies with the Contract Documents, the cost of the test or inspection shall be
borne by the Owner. If the initial test or inspection demonstrates that the Work does not
comply with the Contract Documents, the Contractor will bear the cost of the initial test
or inspection and any additional test or inspections that are necessary to demonstrate
that the remaining units comply with the Contract Documents.
3.9
Required Re-testing and Re-Inspections. All costs of re-testing and
re-inspections of any methods or means of construction, materials or workmanship
included in the Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract
Documents in initial tests or inspections as determined by the Owner, or public
authorities having jurisdiction, shall be borne by the Contractor.
3.10 Access to the Work. The Owner and its designees and the A/E shall
at all times have access to the Work wherever it is being carried out. The Contractor
shall provide proper and safe facilities for such access and for inspection at the Site, at
the place of manufacture, or elsewhere.
3.11 Contractor's Responsibility for Construction Means and Methods.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the methods and means of construction
and for the safe performance of the Work. The Contractor shall not employ any
methods or means of construction that will or are likely to:
(a)
endanger any persons or property or the Work;
(b)
cause or contribute to a delay in the progress of the Work or
conflict with the work of the Owner or any other contractor; or
(c)
result in a failure to perform the Work in accordance with the
Revised January 2007
14
Contract Documents.
3.12 Contractor's Work Force. The Contractor shall maintain on the Site
at all times a sufficient work force to carry out its obligations in an efficient and timely
manner. The Contractor shall employ only competent, skilled, reliable and honest
workmen who will work in harmony with other workmen at the Site.
The Contractor shall maintain harmony and cooperation among the
various trades. No time extensions will be granted by the Owner in the event of job-site
labor disputes, work stoppages or suspensions of work unless such disputes or other
events are area-wide in nature or the Owner determines, in its reasonable judgment,
that the dispute is one over which the Contractor has no control and could not
reasonably prevent.
The Contractor shall provide a competent, experienced, reliable and
honest supervisory staff, including a Project Manager or Managers and a Project
Superintendent or Superintendents, a Project PME Coordinator or Coordinators and a
cost estimator or estimators who shall be subject to the Owner's approval, to administer,
coordinate, supervise and superintend the Work. An authorized representative of the
Contractor with authority to act on its behalf shall be present at the Site at all times while
Work is being performed.
The Contractor's Project Manager(s) or Superintendents(s), or an
authorized officer of the Contractor shall attend and participate in all scheduled job
meetings at the Project or at a convenient nearby location designated by the Owner.
3.13 Project Manager. The Contractor shall designate a Project Manager
to represent the Contractor for all purposes concerning the Project and the Work. All
instructions, approvals, disapprovals and other communications to the Contractor
delivered to the Contractor's Project Manager shall be effective against the Contractor
when so delivered.
3.14 Conduct Of Contractor's Personnel. The Contractor shall be
responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees and
Subcontractors and their respective agents and employees, and other persons
performing portions of the Work. The Contractor and all Subcontractors and all other
persons performing portions of the Work shall comply with all applicable Codes, laws,
rules, regulations, writs, and orders of governmental authorities covering
nondiscriminatory practices and employment and affirmative action.
The Contractor shall maintain the good order and discipline of its
employees and other persons under its direction or control or present at the Site in
connection with the Work, and shall adopt and enforce regulations with respect to
safety, fire prevention, smoking, the use of alcoholic beverages, illegal drugs and other
controlled substances and other activities that may constitute a danger to life, health or
property.
Revised January 2007
15
At the Owner's instruction, the Contractor shall promptly remove from the
Site any employee who, in the Owner's opinion, represents a threat to the safety or
progress of the Project or persons on the Site.
3.15 Procurement of Material. The Contractor shall organize the
procurement of all necessary materials, supplies and equipment so that they will be
available as needed for the Work.
3.16 Storage and Delivery of Material. Subject to the provisions of
Section 8.13 hereof, the Contractor shall provide for safe and clean storage of
Materials and Construction Equipment acquired for installation in the Project in such
manner and at such places as shall be approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall
arrange for delivery for such Materials and Construction Equipment to the Site in
accordance with the Project Schedule.
3.17 Responsibility for Work and Materials. The Contractor shall be
solely responsible for Materials delivered and Work performed until its completion and
Final Acceptance.
Upon written notice from the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly rebuild,
repair or restore all Work (including but not limited to Materials) which has been
damaged or destroyed from any causes before completion and Final Acceptance of the
Work. The Contractor shall be reimbursed for the performance of such repair or
remedial work solely as follows.
(I)
If the claims are of the type covered by the insurance for the
Project as set forth in Article 9 of these General Conditions, the Contractor shall be
paid solely to the extent of any insurance proceeds actually paid under such policies by
the applicable insurer.
(ii)
For claims of a type not covered by the insurance for the
Project as set forth in Article 9 of these General Conditions and which arise from
damages caused by events or occurrences beyond the Contractor's and the
Subcontractors' control, the Contractor shall be entitled to a Change Order under
Article 5 of these General Conditions for the reasonable cost of repair or replacement;
(iii)
For claims of a type not covered by the insurance for the
Project and which arise from damages caused by events or occurrences within the
control of the Contractor or any Subcontractor, including, without limitation, the
negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to reimbursement. The cost of repair or replacement shall be borne by
the Contractor.
(iv)
The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the data
required under Section 8.3 of these General Conditions and any other information,
including cost or accounting data, required by the Owner or the Owner's insurers with
respect to the cause and circumstances surrounding any damage to the Work, the
Revised January 2007
16
extent of necessary repair or replacement, and the cost of repair or replacement. The
Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Owner in pursuing any insurance claims arising
from damage to or destruction of any portion of the Work.
The Contractor shall not store Materials on the Site or on the Project
structure where such storage could damage the structure or otherwise affect the safety
of the Project. The Contractor shall provide security and drainage and erect temporary
structures as necessary to protect the Work (including all Materials) from damage. The
Contractor shall be responsible for Materials not delivered to the Site but for which any
progress payment has been made to the same extent as if the Materials were so
delivered. The Contractor shall not overload the Site with Materials or equipment.
3.18 Contractor's Responsibility to Detect and Avoid Errors. The
Contractor shall carefully study and compare all existing conditions, Drawings,
Specifications and other Contract Documents; shall verify all figures on the Drawings
before laying out the Work; shall notify the Architect and Owner, in writing, of all errors,
inconsistencies, or omissions which it may discover within five (5) days after such
discovery; and shall obtain specific instructions in writing before proceeding with the
Work. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any apparent error or omission which
may be found in the Drawings or Specifications, but shall cooperate in good faith with
the Owner and the A/E to resolve any ambiguities, inconsistencies, or defects in the
Contract Documents in a manner that will not result in an increase in the Contract Price
or a delay in the progress of the Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for
material errors or omissions in the Drawings or Specifications which it could not
reasonably have identified by careful study of the documents, but will cooperate with the
Owner to mitigate the adverse consequences of such errors or omissions. Errors or
omissions in construction caused by the Contractor's failure to detect errors, omissions,
or inconsistencies in the Drawings or Specifications which it should reasonably have
discovered shall be corrected at the Contractor's sole expense and the Contractor shall
not be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time to carry out such repairs or
corrections. Omission from the Drawings or Specifications or the misdescription of
details of Work which are manifestly necessary to carry out the intent of the Drawings
and Specifications, or which are customarily performed, shall not relieve the Contractor
from performing such omitted Work or misdescribed details of the Work and they shall
be performed as if fully and correctly set forth and described in the Drawings and
Specifications.
3.19 Conditions Affecting the Work. The Contractor represents that
before entering into the Agreement, it conducted a reasonable investigation and
examination of the Site, carefully examined the Contract Documents and any other
documents made available to it by the Owner (which may include legal descriptions of
the Site, results of tests, reports of independent testing agencies and surveys and
documents indicating the location of utilities and other structures to the extent obtained
by the Owner), and reviewed the Work with the appropriate governmental officials and
examined documents available through such officials so as to ascertain the nature and
location of the Work, the nature of the Site, the need to coordinate its Work with the
work of other contractors and the Owner, possible delay in commencing the various
Revised January 2007
17
phases of the Work, the possibility of obstacles and conditions not identified by the
Owner (and the cost to the Contractor and impact on its schedule of such unidentified
items), conditions relating to the transportation, handling and storage of materials,
availability of labor, the effect of any labor agreements to which the Owner is a party,
water, roads, weather, topographic and subsurface conditions, applicable provisions of
law, and the character and availability of equipment, material and facilities needed
before and during prosecution of the Work.
The Contractor agrees that any information furnished to it by the Owner,
its employees and agents, or the A/E concerning the items detailed in the earlier portion
of this Section 3.19 is for informational purposes only and does not constitute a
representation by the Owner as to any of those items, unless expressly set forth
elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor acknowledges that any
information furnished to it by the Owner may be incomplete or incorrect, and that it has
taken such additional steps as may be necessary to satisfy itself as to the actual
conditions, and has included in the Contract Price sufficient allocations for unknown or
unidentified conditions.
The failure of the Contractor to have done any of the foregoing shall not
relieve the Contractor of its duty to perform the Work for the cost and within the time
provided in the Contract Documents, and shall not entitle the Contractor to any
adjustment in the Contract Time or the Contract Price, unless expressly provided to the
contrary elsewhere in the Agreement or these General Conditions.
3.20 Security of Project Area. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
protection and security of the Site and of all Work (including all Materials, supplies and
Construction Equipment) whether on or off the Site. The Contractor shall provide, at its
own expense, guards, watchmen or other adequate security for the Project. The
Contractor shall take all necessary security measures to protect the people and property
on and adjacent to the Site and the public.
3.21 Safety Requirements. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all
safety devices or measures required by any applicable law, regulation, ordinance,
Code, or rule, or by the Owner's insurer, or by Project conditions, for the protection of
the health and safety of all persons and the protection of property from damage due to
the Work. These devices or measures shall include, without limitation, appropriate
barriers, safety nets, scaffolding, barricades, fences, flagmen, fire prevention equipment
and other measures, and posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, and
the promulgation and enforcement of safety regulations.
The Contractor shall
determine and inform the Owner when it would be appropriate to notify owners and
users of adjacent utilities and properties of conditions arising from the Work. The
Contractor shall also, as appropriate, notify, in a manner and form approved by Owner,
owners and users of adjacent utilities and properties of conditions arising from the
Work, so that they likewise may take precautions to protect their health, safety, or
property.
The Contractor shall include a Hazard Communication Standard Policy in
Revised January 2007
18
its safety program. The policy shall conform to the criteria set forth in OSHA Standard
1926.59. as it may be revised throughout the life of the Project. The Contractor and
Subcontractors of every tier shall submit Material Safety Data Sheets ("MSDS") in
duplicate to the A/E for all materials for which an MSDS is required prior to bringing
such materials onto the Site. The Contractor shall maintain an up-to-date master file of
all MSDS sheets submitted by it and its Subcontractors of any tier, which file shall be
available for inspection at the Site. The Contractor shall provide a Hazardous
Substance Survey Form ("HSSF") listing any and all of the Hazardous Materials which
the Contractor may use or bring within or near the Site. The MSDS and HSSF
described hereinabove are submitted to the Architect for the use of the Owner and the
Architect and their submittal by the Contractor shall not relieve or reduce the
Contractor's responsibility under applicable regulations.
The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to prevent interference with
adjacent properties. The Contractor shall not close or obstruct streets, sidewalks,
alleys, or other public thoroughfares unless all permits required by law to do so have
been obtained. Any damage to public property, private property, or to utilities, including
but not limited to business interruption losses, resulting from the acts or omissions of
the Contractor shall be corrected or remedied by the Contractor in a manner approved
by the Owner and the party whose property has been damaged, all at no additional cost
to the Owner.
The Contractor shall prepare a program of supervision and shall initiate,
maintain, and supervise safety precautions and programs to assure that the
Subcontractors comply with all legal requirements, all safety and insurance
requirements and other standards and requirements applicable to construction of the
Project.
When required by law or for the safety of the Work or adjoining property,
the Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin and protect foundations and other
portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work.
3.22 Loss Prevention Program. The Contractor shall establish and
administer a safety and loss prevention program, including a fire prevention program, in
compliance with the requirements of all concerned insurance carriers and those
governmental agencies having jurisdiction over the Project. The Contractor shall
designate a safety and loss prevention supervisor and shall give him responsibility and
authority to enforce the program and to coordinate the Contractor's safety program with
those of the insurance carriers and other contractors.
3.23 Destruction of Project. If the Project is totally or partially destroyed
and the Owner elects to rebuild, the Contractor shall continue its services during the
reconstruction.
3.24 Reports of Accidents. The Contractor shall report, in writing, to the
Owner and any other persons the Owner designates, any accident occurring on or off
Revised January 2007
19
the Site that relates to the Work. Such reports must be made promptly but, in any
event, no later than twenty-four (24) hours after the accident occurs. In addition, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner by telephone or messenger of any
accident resulting in death or serious personal injury or material property damage. The
Contractor's reports of accidents shall include all known details of the circumstances of
the accident, the nature and extent of any injuries or property damage, the names of all
witnesses and other persons having knowledge of the circumstances of the accident,
and such other details as the Owner or the Owner's insurers may require. The
Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Owner and the Owner's insurers in dealing with
any claim resulting from an accident.
Notwithstanding any other record keeping with respect to accidents, the
Contractor shall create and maintain a complete accident file in such form and
containing such information as the Owner, the Owner's insurers, and applicable Codes
(including, without limitation, OSHA) may require.
3.25 Contractor's Responsibility in Emergencies. In the event of an
emergency threatening health, life or property, the Contractor shall take such action as
may be necessary to save lives and protect persons from injury and, this being done, to
protect and preserve property. The Contractor shall notify the Owner of any such
emergency as promptly as is practicable under the circumstances.
3.26
Contractor's Equipment and Services.
Unless the Contract
Documents specifically provide to the contrary, the Contractor shall supply all
equipment and services necessary to perform the Work, including but not limited to the
following:
(a)
Temporary Services. Temporary light, electric power, heat
and HVAC service, water, telephones, construction and personnel elevator service,
sanitary facilities and other temporary services necessary in connection with the Work.
The Contractor shall obtain electrical service directly from the PECO Energy Company
and all other necessary services directly from the company or utility providing those
services and shall not use Owner’s facilities. All such services shall be provided at
Contractor’s expense through the date of substantial completion of the Work.
(b)
Tools and Equipment. All tools, scaffolding, equipment and
incidental materials required for the performance of the Work.
(c)
Hoists and Material Handling. Hoists, cranes and other
material-handling equipment necessary in connection with the Work.
(d)
Weather Protection.
Weather protection, including
temporary heating and ventilation as necessary to protect the Work and to provide a
suitable working environment.
3.27 Clean-up. The Contractor shall keep the Work and the area in which
it is being done safe, clean and sanitary, and shall arrange for the removal from the Site
Revised January 2007
20
and legal disposal of all rubbish, packing materials, scrap, rubble and other waste
material. Flammable materials and chemicals and other Hazardous Materials will be
properly removed from the Site by the Contractor at the end of each day. The
Contractor shall provide such additional clean-up services as may be required by the
Owner to meet the Owner's standards for cleanliness and safety. If the Contractor fails
to clean up as required, the Owner may do so and charge the costs thereof to the
Contractor.
3.28 Cutting and Patching. The Contractor shall be responsible for all
cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its
several parts fit in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not
damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any other
contractor by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any Work, or by excavation. The
Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the Work of the Owner or any other contractor
except with the written consent of the Owner. The Contractor shall not unreasonably
withhold or delay from the Owner or any other contractor its consent to cutting or
otherwise altering the Work.
No cutting through any existing structure shall be done by the Contractor
without the Contractor's first performing such testing as may be required by the Owner
and the A/E to see that the integrity of the existing structure will be maintained and that
the structure will not be damaged by such cutting. If structural integrity may be affected
by cutting, the Contractor shall immediately notify the A/E and the Owner and take such
actions as may be recommended by the A/E and approved by the Owner to correct any
damage or restore the integrity of the structure. If the Contractor performs cutting
through existing structures without the approval of the Owner and the A/E, all damages
and costs of correction shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
3.29 Covering and Uncovering the Work. The Contractor shall, when
instructed to do so by the Owner, uncover any portion of the Work that has been
covered to permit observation, inspection or testing for such Work.
Except as provided herein, if the Work so uncovered was performed in
accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall bear the cost of uncovering
and recovering. If the Work so uncovered was not performed in accordance with the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear such cost of covering and uncovering.
If the Work was covered contrary to the requirements of applicable Codes,
the Contract Documents (including Section 3.7 hereof) or the timely request of the A/E
or the Owner, the Contractor shall bear the cost of such uncovering and recovering, and
the related cost of the A/E's services and expenses. The Contractor shall repair or
replace any damage to its own Work or the work of any other contractor or the Owner
resulting from its own negligence, from the willful disregard of direct instructions from
the Owner or A/E, or caused by such uncovering and recovering and shall be
responsible for any resulting delays in the progress of the Work.
3.30 Repair and Replacement of Defective Work. When instructed to do
Revised January 2007
21
so by the Owner, the Contractor shall do the following with respect to defective Work:
(a)
promptly repair and replace any Work found by the A/E or
the Owner to have been performed or installed in violation of the Contract
Documents; and
(b)
promptly repair and replace any Work found to be defective
within the period provided for under Section 3.36 of these General Conditions.
In no event shall the Contractor be reimbursed for the cost to repair or
replace defective Work. The Contractor shall promptly repair any damage to the Work
or the work of any other contractor or the Owner caused by such repair or removal and
replacement. If the Contractor does not promptly replace rejected material or correct
rejected workmanship to the satisfaction of the Owner, the Owner may: (1) by separate
contract or otherwise, replace such material or correct such workmanship and charge
the Contractor the cost, (2) terminate the Agreement or the Contractor's right to proceed
with the Work in accordance with the default provisions of the Agreement, or (3)
exercise any other remedy provided for under the Contract Documents or applicable
law.
The failure of the Owner or the A/E to order the removal of defective or
non-conforming Work shall not constitute an acceptance of such Work, nor shall such
failure relieve the Contractor of its responsibility therefor.
The Contractor shall insert a provision substantially similar to this Section
3.30 of these General Conditions in each of its Subcontracts.
3.31 As-Built Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor and each
Subcontractor shall keep on file at the Site one complete copy of the Construction
Documents as issued by the A/E, in good order and marked currently to record all
changes, revisions and additions made during construction, whether pursuant to Field
Order (as defined in Section 5.3 of these General Conditions) or otherwise, which are
not reflected on approved Shop Drawings or Change Orders, and the location and detail
of Work installed on a Field Order basis, as well as a complete set of approved Shop
Drawings and Change Orders (collectively, the "As-Built Drawings").
The As-Built Drawings shall be made available for review by the Owner
and the A/E at all times and the Contractor shall meet with the Owner and the A/E not
less than once per week to review such documents for accuracy and completeness.
One (1) complete set of good quality red-lined white prints of the final As-Built Drawings
shall be delivered to the A/E, pursuant to Section 8.9 of the General Conditions, after
final inspection of the Work by the A/E, but before, and as a condition precedent to,
Final Payment.
3.32 Signs. The Contractor shall not display on or about the Site any
sign, trademark or other advertisement without the prior consent of the Owner. The
Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner for the placing of the Owner's signs (if any)
Revised January 2007
22
on the Project and on temporary equipment.
3.33 Final Clean-up. As soon as practicable after the Substantial
Completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all of its project offices, equipment,
tools, temporary fences, barriers, barricades, scaffolding and other material from the
Site. If the Contractor fails to do so, the Owner may do so and charge the cost thereof
to the Contractor.
3.34 Owner's Right to Stop the Work. If the Contractor fails to correct
Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or
fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, in
addition to any other rights or remedies available to it, may order the Contractor, in
writing, to stop the Work, or any portion of the Work, until the cause for the order has
been eliminated. In the event that the Owner exercises its rights pursuant to this
section, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Time as a result. The Owner's right to stop the Work shall not give rise to a
duty to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor, any Subcontractor or any
other person.
3.35 Owner's Right to Perform Contractor's Work and Backcharge. If the
Contractor or any Subcontractor defaults or fails to carry out any of its obligations under
the Contract Documents, the Owner, after seventy-two hours written notice to the
Contractor and without prejudice to any other remedy the Owner may have, may carry
out any or all of the obligations of the Contractor or Subcontractor, either directly or
through others, and charge the cost thereof, including without limitation the resulting
additional expenses of the A/E to the Contractor. The performance of such obligations
by the Owner or by others shall not relieve the Contractor of any obligation or liability for
the Work and shall not operate to waive any right or claim of Owner.
3.36 Warranty of Contractor and Subcontractors to the Owner. The
Contractor warrants that all Work (which for purposes of this section shall be deemed to
include unauthorized work which has not been removed and any non-conforming
materials incorporated into the Work) to be of good quality and free from any defective
or faulty material and workmanship. The provisions of this warranty are not limited in
any way by the time limitation on the Contractor's duty to correct set forth below.
If at anytime within one (1) year after the date of Final Acceptance, or
such longer period required under applicable law or the Contract Documents, the Owner
notifies the Contractor of any defect in the Work or any failure of the Work to conform
with the Contract Documents, the Contractor will, within ten (10) days thereafter,
commence, and prosecute diligently, all work necessary to fulfill the terms of the
warranty, at the Contractor's sole expense. In addition, the Contractor shall, at its sole
expense, repair and replace any portions of the Work (or work of other contractors)
damaged by such defective Work or which becomes damaged in the course of repairing
or replacing defective Work. For any Work so corrected, the Contractor's obligation
hereunder to correct defective Work shall be reinstated for an additional one-year period
(or for such longer period as provided in the second sentence of this Section 3.36),
Revised January 2007
23
commencing with the date of acceptance of the corrected Work. Contractor shall
provide staff to manage warranty claims and coordinate all warranty work.
Neither the Final Payment by the Owner nor the Final Acceptance of the
Work by the Owner shall relieve the Contractor from responsibility hereunder for any
defects in workmanship or materials. Any provisions of the Specifications providing for
any longer or extended warranty shall be deemed to be complementary and not in
conflict with this section.
3.37 Owner's Right to Take Possession. The Owner shall have the right
to take and/or permit any designated person to occupy or use, any completed or
partially completed portions of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing
the entire Work or such portions may not have expired, but such taking possession and
use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any Work not completed in accordance with
the Contract Documents or trigger commencement of any warranty period under the
Contract Documents. The Owner's right to take possession hereunder is not contingent
upon whether progress payments have been made for such Work. Any such use by the
Owner will not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to maintain insurance in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Owner shall notify
the Contractor of any such taking or use prior to the proposed commencement thereof,
and the Contractor shall deliver a list to the Owner promptly after its receipt of such
notification, listing the items in the portions of the Work to be taken or used which, in the
Contractor's opinion, are fully completed or which require further Work, and, in the latter
case, the unfinished portion of such items. Such list shall be subject to the reasonable
approval of the Owner, and the Contractor and the Owner agree to use their best efforts
to agree on such list. The Owner and the Contractor shall also make mutually
acceptable arrangements in respect of operation and cost of necessary security,
maintenance and utilities, including but not limited to heating, ventilating, cooling, water,
lighting, telephone services and elevators. The Contractor's acceptance of the
arrangements proposed by the Owner in respect of such matters shall not be
unreasonably withheld, delayed or conditioned. The Project Schedule shall take into
account the Owner's early occupancy requirements, if any.
3.38 Project Meetings. During the construction of the Project, the
Contractor shall hold project meetings at least once a week with representatives of the
Subcontractors. The Owner's Representative shall be notified not less than five (5)
working days in advance of the time of each such meeting and shall have the right to
attend such meeting. If requested by the Owner, within three (3) working days after
each such meeting, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a complete and accurate
set of minutes of the meeting.
The Contractor shall hold project meetings every week with the Owner,
the A/E and such major Subcontractors as deemed necessary by the Owner. The
Contractor shall insure that a representative of all appropriate Subcontractors attends
such project meetings and that each such representative has the authority to bind the
Subcontractor that he or she represents. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor
shall take minutes at such meetings and circulate them to the attendees after each
Revised January 2007
24
meeting. These minutes shall be deemed to be approved by all parties attending the
meetings unless they state otherwise, in writing, within three (3) days of receiving the
minutes.
3.39 Monthly Status Report. During the Construction Phase of the
Project, the Contractor shall prepare and provide to the Owner, on a monthly basis, a
report of the Project's status ("Monthly Status Report"), in such form as Owner
reasonably requests. Each Monthly Status Report shall concisely but completely
describe, in narrative form, the then current status of the Work, including, without
limitation:
(a)
a review of actual progress during the month in comparison
to the scheduled progress and, if actual progress is behind schedule, a
discussion of any "work-around" or "catch-up plan" that the Contractor has
employed or will employ to recover the original schedule;
(b)
progress photographs as necessary or as requested by the
Owner to document the then-current status of the Work;
(c)
a review of any significant technical problems encountered
during the month, and the resolution or plan for resolution of such problems;
(d)
a complete review of the status of Change Orders, including
a review of any changes in the critical path of the Project Schedule which result
from Change Orders approved by Owner during the month, as well as a review of
the schedule impact of Change Order Requests then pending;
(e)
a summary of any claims anticipated by the Contractor with
respect to the Work, including the anticipated cost and schedule impacts of any
such claims; and
(f)
a cumulative summary of the number of days and the extent
to which the progress of the Work was delayed by adverse weather, including a
tabulation and comparison of the actual days of adverse weather to the days of
adverse weather for which provision has been made in the Project Schedule.
3.40 Removal and Relocation of Utilities. The Contractor shall locate
drainage or sewer lines, water, gas, and other utility and electrical service lines, piping
and conduits that will interfere with the Work and shall trace such lines to determine, in
consultation with the appropriate public authorities and utility companies, which lines are
active and which are or should be abandoned. The Contractor shall be responsible for
removing abandoned service lines and relocating active service lines which interfere
with the Work. Service lines which are to be removed shall be capped or plugged and
made gastight and watertight in conformity with the requirements of the appropriate
public authorities or utility companies.
Revised January 2007
25
3.41 Temporary Services and Facilities. The Contractor shall provide
temporary services and facilities as necessary for the proper and expeditious
prosecution of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.42 Hazardous Materials. The Contractor shall perform the Work at all
times in compliance with all statutes, ordinances, regulations, orders, Codes and
requirements of common law concerning (I) the Work, (ii) handling of any materials, (iii)
discharges to the air, soil, surface water or ground water, and (iv) storage, treatment or
disposal of any waste at or connected with any activity at the Site ("Environmental
Statutes").
The Contractor shall cause all activities at the Site to be conducted in
compliance with all Environmental Statutes. The Contractor shall cause all permits,
licenses or approvals to be obtained, and shall cause all notifications to be made, as
required by Environmental Statutes. The Contractor shall, at all times, cause
compliance with the terms and conditions of any such approvals or notifications.
During the term of the Agreement, the Contractor shall provide to the
Owner and the A/E copies of:
(I)
applications or other materials submitted to any
governmental agency in compliance with Environmental Statutes; (ii) any notifications
submitted to any person pursuant to Environmental Statutes; (iii) any permit, license,
approval, amendment or modification thereto granted pursuant to Environmental
Statutes; (iv) any record or manifest required to be maintained pursuant to
Environmental Statutes; and (v) any correspondence, notice of violation, summons,
order, complaint or other document received by the Contractor, pertaining to compliance
with any Environmental Statutes.
The Contractor shall not permit contamination of the Site by Hazardous
Materials during the term of the Agreement. The Contractor shall, at all times during the
term of the Agreement, cause Hazardous Materials to be handled on the Site in a
manner which will not cause an undue risk of contamination of the Site.
For purposes of the Contract Documents, the term "contamination" shall
mean the uncontained presence of Hazardous Materials at the Site, or arising from the
Site, which may require clean up under any applicable law.
In the event of any contamination of the Site caused, in whole or in part,
by the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to direct the clean up of such
contamination to levels that the Owner in its sole opinion determines necessary and the
cost thereof shall be borne by the Contractor.
If the Contractor encounters, on the Site, materials which the Contractor
reasonably believes to be Hazardous Materials, including, but not limited to, asbestos or
polychlorinated biphenyl, which have not been placed on the Site by the Contractor, and
which have not been rendered harmless, and for which no express provision has
Revised January 2007
26
previously been made in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately stop
work in the affected area and immediately report the condition to the Owner in writing.
The Contractor shall resume its performance of the Work in the affected areas within
five (5) days after receipt of the Owner's notice that the Hazardous Materials have been
removed, rendered harmless, or reduced to acceptable background levels, either by the
Contractor pursuant to a Change Order, or by a separate contractor selected by the
Owner.
If the Contractor experiences delays to its work or an increase in costs of
completing the Work as a result of encountering Hazardous Materials as described
above, it may be entitled to appropriate adjustments in the Contract Time or in the
Contract Price or both, subject to the provisions of Article 5 and Article 7.
3.43 Written Warranties and Close-out Documents. The Contractor shall
assemble, in a form approved by the Owner, all written warranties, guarantees,
operating manuals, and certificates required by the Contract Documents and furnished
by or through any Subcontractor, including Suppliers, with respect to the Work and
deliver them, along with the Record Drawings and Specifications maintained pursuant to
Section 3.31 of these General Conditions, to the A/E. All written warranties provided
under the Agreement shall run directly to the Owner, allowing the Owner directly to
enforce them, or shall be assigned, in writing, to the Owner by the Contractor. If the
Owner requests, the Contractor shall also provide written confirmation of such
assignment from the entity providing the warranty, in a form satisfactory to the Owner.
The Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Owner in enforcing the terms of any
Subcontractor's warranties or guarantees.
3.44 Patents. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The
Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and hold the
Owner harmless for loss on account thereof, but shall not be liable for any claim or
damage resulting from any claim that the Drawings or Specifications infringe on a thirdparties' patent or copyright rights, unless the Contractor knew or reasonably should
have known of such infringement.
3.45 Walk Through. Approximately one (1) month before the expiration of
the period within which the Contractor must correct the Work as provided in the
Contract Documents, on a date mutually acceptable to the Owner and the Contractor,
the Contractor shall accompany the Owner on an inspection of the Project and the Work
to identify those items which may require correction prior to the end of such period.
3.46 Existing Structures. The Contractor further acknowledges that the
Owner may occupy and use certain buildings together with other buildings and
improvements in the general vicinity of the Project, the "Existing Buildings") while the
Contractor is performing the Work. The Contractor shall not restrict or block access for
vehicles and pedestrians to and from the Existing Buildings without the prior approval of
the Owner.
Revised January 2007
27
The Contractor shall not permit any entrance, street or walkway to be
closed or blocked for any length of time (other than momentarily) to vehicular and/or
pedestrian traffic.
The Contractor shall exercise the highest care and take all precautions to
minimize noise and any construction hazards that in any way could cause damage to
the Existing Buildings or discomfort, danger or harm to the occupants thereof or to
pedestrians in the areas surrounding the Site. The Contractor shall not permit any
vehicles to sit idling near the Site. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with at least
on (1) week's prior written notice of any utility disruptions at the Site. Notwithstanding
the designation of construction limits or the indication of temporary fences or barricades,
the provisions of the Contract Documents governing certain portions or phases of the
Work may require that certain operations be carried out beyond such designated limits.
Trenching, utility work, site development, landscaping and all other Work, if required
beyond such designated limits, shall be scheduled in such a manner as to cause or
occasion a minimum of inconvenience or disturbance to or interference with the normal
operation of the Owner, abutters, and the public. The Contractor shall obtain the
Owner's prior approval for such operations, prosecute such operations expeditiously
and restore the affected area and other areas needed for access to their original
condition immediately upon completion of such operations, unless otherwise specified
herein. Without the prior approval of the Owner, the Contractor shall not permit any
workers to use any existing facilities at the Site, including, without limitation, lavatories,
entrances and parking areas, other than those designated by the Owner. Without
limitation of any other provision of this Agreement, the Contractor shall comply with all
rules and regulations promulgated by the Owner in connection with the use and
occupancy of the Site, as amended from time to time.
3.47 Taxes. The Contractor shall pay all sales, use consumer and similar
taxes for the Work or portions thereof which are applicable throughout its performance
of the Work. The Contractor hereby assigns and transfers to the Owner all of its rights
to sales and use tax which may be refunded as a result of a claim for refund for
materials and equipment purchased in connection with this Agreement. The Contractor
further agrees that it will not file a claim for refund for any sales or use tax which is the
subject of this assignment but will cooperate in the filing of any such refund requests by
the Owner.
3.48 Lay-Down Area. The Contractor shall use such space as the Owner
shall designate during the course of the Project for lay-down, storage and staging
purposes in connection with the Work.
Revised January 2007
28
ARTICLE 4
THE ARCHITECT / ENGINEER (A/E)
AND THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
4.1
General. The responsibilities and authority of the A/E and the
Owner's Representative are defined in Sections 4.2 and 4.3, respectively, of these
General Conditions. Their authority is limited by Section 4.4.
4.2
Architect / Engineer.
4.2.1 Observation. The A/E will keep the Owner informed of the
progress of the Work, endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in
the Work, and seek to ensure that the Work is being performed in accordance with the
Contract Documents. The Owner and the A/E may periodically observe the progress
and quality of the Work. The Owner and the A/E will not, however, be responsible for
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
4.2.2 Review of Contractor's Submittals. The A/E will review and
approve or take other appropriate action with respect to all Submittals and revisions
thereof (including large Samples required to be furnished at the Site) properly submitted
by the Contractor as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. It will also advise
the Owner and the Contractor of the basis for the rejection of any such Submittals. Such
reviews and approvals shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any
deficiency that may exist or for any departures or deviations from the requirements of
the Contract Documents, or from the responsibility to coordinate the work of the various
trades.
All requests for the
4.2.3
Interpretation and Clarification.
clarification or interpretation of any Drawings and Specifications shall be made to the
Owner. The A/E will interpret and, as necessary, clarify Drawings and Specifications
and prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications when requested to do
so by the Owner.
4.2.4 (Intentionally Omitted)
4.2.5 Progress Payments. The A/E will report to the Owner
monthly on the progress of the Work, review all requests by the Contractor for progress
payments, and advise the Owner if the requested payment is consistent with the
progress of the Work.
Substantial
4.2.6
Inspection for Substantial Completion.
Completion and Final Inspection shall be governed by Section 01700 of the Project
Specifications. The A/E will inspect the Work when the Contractor reports that the Work
is Substantially Complete and advise whether or not the Work has been Substantially
Revised January 2007
29
Completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
If the Work has been Substantially Completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents, the Architect will issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for
such Work and shall review the punch list of Work remaining to be completed or
replaced which shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to A/E at the time
Contractor reports that the work is substantially complete. Thereafter the A/E shall
continue to inspect such Work until it has been completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
If more than one final review of any element or portion of the Work is
required, the additional costs incurred by the A/E or the Owner shall be borne by the
Contractor.
4.2.7 Warranties, Guarantees and Manuals. The A/E will receive
from the Contractor and deliver to the Owner all warranties, guarantees, certificates,
operating manuals, Record Drawings and other documents which the Contractor is
required to deliver under the Contract Documents.
4.3
The Owner's Representative.
The Owner will designate an
Owner's Representative who shall have authority to act on behalf of the Owner with
respect to the Project as provided in the Contract Documents or as otherwise specified
by the Owner in writing.
Subject to Section 5.14 hereof, no instruction, approval, disapproval,
communication or other act purporting to be that of the Owner shall be valid unless
issued or confirmed by the Owner's Representative, in writing.
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, all communications
to the Owner shall be effective only when delivered to the Owner's Representative in
writing.
4.4
Limits of Authority. Neither the A/E nor the Owner's Representative
is authorized to modify or amend the Contract Documents or, except as provided in
Section 4.2 of these General Conditions, to authorize any change in the Work or
extension of the Contract Time except with the written authorization of the Owner
permitting the modification or amendment. The A/E may not reject Work, except in the
event of an emergency threatening persons or property.
Revised January 2007
30
ARTICLE 5
CHANGES IN THE WORK AND
AMENDMENTS TO THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
5.1
Unauthorized Changes Prohibited. The Contractor shall perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the scope of the Work as
defined in the Contract Documents and the time for performance may be changed only
as provided in this Article.
5.2
Scope Changes. The Owner may, from time to time, and without
notice to or the consent of the Contractor or its surety, change the scope of the Work by
a written Change Order to the Contractor. Any change in the Contract Price or Contract
Time resulting from a change in scope shall be determined as provided in this Article.
The Contractor shall not amend, modify or waive any rights, powers or remedies under
any Subcontract without the prior written consent of the Owner, except to the extent that
such a change is clearly required due to a Change Order issued by the Owner. The
execution of a Change Order by the Contractor shall indicate the Contractor's
agreement with the terms thereof, including without limitation any change to the
Contract Time or to the Contract Price.
5.3
Field Changes. Except for scope changes as defined in Section
5.2 hereof, the Owner may, by Field Order, authorize or order minor changes in the
Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time and not
inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.
5.4
Specified Variations. An instruction by the Owner to perform Work
for which payment is to be made under the Contract Documents on a unit price, time
and materials or other formula basis, or to perform alternative or optional Work specified
in the Contract Documents, is not a Change Order or a modification of the Agreement.
Additional payments or credits or changes in the Contract Time resulting from the
performance of alternative or optional Work shall be made or allowed only as provided
in the Contract Documents.
5.5
Compliance with Owner's Instructions. Upon the receipt of written
instructions from the Owner or the Owner's Representative pursuant to Sections 5.25.4 above, the Contractor shall proceed to perform the work in accordance with such
instructions and otherwise in accordance with the Contract Documents, even if the
amount of additional payment, credit, or adjustment in the Contract Price, or the extent
of the change, if any, in the time required for performance resulting from such work has
not yet been determined, and even if there is a disagreement between the Owner and
the Contractor as to whether the Contractor is entitled to additional payment or an
extension of time for performing such work.
5.6
Change Initiated by Contractor. When a change in the Contract
Price or an adjustment in Contract Time is requested by the Contractor, the Contractor
Revised January 2007
31
shall submit a Job Modification to the Owner as provided in Section 5.12 of these
General Conditions.
If the Owner approves, in writing, any Job Modification including a change
in Contract Price or an adjustment in Contract time, or any negotiated variation thereof,
an appropriate Change Order shall be prepared by the Owner or the Architect and
executed by the Owner and the Contractor.
5.7
Change Initiated by Owner. When a change in the scope of the
Work is proposed by the Owner, the proposal shall be submitted to the Contractor in
writing, in the form of a Job Modification. As soon as reasonably possible after receipt of
such a request, but in no event more than three (3) days after receipt, the Contractor
shall deliver to the Owner the completed Job Modification, which shall include the
Contractor's proposed adjustments to the Contract Time and/or Contract Price in
connection with the proposed change, including, to the extent applicable, an itemized
breakdown of the following costs in connection with the proposed change:
(a)
Quantities of Materials;
(b)
Unit cost of Materials;
(c)
Total hours for each classification of labor;
(d)
Hourly rates applicable to each classification of labor;
(e)
Social Security, Old Age and Unemployment Insurance,
fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and
worker's compensation;
(f)
Bond premiums;
(g)
Rental value of equipment (excluding small tools as defined
in Section 5.10 (a)(2));
(h)
Subcontractors' predetermined allowance for overhead and
profit, if any;
(I)
Transportation costs;
(j)
Additional insurance premiums;
(k)
All impact or "ripple" costs;
(l)
Number of additional calendar days, if any required to
complete the additional work.
(m)
Total proposed cost to the Owner; and
(n)
Such other information as the Owner reasonably requests.
Revised January 2007
32
If the Owner approves, in writing, any Contractor's Job Modification which
includes a change in Contract Price, or any negotiated variation thereof, an appropriate
Change Order shall be prepared by the Owner or the Architect and executed by the
Owner and the Contractor.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Section 5.7, the
Owner may require the Contractor to proceed immediately with a change in the Work
pursuant to Section 5.9, without requesting a Job Modification.
5.8
Pricing and Payment of Approved Change Orders. Adjustments to
the Contract Price resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined on any of
the following bases, at Owner's discretion:
(a)
an agreed lump sum;
(b)
using applicable unit prices previously agreed to by the
Owner and the Contractor, unless the nature of the change makes the
application of unit prices inequitable to either party;
(c)
by cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the
parties; or
(d)
based on allowable time and material costs and savings of
those performing the Change Order work, in accordance with Section 5.10 of
these General Conditions, and in the case of an increase in the Contract Price,
the allowances for overhead and profit set forth in Section 5.11 hereof. The
amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor for a deletion or change which
results in a net decrease in the Contract Price shall be the actual net cost as
determined by the Owner.
All Change Orders shall include the documentation specified in Section
5.7 and shall be subject to the provisions of Section 5.10 and Section 5.11. After the
Contractor and the Owner have agreed as to the pricing of a Change Order, and a
Change Order has been executed by both, the Contractor shall be paid on account of
the Change Order work as provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner and the
Contractor agree that a Change Order includes provision for all costs associated with
the change to which it relates, including direct costs, impact and/or "ripple" costs,
disruption costs and extensions of time for delays, and that the Contractor shall not be
entitled to any additional compensation or adjustments in the Contract Time or Contract
Price as a result of or in connection with the change.
5.9
Disputed Change Order. If the Owner and Contractor are unable to
agree that a change has occurred entitling the Contractor to an adjustment in the
Contract Price or Contract Time, the Contractor shall nevertheless proceed with the
Work involved. If the Owner and the Contractor are unable to agree as to the
adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time resulting from a change, the Owner
Revised January 2007
33
may order the Contractor to proceed with the performance of the work in question
pursuant to Section 5.8(d) hereof, and the Contractor shall expeditiously proceed with
the work involved.
5.10 Allowable Costs. If the Owner approves a Change Order on a time
and materials basis, allowable costs shall be governed by this Section 5.10. Allowable
costs include only:
(a)
For Work Performed by the Contractor:
(1)
Materials costs, which shall be the actual reasonable
costs of all Materials purchased by the Contractor and used in connection with the Work
undertaken pursuant to the Change Order, including sales taxes, freight and delivery
charges. The Owner reserves the right to approve Materials furnished by the
Contractor and the Contractor's sources of supply, or, if necessary to facilitate the
progress of the Work, itself to furnish the Materials to the Contractor.
(2)
The Contractor will be allowed a reasonable rental
charge for the time that machinery or Construction Equipment, not customarily owned
by workmen, are used at the Site by the Contractor. Construction Equipment and tools
having a replacement value of $1,000 or less, whether or not consumed or used, shall
be considered small tools and no payment will be made therefor.
(3)
Labor costs, which shall include welfare and fringe
benefits, and shall be the actual reasonable labor cost incurred in the Change Order
work, including no more than one (1) working foreman and excluding any other
supervisory or administrative personnel.
(4)
Materials, Construction Equipment rental, and other
costs shall be substantiated by vendors' invoices submitted with current reports or, if not
then available, with subsequent reports. If vendors' invoices are not submitted within
thirty (30) days after completion of the Work involved or if, in the Owner's opinion, the
cost of the Materials involved is excessive, then the cost of such items shall be deemed
to be the lowest current wholesale prices at which the items are available in the
quantities required, delivered to the Site, less cash or trade discounts. In no event shall
the reimbursable cost of Materials or Construction Equipment covered by this Section
5.10(a) exceed the average current wholesale prices at which the items are available in
the quantities required, delivered to the Site, less cash or trade discounts.
(b)
For Work performed by Subcontractors (other than Suppliers
or Materialmen): The reimbursable costs of work performed by Subcontractors under
this Section shall be based on the actual reasonable direct costs of Materials, labor, and
Construction Equipment determined pursuant to the provisions of Subsection (a) above,
5.11 Allowance for Overhead and Profit. For Change Orders that result in
an increase in the Contract Price, the total allowance for all overhead and profit
combined included in the total cost to Owner shall be based upon the following:
Revised January 2007
34
1.
For the Contractor, for any Work performed by the Contractor's own
forces, 10% of the cost.
2.
For the Contractor, for Work performed by Subcontractors under
Subcontracts with the Contractor, 7.5% of the amount due the
Subcontractor.
3.
For each Subcontractor under a Subcontract with the Contractor,
for Work performed by the Subcontractor’s own forces, 10% of the
cost.
4.
For each Subcontractor under a Subcontract with the Contractor,
for Work performed by such Subcontractor's subcontractors, 5% of
the cost.
5.
For each Sub-subcontractor under a Subcontract with a Subcontractor for work performed by such Sub-subcontractor, 7.5%
of the cost.
6.
Cost to which overhead and profit are to be applied shall be
determined in accordance with Section 5.10.
7.
In no case shall any lower tier Subcontractor receive more than a
12.875% combined markup for overhead and profit.
When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions
are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the
basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change.
5.12 Contractor's Change Order Request. If the Contractor believes that
it is entitled to a change pursuant to Section 5.6, the Contractor shall so notify the
Owner pursuant to Section 9 hereof. If the Contractor fails to so notify the Owner with
respect to any change, the Contractor shall forfeit any right to any recovery with respect
to such change.
The notice required under this Section 5.12 must identify the date of the
claimed change and describe with particularity the circumstance giving rise to it. To the
extent possible, the notice must also include a statement of whether and to what extent
the claimed change will affect the cost of performing the Work or the time required to
perform it.
5.13 Contract Time. If the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree on
adjustments to the Contract Time as a result of a Change Order, the Owner shall make
a reasonable determination thereof.
5.14 Documentation of Time and Material Charges and Cost Adjustments.
Revised January 2007
35
The Contractor shall not be entitled to be paid costs reimbursable under Section 5.8(d)
unless and until the documentation required by Section 8.6 of the Agreement has been
properly maintained and made available to the Owner for audit and copying.
The Contractor shall maintain such records as the Owner deems sufficient
to distinguish costs resulting from Change Order work from other costs and shall furnish
daily reports of this work, on forms approved by the Owner. The reports shall itemize all
costs for labor, materials, and construction equipment rental and show the total of the
costs to date. The reports shall include hours worked by workers engaged in Change
Order work, their rates of pay, names and classifications. The reports shall include size,
type, identification number and rental rates of Construction Equipment used in this work,
and their hours of operation. All records and reports shall be made immediately
available to the Owner upon its request. All such reports, including daily time sheets,
shall be signed by the Contractor or its authorized representative. When such reports
are agreed upon and signed by both parties, they will become the basis of payment to
the extent provided in this Article.
Any Change Order involving an adjustment to the Contract Price of
$50,000 or more must be signed by the Owner’s Vice President of Facilities or such
other officer as the Owner may specify in writing from time to time.
ARTICLE 6
SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES AND PRODUCT DATA
6.1
Schedule of Submittals. The Contractor shall prepare a schedule
for preparation and submission of Submittals. The schedule shall provide for
appropriate turnaround times for the various trades. The schedule shall be submitted to
the Owner and shall be subject to approval by the Owner and the A/E.
6.2
Submission by Contractor. Before performing any of the Work, the
Contractor shall submit to the A/E for review Submittals for all elements of the Work as
required to precisely indicate or describe the Work to be performed. The Submittals
shall show the arrangement of all elements of the Work in relation to the architectural
drawings and shall provide for the proper functioning of all systems and adequate
access for maintenance. The Submittals shall provide access for future work, including
but not limited to, tenant finish work, if the Contract Documents so indicate.
6.3
Form of Submission. Submittals shall be in such form and shall
contain such detail as the A/E and the Owner shall require for purposes of review. The
procedures and specific requirements for the submission, review and approval or
disapproval of Submittals are set forth in the Submittals procedures issued by the A/E.
Before submitting
6.4
Verification of Data and Coordination.
Submittals, the Contractor shall verify materials, field measurements and construction
Revised January 2007
36
criteria relating thereto, shall stamp them with its signed stamp certifying their
completeness and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall coordinate its
Work with the Work of other contractors that might be affected thereby.
6.5
Composite Shop Drawings. Subcontractors in the mechanical and
electrical trades, and other Subcontractors as necessary, shall prepare composite
Coordination Drawings. In the event of conflicts involving these trades, the Contractor
shall seek the assistance of the Architect as appropriate. The Contractor shall not be
entitled to an increase in the Contract Price as a result of any such conflict. The
Contractors shall revise the Coordination Drawings as may be required by multiple trade
reviews and adjustments without additional compensation or time.
6.6
Review and Approval. The Contractor shall not perform any portion
of the Work until the Shop Drawings and other Submittals applicable to that portion of
the Work have been approved for construction by the Architect, as appropriate, in
accordance with the procedure referred to in Section 6.3 of these General Conditions.
The approval of Shop Drawings or any other Submittal for any portion of the Work shall
not be approval of any system of which it may be a part.
6.7
Contractor's Responsibility. The review and approval of Submittals
by the A/E shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
6.8
Compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Submittals shall
meet the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall include
with any Submittals a clear description of the extent, if any, to which the Submittals do
not meet those requirements.
6.9
Work to be Performed in Accordance with Approved Shop
Drawings. The Contractor shall carry out its Work in accordance with the approved
Submittals.
6.10 Substitutions. Any request by the Contractor for the approval of
equivalent materials when the Contract Documents provide for the use of a specified
item or "approved equal" shall be in accordance with Specification Section 01-2500,
Product Substitutions or Section 1.8 of these General Conditions if the technical
specifications do not address this issue. Owner shall in all cases have the unfettered
right to require that the specified item be provided and to reject any or all requests for
product substitution.
6.11 Preliminary Submissions. Whenever the Specifications do not
specifically identify an item to be installed, the Contractor may, before providing a
Submittal, provide the A/E and the Owner with a list of manufactured items which the
Contractor proposes to install in the Project, together with the manufacturer's
specifications, descriptive data and other information sufficient to enable the A/E and
the Owner to determine if such items are suitable. The A/E and the Owner shall review
this information, and the A/E shall notify the Contractor of items that are not suitable for
installation. The Contractor's provision of such information shall be in addition to, and
Revised January 2007
37
not in lieu of, proper Submittals required by this Article, and is intended solely for the
convenience of the Contractor and to assist the Contractor in the selection of items for
installation in the Project. The failure of the Owner or the A/E to reject an item on such
list shall not prejudice the right of the Owner or the A/E to reject Submittals, if any,
subsequently submitted, or to reject items on the basis of such Submittals.
Before approving any Submittal or any manufactured
6.12 Testing.
items, the Owner may require the Contractor to perform or have performed tests, or to
submit reliable test results, demonstrating the suitability and sufficiency of the material
or method or means of construction which the Contractor proposes to employ. The
costs of any such tests specified in the Contract Documents shall be at the Contractor's
expense, and the costs of any tests of materials, means and methods proposed by the
Contractor as a substitution shall be at the Contractor's expense.
ARTICLE 7
COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION
OF THE PROJECT AND THE PROJECT SCHEDULE
7.1
Commencement. The Contractor shall commence the Work upon
the Commencement Date.
7.2
Project Schedule. The Contractor will perform the Work and
complete various portions of the Work in accordance with the Project Schedule, as
revised from time to time with the Owner's approval. All schedules utilized in the Project
must be approved by the Owner in writing and must be consistent with the Scheduled
Completion Date.
The Contractor shall prepare an overall Project Schedule within one week
after the Commencement Date in a form and with a degree of detail acceptable to the
Owner and, after the Owner has approved the initial Project Schedule, shall update it
monthly, or more frequently if necessary, throughout the term of the Agreement. The
Project Schedule shall include the sequences and durations of the various construction
activities. The Project Schedule shall reflect scheduling of labor activities, the ordering
and delivery of materials, furnishings, fixtures and equipment (including particularly
long-lead items), the preparation, review and processing of Submittals by the A/E and
Owner, and the obtaining of permits, whether those permits are to be obtained by the
Contractor or others.
The Project Schedule shall be prepared taking into account the need to
complete the Work in timely fashion, and shall provide for proper coordination among
the various Subcontractors and Contractor's own forces performing the Work and others
performing work in connection with the Project, so as to avoid conflicts and delays. The
Project Schedule shall be based upon the critical path method detailing critical and noncritical activities, dependencies and float, and including an explanation of the
assumptions and logic.
Revised January 2007
38
The Contractor shall prepare and update monthly a narrative of project
activities, stating who is responsible for each activity or event and by what date it is to
be completed. The Contractor shall distribute this listing to the Owner, the A/E and all
appropriate parties. The narrative listing shall be consistent with the Project Schedule.
Monthly updates of the Project Schedule shall take into account new or
more reliable information but no Updated Project Schedule shall change the Contract
Time or Scheduled Completion Date, except as those changes have been properly
effected by Change Order. Monthly updates of schedule shall be submitted with each
application for payment. The Owner or A/E may defer review of applications for
payment should the Contractor fail to submit revised schedule information.
Notwithstanding any of the dates set forth on the Project Schedule, the
Contractor shall, at all times, exert its aggressive best efforts to complete the Work at
the earliest possible date, and shall provide sufficient supervision, labor, equipment and
materials to assure the most efficient and speedy construction progress.
7.3
Acceleration. If the Contractor is behind the Project Schedule to
such an extent that the Owner reasonably determines that the Contractor will be unable
to meet any of the milestone dates set forth in the Project Schedule, as such dates may
be extended by Change Order, the Owner may direct the Contractor to accelerate its
work, at its own cost. Such acceleration may include employing such additional forces
or paying such additional overtime wages as may be required to place the progress of
the Work in conformity with the Project Schedule and to allow timely Substantial
Completion. The Contractor shall also pay any additional sums which may become due
to the A/E as a result of such an acceleration.
If the Contractor voluntarily accelerates its Work to maintain the Project
Schedule, it shall likewise do so at its own cost, which shall not cause any adjustment to
the Contract Price, and shall pay the A/E any additional sums due to it as a result of the
acceleration.
The Owner may also order the Contractor to accelerate its Work in
accordance with Section 7.4 of these General Conditions.
7.4
Extensions of Time. If the Contractor's performance is delayed,
because of any event beyond the control of the Contractor and any Subcontractor and
which is not otherwise permitted or authorized by the Contract Documents, including
Force Majeure events, and the Contractor would have otherwise been able to perform
all of its obligations under the Contract Documents but for that delay, then, except as
set forth in Section 7.5 hereof, the Contractor's sole remedy shall be an extension of
time for performance for a period equal to the extent of the delay. In the event of an
occurrence which the A/E, subject to the Owner's reasonable approval, determines may
justify delay, then provided that the Contractor has requested an extension of time in
accordance with Paragraph 7.6, the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order
Revised January 2007
39
for the length of time actually and directly caused by such occurrence as determined by
the A/E, subject to the Owners' reasonable approval; provided further, however, that
such extension of the Contract Time shall be net of any delays caused by or due to the
fault or negligence of the Contractor or any of the Subcontractors or which are
otherwise the responsibility of the Contractor and shall also be net of the amount of time
by which the progress of the Work is ahead of the Project Schedule. The Contractor
shall, in the event of any occurrence likely to cause a delay, cooperate in good faith with
the A/E and the Owner to minimize and mitigate the impact of any such occurrence and
do all things reasonable under the circumstances to achieve this goal, regardless of the
cost associated therewith. Except as provided in Section 7.5 of these General
Conditions, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any damage for delay, disruption,
interference or impact or any increase in the Contract Price because of any delay, no
matter how or by whom caused.
No time extensions will be granted due to jobsite labor disputes unless
jobsite labor disputes are area-wide in nature or the dispute is one over which neither
the Contractor nor any Subcontractor has any control or could reasonably prevent.
No time extension will be granted for adverse weather conditions (which
for purposes of the Contract Documents shall mean weather conditions which preclude
the safe performance of Work on the critical path of the then-current Project Schedule)
until the Contractor demonstrates that the total number of days by which the Contractor
has been delayed due to adverse weather conditions exceeds the normal number of
days of adverse weather for the region in which the Project is located, as determined
over the twenty year period prior to the dates in question, as represented in the reports
of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, closest reporting center to the
Site. The number of days of adverse weather for this purpose shall be determined on a
monthly basis. No extension of time will be granted if the Contractor is concurrently
delayed by events within the Contractor's and/or any Subcontractor's control and events
beyond the Contractor's and/or any Subcontractor's control.
If the Owner determines that, as a result of delay caused by labor disputes
beyond the Contractor's and/or any Subcontractor's control or other Force Majeure
events, acceleration is necessary to assure timely completion of the Work, the Owner
may direct the Contractor to accelerate the Work, and the Contractor will promptly
comply. Such an order shall be regarded as a change governed by Article 5 of these
General Conditions. The acceleration shall be as required by Section 5.7 for Ownerinitiated changes. The Contractor will keep the Owner informed of the progress of its
Work and promptly advise the Owner of any circumstances that might cause a delay in
its Work or interfere with its adherence to the Project Schedule.
Extensions of time shall be the
7.5
No Damage for Delays.
Contractor's exclusive remedy for any delay, disruption or interference, no matter how
or by whom caused, unless the aggregate delays to the critical path caused exclusively
by the Owner exceed ninety (90) consecutive days. The Contractor shall be entitled to
an increase in the Contract Price only to the extent that the aggregate delays to Work
Revised January 2007
40
on the critical path caused solely by the Owner exceed ninety (90) consecutive days.
The increase to the Contract Price shall be equal to the amount by which the costs
reimbursable under Section 5.10 (without any allowance for overhead and profit)
increased after the ninetieth day of such delay. In no case shall the Contractor be
entitled to any lost profits or consequential damages in connection with a delay. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to either extensions of time or adjustments in the
Contract Price with respect to delays which it would have experienced even in the
absence of the Owner-caused delay.
ARTICLE 8
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
8.1
Progress Payments. The Owner shall make progress payments to
the Contractor for Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Such
progress payments shall be based on the actual progress of the Work and the
recommendations of the A/E, as approved by the Owner. Owner and Contractor agree
that Contractor shall be paid for the Work in accordance with the applicable terms of this
Agreement and that Contractor, for itself and all of its subcontractors hereby waives any
and all rights under the Contractor and Subcontractor Payment Act (the “Payment Act”),
73 P.S. § 501 et seq. to the fullest extent that such waiver may be permitted under
applicable law. If, but only to the extent that, provisions of this Agreement waiving the
Payment Act shall be deemed ineffective, the Owner and Contractor agree that the
terms for payment set forth in this Agreement shall constitute terms that are “otherwise
agreed by the parties” and thus shall supersede the provisions of the Payment Act.
Before commencing the Work, the
8.2
Schedule of Payments.
Contractor shall submit to the Owner a schedule of anticipated payments which shall be
based upon the Schedule of Values and the Project Schedule.
8.3
Application for Payment. On or about the first day of each month,
the Contractor shall submit to the Owner six (6) copies of the Application for Payment
which shall describe the Work performed during the preceding month for which payment
is requested, and which complies with the requirements of this Section 8.3 and other
applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Application for Payment shall
include such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner may
require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors.
Between the 24th and 31st day of each month, each proposed progress
payment request to be submitted the following month shall be reviewed at a joint
meeting of representatives of the A/E, the Contractor, and the Owner, and any
appropriate adjustments discussed at the meeting shall be made before the Application
for Payment is formally submitted. The Applications for Payment shall be on AIA Forms
G702 and G703 or such other form as the Owner may require. The Contractor shall be
Revised January 2007
41
responsible to assure that each Application for Payment, including back-up
documentation, is accurate, complete and timely submitted. Progress payments shall be
made within thirty (30) working days after receipt by the Owner of the Application for
Payment in form acceptable to the Owner, and all required supporting documentation.
Any Application for Payment or portion thereof submitted after the tenth day of the
month shall not be processed until the following month.
Each Application for Payment submitted by the Contractor shall show the
current percentage of completion on a line-item basis. Each Application for Payment
shall be supported by the following documentation, each in a form satisfactory to the
Owner:
(a)
The Contractor's release of any
Project with respect to monies
Contractor, and monies to be
Application for Payment, in the
Agreement as Exhibit G-1.
lien rights against
previously paid to
paid pursuant to
form attached to
the
the
the
the
(b)
Subcontractor certificates, statements, and affidavits
showing that the Work covered by such Application for
Payment has been done and material delivered free of liens.
(c)
Subcontractors' and Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers’ release
of liens in the forms attached to the Agreement as Exhibits
G-2 and G-3 respectively.
(d)
Statement of account, indicating the Subcontract amounts,
monies paid to date and monies due the Subcontractors for
Work performed on the Project.
(e)
Monthly update of the Schedule of Values and the Project
Schedule as per requirements of the Contract Documents.
(f)
Such other documents in form, scope and substance as the
Owner may reasonably require or as the Contract
Documents require for disbursement of funds.
Subject to the other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of
each progress payment shall be computed as follows:
(g)
Take that portion of the Contract Price allocable to properly
completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each
portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Price allocated to that portion of
the Work in the Schedule of Values.
(h)
Add that portion of the Contract Price properly allocable to
Materials delivered and suitably stored at the Site for subsequent incorporation in the
Revised January 2007
42
Work.
(i)
Subtract the aggregate of all previous payments made by
the Owner.
(j)
Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Owner has nullified or
withheld payment in accordance with Section 8.12 hereof.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, ten
percent (10%) of the amounts due for Work performed by the Contractor shall be
retained by the Owner until the Owner’s acceptance of Substantial Completion, at which
time the retainage shall be reduced until Final Completion to five percent (5%) of the
amounts due for Work performed by the Contractor.
8.4
Title. The Contractor warrants that title to all Work will pass to
Owner upon the earlier to occur of payment therefor or incorporation into the completed
construction.
8.5
Contractor's Affidavit. Each Application for Payment shall also
include an affidavit by the Contractor setting forth the following, to the extent not
previously provided:
(a)
the amount of the Contract Price, including all authorized
adjustments;
(b)
a representation that the progress payment requested is
justly due to the Contractor on account of all Work for which the application is
being submitted, or is justly due to the Subcontractors on account of such Work;
(c)
a representation that the As-Built Drawings maintained by
the Contractor pursuant to Section 3.31 hereof are complete and accurate as of
the date of the Application for Payment;
(d)
a representation that the Work for which payment is
requested was performed in accordance with the Contract Documents;
(e)
of application;
the amount paid by the Owner to the Contractor to the date
(f)
the amount of the current application;
(g)
the unpaid balance of the Contract Price after such payment
is made;
(h)
the amount of money retained by the Owner and the amount
of the Work that has been completed;
Revised January 2007
43
(i)
a representation that the Materials for which the application
is being submitted have been (1) installed or incorporated in the Project or (2) if
authorized by the Owner, delivered to the Site and that the Materials are insured
in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and are not subject
to any liens or encumbrances; and
(j)
any other information required by the Owner or the A/E.
8.6
Time and Material Work. The Contractor shall keep, at the Site or
its Philadelphia office, complete and accurate financial records of all costs incurred in
performing the Work under the Agreement, and shall make its books and records
available to the Owner and A/E for audit and copying. No amounts payable by the
Owner under the Contract Documents shall be due unless such records are kept and
have been made available for audit and copying. All records maintained by the
Contractor shall be kept for at least four (4) years following the date of Substantial
Completion of the Work.
8.7
Direct Payments or Joint Checks. If the Owner has reason to
believe that the Contractor has not timely paid or will not timely pay sums due and
owing to Subcontractors (except sums which the Contractor reasonably disputes and
which the Owner has given the Contractor written permission to withhold), the Owner
may, after notice to the Contractor, make direct payments of any amounts due to
Subcontractors or issue joint checks payable to the Contractor and a Subcontractor. In
no case, however, shall the Owner incur any obligation to such persons on account of
such payments.
8.8
Final Payment - Time of Application. The Contractor shall make
Application for Final Payment within thirty (30) days after Final Acceptance, unless the
Owner agrees otherwise, in writing.
8.9
Application for Final Payment. The Application for Final Payment
shall contain the information required in applications for progress payments specified in
Sections 8.3 and 8.5, of these General Conditions and shall also include the following:
(a)
a representation and warranty by the Contractor that all
Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents;
(b)
a representation and warranty by the Contractor that all
permits, approvals, licenses, warranties, guarantees, certificates, operating
manuals and other documents required by the Contract Documents have been
delivered to the Architect or the Owner, as appropriate;
(c)
a certification by the Contractor setting forth the warranty in
Section 3.36 hereof;
(d)
a representation by the Contractor that the Application for
Final Payment includes all claims of the Contractor against the Owner arising in
Revised January 2007
44
connection with the Project and a waiver of any and all claims not presented in
that application;
(e)
the As-Built Drawings maintained by the Contractor pursuant
to Section 3.31 of these General Conditions, certified by Contractor to be
complete and accurate in all respects; and
(f)
consent of surety to final payment.
8.10 Final Payment. The Owner shall pay the Contractor the amount of
the final payment due under the Contract Documents (the "Final Payment") within fortyfive (45) days after Final Acceptance.
8.11 Releases of Lien - Final Payment. The Contractor shall submit with
its Application for Final Payment releases of lien in the forms attached to the Agreement
as Exhibits H-1, H-2 and H-3 respectively, duly executed by the Contractor and each
Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractor/Supplier, releasing all claims and releasing all
mechanics' and materialmen's liens when final payment is made. If the Contractor is
unable to obtain a release from a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor/Supplier, the
Contractor shall furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner
against possible claims and liens.
Before making Final Payment, the Owner may require the Contractor to
submit a certification that all amounts previously due to Subcontractors have been paid,
and releases, in form satisfactory to the Owner, of all third party claims filed or
threatened against the Owner.
8.12 Owner's Right to Withhold Payments. The Owner may withhold
payment for any Work claimed to have been performed by the Contractor if the report of
the Architect submitted pursuant to Section 4.2.5 states, or the Owner reasonably
determines, that:
(a)
the Work is defective and such defects have not been
remedied;
(b)
the Contractor's progress in completing the Work falls behind
the Project Schedule;
(c)
the Contractor has failed to provide timely and complete
updates of the Project Schedule as provided in the Contract Documents;
(d)
the Contractor has failed to maintain an up-to-date set of
Record Drawings as provided in the Contract Documents;
(e)
the Contractor has not promptly paid all amounts due to
Subcontractors and any others performing the Work;
Revised January 2007
45
(f)
any of the Contractor's laborers or Subcontractors or Subsubcontractors/Suppliers has filed a mechanic's or materialmen's lien against the
Project, and the Contractor has not caused the lien to be discharged; provided,
that the amount withheld shall not exceed the amount of the lien plus any
reasonable expenses which may be incurred in dealing with the lien;
(g)
the Contractor will be unable to complete the Work for the
balance of the Contract Price and within the Contract Time and has failed to
provide reasonable assurances (as determined by the Owner) that it has the
financial resources to complete the Work for the balance of the Contract Price
and within the Contract Time;
(h)
been obtained;
necessary approvals as required by the Agreement have not
(I)
the Contractor has failed to comply with the Owner's
payment procedures set forth in this Article 8; and/or
(j)
the Contractor is otherwise in default under the Contract
Documents.
No payment made by the Owner to the Contractor, or any acceptance,
use or occupancy of the Work by the Owner or any other person, shall constitute
acceptance of any defective Work or Work not in compliance with the Contract
Documents.
8.13 Payment for Materials. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the
Owner will make payment only on account of materials or equipment purchased by the
Contractor for installation and incorporation into the Work when such materials have
been installed or when they are needed to maintain the sequence of the Work and have
been delivered to and safely stored and protected at the Site. If the Contractor desires
to store any materials or equipment at some secure place other than the Site, it shall
first obtain the written permission of the Owner and, if the Owner provides its
permission, shall comply with the Owner's requirements. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the safety and security of all stored materials or equipment, whether
stored on or off the Site.
8.14 Removal of Liens. Should any mechanic's or materialmen's lien filed
by or behalf of a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor/Supplier, or laborer of Contractor, or
anyone else claiming by or through any of them, attach to the Site or the Project, the
Contractor shall cause the immediate removal thereof; provided, that if then approved
by the Owner, the Contractor may remove such lien by obtaining and filing a bond
satisfactory in form and in an amount acceptable to the Owner and in accordance with
all applicable legal requirements. Said bond shall be obtained and filed within ten (10)
days after the date on which such lien attaches to the Project. The cost of such bond
shall be borne by the Contractor.
Revised January 2007
46
8.15 Interest.
In no event shall Contractor be entitled to the
payment of interest with respect to any payment alleged to be due under this
Agreement if (I) Contractor’s right to payment under the terms of this Agreement is
disputed by Owner in good faith or (ii) payment is made within 60 days after it shall be
due under this Agreement. Any interest payable shall accrue with respect to amounts
unpaid at a rate of 1/3 of 1 percent for each complete month that payment of a sum due
and payable shall have been delayed.
8.16 Sales and Use Tax Refunds. The Contractor agrees to assign and
transfer to the Owner all of its rights to sales and use tax which may be refunded as a
result of a claim for refund for Materials purchased in connection with this Agreement.
The Contractor further agrees that it will cooperate with Owner in the preparation of
claims for refund for any sales or use tax and shall not attempt to file a claim for such
refund on its behalf with respect to sales and use taxes paid in connection with this
Project.
ARTICLE 9
CLAIMS
9.1
Notice of Claims. The Contractor shall give prompt written notice to
the Owner and the A/E of any circumstances that the Contractor believes may give rise
to a claim by the Contractor for:
(a)
an increase in the Contract Price or in the amount of any
(b)
an extension in the Contract Time;
(c)
damages for breach of contract by the Owner; or
Subcontract;
(d)
compensation for the value of authorized Work performed
outside the scope of the Contract Documents.
The notice of claim shall set forth:
(a)
the reasons for which the Contractor believes additional
compensation may be due or additional time should be granted;
(b)
the nature of the costs involved;
(c)
Contractor's plan for mitigating such costs; and
Revised January 2007
47
(d)
if ascertainable, the amount of the potential claim.
The Contractor shall give such notice within the time specified in Section
9.3 in accordance with Section 9.3, so as to give the Owner an opportunity to remedy
any breach or to remove any cause for cost escalation or delay.
9.2
Opportunity to Claim. The Contractor shall only be entitled to make
a claim based on the following circumstances:
(a)
any material error, omission or inconsistency in the Contract
Documents, recovery for which is not otherwise excluded by Sections 3.18 and
3.19 of these General Conditions where the Contractor clearly relied on the error
or omission or was misled by the inconsistency and could not reasonably have
identified the problem so as to avoid the damage;
(b)
any failure by the Owner, the Architect or the Owner's
Representative to take any material action required to be taken under the
Contract Documents;
(c)
any material change in, or material departure from, the
Project Schedule by the Owner or Architect that is prejudicial to the Contractor,
subject to the limitations of Sections 7.4 and 7.5 hereof; or
9.3
Waiver of Claim.
(a)
The Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner or the
Project for additional compensation for services rendered or work performed outside the
scope of the Agreement, unless it has first advised the Owner before performing such
work that the work is outside the scope of the Agreement and the Owner has authorized
the work in writing.
(B)
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE NO CLAIM FOR
DAMAGES AGAINST THE OWNER OR THE PROJECT FOR RELIEF UNLESS
NOTICE OF THE CLAIM HAS BEEN GIVEN IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 9.1
WITHIN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS AFTER THE DATE ON WHICH THE
CONTRACTOR KNOWS, OR REASONABLY SHOULD HAVE KNOWN, OF THE
CIRCUMSTANCES GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. ANY CLAIMS SHALL BE MADE
PURSUANT TO THE PROCEDURES ESTABLISHED BY ARTICLE 9. HOWEVER, IF
THE AMOUNT OF THE CLAIM CANNOT REASONABLY BE CALCULATED AND
STATED IN THE TIME ALLOWED FOR THE INITIAL NOTICE OF CLAIM, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLEMENT ITS NOTICE WITHIN TEN (10) DAYS AFTER
THE SUBMISSION OF INITIAL NOTICE OF CLAIM, BY PROVIDING A STATEMENT
OF THE AMOUNT OF ITS CLAIM.
Revised January 2007
48
9.4
Time to Bring Suit - Limitation of Actions. No action arising out of
the Contract Documents shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner,
except in a third-party action, counterclaim, or cross-claim, unless the action is
commenced within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or one
year after the time prescribed in Section 8.10 for the submission of the Contractor's
Application for Final Payment, whichever is later, or, if the Agreement is terminated for
any reason before Substantial Completion, unless the action is commenced within one
year after the effective date of the termination.
9.5
Work to Continue During Disputes. n the event of a dispute,
controversy or question between the Owner and the Contractor or the Contractor and
the Architect concerning the interpretation of the Contract Documents, the performance
of any portion of the Work, the delivery of any materials, the payment of disputed
monies, or otherwise (the parties acknowledge that undisputed monies will be paid
when due), the Owner and the Contractor agree that pending the resolution or
settlement of the dispute, controversy or question, the Owner and the Contractor will
continue to perform their respective obligations under the Contract Documents without
interruptions or delay, subject to certain rights of the Owner set forth herein. The
Contractor agrees that it will not, directly or indirectly, stop or delay the performance of
the Work, including the delivery of Materials to the Site.
ARTICLE 10
INDEMNIFICATION
10.1 General. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor and
each Subcontractor shall protect, defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and
its trustees, employees, agents and officers (collectively, the "Indemnities") from and
against all liabilities, claims, demands, causes of action, and costs (including
reasonable attorneys' fees) which arise out of any breach of the Contract Documents by
the Contractor or a Subcontractor or a breach of any agreement relating to the work
done by any Subcontractor, any act, error or omission by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor, or, subject to Section 3.44, any patent or copyright infringement arising
out of the performance of the Work, regardless of whether caused in whole or in part by
a party indemnified hereunder.
10.2 Personal Injury and Property Damage. To the fullest extent
permitted by law, the Contractor and each Subcontractor shall defend, indemnify and
hold harmless the Indemnitees against all liabilities, claims, demands, causes of action,
and costs (including reasonable attorneys' fees) arising from death, personal injury or
property damage directly or indirectly caused by or arising out of any act or omission of
the Contractor and/or the Subcontractors and/or their respective agents and employees,
or arising in or about the Site at any time from the commencement of construction until
completion and Final Acceptance by the Owner, regardless of whether caused in whole
or in part by a party indemnified hereunder. The Contractor and each Subcontractor
shall use proper care and caution in the performance of the Work so as not to cause
damage to adjoining or adjacent property, and the Contractor and any Subcontractor
Revised January 2007
49
shall defend, indemnify and hold the Indemnitees harmless from and against any
liabilities, claims, demands, causes of action, or costs (including attorneys' fees) due to
damage to adjoining or adjacent property.
10.3 Liens. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless
the Indemnitees from all liens, or claims of rights to enforce liens, which are required to
be waived under the Agreement (including its Exhibits) and these General Conditions,
including any related expenses and legal fees, against the Project or the improvements
to be erected thereon arising out of any Work to be performed or labor or materials to
be furnished under the Agreement. Neither Final Payment by the Owner nor acceptance
of the Work shall constitute a waiver of this indemnity, and if any such lien or claim for
lien shall at any time be filed, the Contractor shall promptly reimburse the Owner for all
costs incurred by the Owner or that it may be compelled to pay in discharging any such
lien or satisfying any such claim, including all legal fees.
10.4 Claims Against Owner. Should any claim arising out of this
Agreement be made against any of the Indemnitees or against the A/E or its officers,
agents or employees, the Contractor shall, and shall cause its Subcontractors to,
diligently render to the person against whom such claim is made reasonable assistance
which may be requested by such person.
10.5 No Limit on Indemnity. The indemnification obligations of the
Contractor and each Subcontractor shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on
the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the
Contractor or Subcontractor or any of their respective employees under workers'
compensation acts, disability benefits acts or other employee benefit acts.
ARTICLE 11
INSURANCE AND BONDING
11.1 Insurance Requirements. Unless the Owner elects to provide a
"wrap-up" insurance program, the Contractor shall maintain, throughout the term of the
Agreement, insurance of the types an with the terms and limits stated below.
Each policy of insurance which the Contractor is required to maintain shall
provide that it shall not be modified, cancelled or not renewed without providing thirty
(30) days' prior written notice, by registered mail, to the Owner and all of the policies
except the workers' compensation policy, shall name the Owner as an additional
insured. All of the policies shall waive subrogation against the Owner and Contractor
and shall include a cross-liability provision.
Evidence of the required insurance coverage must be provided before
construction commences. The evidence of the required insurance shall be in the form
of copies of the actual policies the Owner agrees to accept, or in lieu of actual policies,
certificates in form satisfactory to the Owner, issued by the insurance carrier showing
that the required insurance is in force for the specified period.
If the Contractor desires to have limits in excess of those required or
Revised January 2007
50
furnished by the Owner, or desires to carry additional coverage for its own protection,
the arrangements therefor and the cost thereof shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
Nothing contained in these insurance requirements is to be construed as
limiting the extent of the Contractor's responsibility for payment of damages resulting
from Contractor's operations under the Agreement.
11.1.1 Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance.
The Contractor shall maintain workers' compensation in accordance with statutory
requirements, and extended to include coverage under the United States
Longshoremen and Harbor Workers' Act and its amendments, and employers' liability in
the amount of $100,000 per occurrence.
11.1.2 Commercial General Liability. The Contractor shall maintain
commercial liability (excluding automobile liability) with a minimum combined limit of
$2,000,000 for both bodily injury and property damage liability coverage, per occurrence
and in the aggregate for each annual policy period. This coverage shall be extended to
include:
(a)
blanket contractual liability coverage, with no exclusion for
damages arising out of (1) blasting operations or the use of explosives; or (2)
vibration from pile driving or caisson work; or (3) the removal or weakening of
support of any property, building or land whether such support be natural or
otherwise;
(b)
owners and contractors protective liability;
(c)
products and completed operations coverage, including
extension of the policy term for three (3) years beyond acceptance by the Owner;
(d)
personal injury liability hazards with the employee exclusion
established under the Pennsylvania Worker’s Compensation Act or any similar
act deleted; and
(e)
incidental medical malpractice coverage.
11.1.3 Comprehensive Automobile Liability. The Contractor shall
maintain comprehensive automobile liability coverage of all owned, non-owned or hired
motor vehicles, with limits of $1,000,000 per accident for the bodily injury coverage and
$1,000,000 per accident for the property damage.
11.1.4 Excess Liability Protection. The Contractor shall maintain
excess liability coverage excess over and following the coverage provisions of the
primary employers' comprehensive general liability insurance and comprehensive
automobile liability insurance in the amount of $3,000,000 per occurrence, combined
single limit, and $3,000,000 in the aggregate, for each annual policy period.
11.1.5 Builder’s All Risk Insurance. The Owner will purchase and
maintain builder's all risk property insurance in the name of the Owner, Contractor, their
Revised January 2007
51
subsidiaries and affiliates, and Subcontractors, insuring the Project against fire, flood,
the perils insured under the standard form extended coverage endorsement, vandalism
and malicious mischief, in the full amount of the cost of construction to date at any given
time. The policy shall provide that rights of subrogation against the Owner and
Contractor are waived. The policy shall insure all materials, equipment, machinery,
appurtenances, and other property of any nature in which the insured has an interest or
has assumed responsibility prior to loss or damage, to be used in or incidental to the
installation, fabrication, construction, erection, completion and testing of the Project,
including transportation. The policy shall not cover tools, Contractor's equipment or any
property not a part of or destined to become a part of the Project other than tools,
equipment, forms and temporary structures, the cost of which is included in the actual
completed value and reported to the insurer for premium purposes.
If any loss or damage to the Project occurs before Final Acceptance, the
Contractor shall, at the request of the Owner, promptly repair or replace it.
11.2 Bonding Requirements. The Contractor shall, if requested by Owner,
furnish corporate surety bonds covering faithful performance of the Agreement and the
payment of all obligations arising thereunder. The bonds shall be substantially in the
forms attached as Exhibit E to the Agreement, and shall be procured from such surety
or sureties as are approved by the Owner. The bond or bonds shall be in an amount
equal to the Contract Price (100% performance bond, 100% payment bond). The
Owner and such other persons or entities as the Owner designates shall be named
obligees on the bond or bonds.
11.3 Subrogation. The Contractor waives all rights against the Indemnities and
their respective agents, trustees, students and employees for damages to the
Contractor’s and the Subcontractors’ tools, materials, machinery and equipment.
ARTICLE 12
BACKGROUND AND REFERENCE CHECKS
12.1 Contractor / Construction Manager / Architect (“Contractor”) shall ensure
that federal, state and county of residence criminal background checks are conducted
on all persons performing Work at the Project location, and shall exclude from the
Project location any dishonest, unreasonably dangerous or otherwise unqualified
persons. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, rules and regulations
including, but not limited to the Fair Credit Reporting Act and/or any equal opportunity
laws, rules, regulations or ordinances. Contractor agrees that it shall make available to
Owner within one week after Owner's request a list of all employees then engaged in
performing Work at the Project location together with copies of all background checks
for those employees.
Revised January 2007
52
I N WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have duly executed this agreement as of
the day and year first above written.
Contractor
By:________________________
Name: ______________________
Title:________________________
TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
By:_______________________
Anne Papageorge RLA
Vice President for Facilities & Real Estate Services
Revised January 2007
53
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES AGREEMENT
CONTRACT NO.:
PROJECT NO.:
PROJECT:
OWNER:
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER (A/E):
CONTRACTOR:
The Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Page
ARTICLE 1 - SCOPE OF PROJECT
1
ARTICLE 2 - CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES
2
2.1 Contractor's Personnel
2.2 Performance of the Work
2.3 General Administration
2.4 Subcontracting
2.5 Project Schedule
2.6 Field Engineering
2.7 Submittals
2.8 Certificates
2.9 As-Built Drawings
2.10 Insurance and Bonds
2.11 Waiver of Liens
2.12 Contractor's Representations
2.13 Contractor's Duties and Status
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
5
6
ARTICLE 3 - COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION
6
3.1 General
6
ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACT PRICE AND PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
6
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
6
6
7
7
7
Contract Price
Progress Payments and Final Payments
Allowances
Contractor's Records and Audit
Waiver of Penalty
ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTING
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
General
Owner's Right to Approve Subcontractors
Form of Trade Contract and Purchase Order
Specific Provisions
INTENTIONALLY OMITTED
Assignment
8
8
9
10
10
12
12
ARTICLE 6 - TERMINATION AND SUSPENSION
13
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
13
13
14
15
15
15
Termination by the Contractor
Termination by the Owner for Default
Termination by the Owner for Convenience
Sole Remedy of the Contractor
Cooperation in Event of Termination
Suspension of the Work
ARTICLE 7 - EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY; MBE/WBE PLAN
16
7.1 Equal Employment Opportunity
7.2 Codes, Laws, and Ordinances
7.3 MBE/WBE Plan
16
18
18
ARTICLE 8 - MISCELLANEOUS
19
8.1 Ownership of Documents
8.2 Undefined Terms
8.3 Governing Law
8.4 Assignment of Agreement
8.5 Survival
8.6 Independent Contractor
8.7 No Waiver
8.8 Captions
8.9 Owner's Liability for Third Parties
8.10 Notices
8.11 Entire Agreement; Modification
8.12 Owner's Consent.
8.13 Consent to Jurisdiction, Service and Venue.
8.14 Inspections
8.15 Arbitration
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
22
CONSTRUCTION SERVICES AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT (the "Agreement") is made as of this day of 20__ by
and between the TRUSTEES of the UNIVERSITY of PENNSYLVANIA, a Pennsylvania
nonprofit corporation (the "Owner") and (the "Contractor").
W I T N E S S E T H:
WHEREAS, the Owner desires
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania (the "Project"); and
on the Owner’s Campus in
WHEREAS, the Owner has retained the services of
(the Architect /
Engineer [A/E]), to develop comprehensive Construction Documents for the Project; and
WHEREAS, the Contractor has represented to the Owner that it is a firm
experienced and skilled in the construction and management of projects similar to the
Project and has the necessary skills and experience in accordance with the terms and
conditions of this Agreement and the General Conditions.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises set forth above,
which are incorporated into this Agreement by reference, and the agreements
hereinafter set forth, and intending to be legally bound hereby, the parties agree as
follows:
ARTICLE 1
SCOPE OF PROJECT
The scope of the Project is described in the Drawings and Specifications
for the Project set forth on Exhibit A of this Agreement, as clarified and supplemented
by this Agreement and the General Conditions.
Revised January 2007
1
ARTICLE 2
CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES
2.1
Contractor's Personnel.
The Contractor shall assign senior
professional and technical personnel to the Project to the extent necessary (and in no
event fewer than those which are in Owner's judgment necessary) to ensure that its
obligations under this Agreement are carried out. Such personnel shall include, but not
be limited to, a Project Manager, a Project Superintendent or Superintendents and
Project PME Coordinator or Coordinators satisfactory to the Owner. Before beginning
any work under this Agreement, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for the
Owner's approval, a list of senior project personnel and information as to each person's
background, experience and qualifications. The Contractor shall employ on the Project
only those senior project personnel who have been approved by the Owner in writing.
The Owner's approval of any project personnel shall not relieve the Contractor of any
responsibility for those persons or their actions or omissions. The Project Manager
shall devote his full energies to the Project while employed by the Contractor unless the
Owner gives its prior written consent for the Project Manager to undertake other
responsibilities. Neither the Project Manager, nor any other senior project personnel,
will be removed or replaced by the Contractor without the Owner's prior written consent.
The Project Manager shall remain on the Project through Final Acceptance. If the
Owner, in its sole discretion, determines that removing any of the Contractor's
personnel from the Project is in the best interests of the Project, and so informs the
Contractor, the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner, will promptly remove the person or
persons and replace him or them with person(s) acceptable to the Owner.
An organizational chart listing those senior professional and technical
personnel assigned to the Project and their respective lines and areas of authority is
attached as Exhibit B to this Agreement.
2.2 Performance of the Work. The Contractor shall, with its own forces or
through Subcontractors, perform all of the Work necessary to construct the Project so
that the Project is complete, safe, and properly built in full accordance with the Contract
Documents, and shall provide, without limitation, all of the necessary labor, materials,
tools, equipment, services, and facilities to do so (the “Work”). The Work shall be
carried out in a good and workmanlike manner, with an emphasis on craftsmanship, and
in a timely fashion.
The Contractor shall provide for general
2.3 General Administration.
administration of the Project.
Revised January 2007
2
2.4 Subcontracting. The Contractor shall enter into Subcontracts in
accordance with Article 5 of this Agreement, shall enforce Subcontracts for the
construction of the Project with Subcontractors approved by the Owner, and shall
ensure that all Subcontractors work in a harmonious and efficient manner. As used
herein, the term "Subcontracts" shall mean all trade contracts and purchase orders with
Subcontractors that the Contractor enters into in connection with the Work, in
accordance with the terms hereof.
The Contractor shall prepare, subject to the review of the Owner, a
program of supervision to assure compliance by the Subcontractors with their
Subcontracts, all legal requirements, all safety and insurance requirements and other
standards and requirements applicable to the construction of the Project.
2.5 Project Schedule. The Contractor shall coordinate and supervise the
construction of the Project in accordance with the Project Schedule pursuant to Article
7 of the General Conditions.
2.6 Field Engineering. The Contractor shall provide all necessary field
engineering and supervision.
2.7
Submittals.
The Contractor shall review all Submittals for
completeness and conformity to the Contract Documents and stamp them with the
Contractor's signed stamp certifying completeness and compliance with the Contract
Documents, before submitting them to the A/E. If any Submittal is disapproved, the
Contractor shall make any corrections required and shall resubmit it to the A/E until it is
approved. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner in writing, no Work requiring
Submittals shall be undertaken until the approval of the A/E has been obtained. If the
A/E is required to handle and review a Submittal more than three times, the Contractor
shall, at its sole cost, pay any additional fees of the A/E in connection with additional
reviews and handling. However, the Contractor will not be obligated to pay any
additional fees of the A/E if the additional reviews are necessary for reasons directly
attributable to the Owner or A/E.
2.8 Certificates. With the assistance of the A/E and the approval of the
Owner, the Contractor shall apply for all necessary certificates of compliance and
occupancy.
2.9 As-Built Drawings. The Contractor shall, at all times, maintain one
current up-to-date copy of the Drawings and Specifications at the Site showing all
approved changes in accordance with Section 3.31 of the General Conditions.
Revised January 2007
3
2.10 Insurance and Bonds. The Contractor shall provide and maintain
insurance coverages and provide bonds as set forth in Article 11 of the General
Conditions from the date of execution of this Agreement until Final Acceptance has
occurred or such longer period as may be required by Article 11 of the General
Conditions. The Contractor, upon execution of this Agreement, shall provide to the
Owner a Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond, each in the full
amount of the Contract Price, in the respective forms attached hereto as Exhibits E-1
and E-2, issued by a corporate surety listed as acceptable on US Department of
Treasury Circular 570 and otherwise acceptable to Owner, unless Owner waives the
requirement for such Bonds in a writing issued to Contractor.
2.11 Waiver of Liens.
(a) Unless Owner has waived in writing the requirement that Contractor
post a Payment Bond, the Contractor does hereby waive and relinquish all right of all of
its Subcontractors (as defined in the Pennsylvania Mechanics Lien Law, as amended),
and all subcontractors and suppliers in direct privity of contract with each Subcontractor
(hereinafter “Sub-subcontractor/Supplier”), to file a mechanics' or materialmen's lien, or
notice of intention to file any lien, and does hereby covenant, promise and agree that no
mechanics' lien or other lien of any kind whatsoever shall be filed or maintained against
the improvements to be constructed or renovated pursuant to the Contract Documents
(the "Improvements") or the estate or title of the Owner in the Site or any part thereof, or
the appurtenances thereto, or against any other improvements or appurtenances
thereto now or hereafter located on the Site (the "Other Improvements"), by or in the
name of Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor/Supplier or others acting or claiming
through or under the Contractor for work done or materials furnished in connection with
the Improvements or under this Agreement or by any other party acting through or
under them or any of them for and about the Improvements, the Other Improvements,
the Site or any part thereof.
This agreement by Contractor waiving the right of lien of its
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers shall be an independent covenant
and shall operate and be effective as well with respect to work done and materials
furnished under any supplemental contract for extra work in the erection, construction
and completion of the Improvements to the same extent as any work and labor done
and materials furnished in connection with the Improvements or under this Agreement.
This undertaking has been further implemented by the execution and
delivery by the Contractor to the Owner of a general Waiver of Liens executed by
Contractor with regard to its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers, which
has been or shall be filed on record and indexed in the Office of the Prothonotary of the
Court of Common Pleas of Philadelphia County prior to the commencement of any work
Revised January 2007
4
by the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers
hereunder. A copy of this Waiver of Liens is attached hereto as Exhibit D, and is
incorporated herein by reference.
(b) Unless Owner has waived in writing the requirement that Contractor
post a Payment Bond, (i) Contractor shall notify each Subcontractor and each Subsubcontractor/Supplier that it has posted a Payment Bond; and Contractor shall provide
a copy of the Payment Bond to each Subcontractor, and to each Subsubcontractor/Supplier, upon demand, (ii) Contractor shall require each of the
Subcontractors, and each of their Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers, to waive and relinquish
all right to file a mechanics’ lien, or notice of intention to file any lien, and each shall
covenant, promise and agree that no mechanics’ lien or other lien of any kind
whatsoever shall be filed or maintained against the improvements represented by the
Project or the estate or title of Owner in the property or the appurtenances thereto, or
any part thereof, by or in the name of the Subcontractor, or any such Subsubcontractor/Supplier, or anyone else, for work done or materials furnished in
connection with the Subcontract for and about the Site, the Project, or any part thereof;
and (iii) Contractor shall require each of the Subcontractors, and each of their Subsubcontractors/Suppliers, prior to commencing work on the Project, to execute a
separate Waiver of Liens in the form attached hereto as Exhibit C-1 for Subcontractors,
and in the form attached hereto as Exhibit C-2 for Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers.
2.12 Contractor's Representations.
warrants to the Owner that:
The Contractor represents and
(a)
The Contractor is a professional contractor qualified to do
business (and duly licensed) in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and possesses the
requisite skill and expertise to perform and complete the Work in a professional and
competent manner and in accordance with the Contract Documents;
(b)
The employees and agents of the Contractor performing
services in connection with the Project are fully qualified, licensed as required, and
skilled to perform such duties and services;
(c)
All documents (regardless of format) provided by the
Contractor to the Architect or to the Owner or any representative or agent of the Owner
shall be in accordance with high professional standards and otherwise, acceptable in
the industry;
(d)
The Contractor is familiar with the Project, the Site and the
Drawings and Specifications;
Revised January 2007
5
(e)
Before entering into this Agreement, the Contractor
familiarized itself with the general nature, location, character and physical conditions of
the Site, including the general availability of utilities serving the Site and adjacent
streets, and the general climatic and geographical characteristics of the area all as more
fully set forth in the General Conditions;
(f)
No prior or present services provided by the Contractor to
third parties conflict with the Owner's interest in respect to the services being provided
hereunder except as shall have been expressly disclosed in writing by the Contractor to
the Owner and consented to in writing by the Owner; and
(g)
INTENTIONALLY OMITTED.
(h)
The Construction Documents are adequate and sufficient to
provide for completion of the Work, and include all work, whether or not shown or
described, which reasonably may be inferred to be required or useful for completion of
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2.13 Contractor's Duties and Status. The Contractor recognizes
and accepts the relationship of trust and confidence established between the Contractor
and the Owner by this Agreement and agrees that it shall at all times in good faith and
as a fiduciary use its best efforts to advance the Owner's interests. The Contractor
covenants with the Owner to furnish its best skill and judgment and to cooperate with
the A/E and any other A/E or contractor connected with the Project in furthering the
interests of the Owner and the Project. The Contractor agrees to furnish efficient
business administration and superintendence and to furnish at all times an adequate
supply of workmen and materials, and to perform the Work in the best way and in the
most expeditious and economical manner consistent with the interest of the Owner.
The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner shall rely upon it for both the consultation,
planning and advice typically rendered by a construction manager and the construction
services traditionally rendered by a general contractor, all as more fully described in the
Contract Documents.
Revised January 2007
6
ARTICLE 3
COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION
3.1 General The Contractor shall commence the Work upon the
Commencement Date, which shall be defined as the date upon which the Contractor is
issued a notice to proceed by the Owner. Before commencing any Work, the
Contractor shall verify to the Owner, by a signed affidavit of an officer of Contractor, that
all necessary permits and approvals with respect to the Work have been received by the
Contractor, and the Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner insurance certificates
evidencing all insurance required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall
perform the Work and complete various portions of the Work in accordance with the
Project Schedule. The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the Work, as
defined in Section 1.11.38 of the General Conditions, no later than the Scheduled
Completion Date of.
TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS AGREEMENT.
The Contractor expressly acknowledges that, if the Work is not
Substantially Completed by the Scheduled Completion Date, as that date may be
extended by Change Order, the Owner will incur financial losses including, without
limitation, loss of revenue, increased financing costs, increased professional services
fees, and the loss of tax advantages. The Contractor agrees that it is aware of and
anticipates these consequences and that these and any other losses incurred by Owner
will be compensable under this Agreement.
ARTICLE 4
CONTRACT PRICE AND PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
4.1 Contract Price. As full payment for complete performance of the
Work and other obligations of the Contractor to be performed under the Contract
Documents, the Owner shall pay the Contractor Dollars ($)(the "Contract Price"),
subject to the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
In addition to the amount above, the Owner shall pay the Contractor
Dollars ($) as reimbursement for the cost of obtaining the Performance Bond and the
Labor and Material Payment Bond.
Revised January 2007
7
4.2 PROGRESS PAYMENTS AND FINAL PAYMENTS. OWNER A
CONTRACTOR AGREE THAT THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE PAID FOR THE
WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT
AND THAT CONTRACTOR, FOR ITSELF AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS
HEREBY WAIVES ANY AND ALL RIGHTS UNDER THE CONTRACTOR AND
SUBCONTRACTOR PAYMENT ACT (THE “PAYMENT ACT”), 73 P.S. § 501 ET SEQ.
TO THE FULLEST EXTENT THAT SUCH WAIVER MAY BE PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW. IF, BUT ONLY TO THE EXTENT THAT, PROVISIONS OF THIS
AGREEMENT WAIVING THE PAYMENT ACT SHALL BE DEEMED INEFFECTIVE,
THE OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AGREE THAT THE TERMS FOR PAYMENT SET
FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT SHALL CONSTITUTE TERMS THAT ARE
“OTHERWISE AGREED BY THE PARTIES” AS CONTEMPLATED BY THE PAYMENT
ACT, AND THUS SHALL SUPERSEDE THE PROVISIONS OF THE PAYMENT ACT.
Progress payments to the Contractor shall be made in accordance with Article 8 of the
General Conditions within thirty (30) business days after the Contractor submits an
Application for Payment as provided therein. Final Payment to the Contractor shall be
made in accordance with Article 8 of the General Conditions. Payment for any
amounts shall be due and shall be made only after presentation of a proper Application
for Payment fully in compliance with this Section 4.2 and Article 8 of the General
Conditions and presentation of such other information and documents supporting such
Application for Payment as may be reasonably requested by the Owner.
4.3 Allowances. The Contract Price may include Allowances, subject to
the Owner's approval, for particular items to be incorporated into the Work that are not
known as of the date hereof. When the exact cost of such particular items is known, the
Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly.
4.4 Contractor's Records and Audit. The Contractor shall check and shall
maintain, and require the Subcontractors to maintain, complete and accurate records of
all of the material, equipment and labor entering the Site, all services provided under
this Agreement and all costs relating thereto, in accordance with generally accepted
accounting principles. These records shall be made available to the Owner for audit or
examination as reasonably requested and shall be retained for at least five years
following the Substantial Completion of the Work.
4.5 Waiver of Penalty. Without limiting the generality of the waivers set
forth elsewhere in this Article 4 and in the General Conditions, Contractor agrees that
the penalty provision set forth in Section 12 of the Payment Act shall not be applicable
to any arbitration or litigation arising under this Agreement.
Revised January 2007
8
ARTICLE 5
SUBCONTRACTING
5.1 General. The Contractor shall advise the Owner of the most
advantageous manner of awarding Subcontracts for the construction and supplying of
the Work, including the scope of each Subcontract package, alternatives, options,
sequence and time of award. The Contractor shall recommend to the Owner qualified
and responsible Subcontractors (and shall make a special effort to identify qualified and
responsible minority subcontractors in accordance with Article 7) who shall be invited to
bid or submit proposals for Subcontracts to construct or supply the various elements of
the Work. The Contractor shall develop a list of five (5) possible Subcontractors for
each element of the Work. The Contractor, with the Owner's approval, shall direct the
separation of the Work into bid packages and Subcontracts. The Contractor shall
assemble and issue such bid packages. All bid packages, including the list of
prospective recipients thereof, shall be submitted to the Owner for its approval prior to
submittal to prospective Subcontractors. Contractor shall conduct pre-bid meetings to
familiarize bidders with the bidding requirements and shall provide the Owner with the
opportunity to attend such meetings. Contractor shall also advise the Owner of bid
opening dates and times. Contractor shall prepare, for the Owner's approval,
pre-qualification criteria for bidders and develop interest in the Work among potential
Subcontractors. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner, Contractor shall
obtain at least three (3) bids from approved bidders for each portion of the Work for
which Contractor seeks to enter into a Subcontract. All bids shall be sealed, written
bids. In no event shall Contractor accept any bid that has been communicated by
telephone or telefax machine.
5.2. Owner's Right to Approve Subcontractors. The Contractor shall
recommend to the Owner, with the advice and consultation of the A/E, if deemed
advisable by the Owner, which bids to accept. The Contractor shall contract with the
bidders that the Owner directs in writing. The Contractor shall only contract with a
Subcontractor or permit any subsubcontractor proposed for any portion of the Work as
to whom the Owner has given prior written consent. If the Owner objects to any party
on a list submitted by the Contractor in response to the requirements of the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall submit an acceptable substitute. The Contractor shall
act promptly and responsively in submitting for acceptance any list or lists of names as
required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not make any substitution for
any Subcontractor who has been approved by the Owner, unless the Owner gives prior
written approval to the substitution. The Owner's consent to any Subcontractor does
not constitute a guarantee or warranty of such party or its ability to conduct its portion of
the Work, nor does it relieve the Contractor of its absolute obligation to require the party
Revised January 2007
9
to conduct its portion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall furnish to Owner, from time to time, promptly upon request by
Owner, a correct list of all of Subcontractors employed in connection with the Work,
containing such information as the Owner may reasonably request, and true and correct
copies of all executed Subcontracts. All such Subcontractors shall be licensed by the
appropriate authorities. The Owner shall retain at all times the right to approve the
selection of each Subcontractor and the award of each Subcontract.
The Owner and the Contractor have agreed that the Contractor shall
contract with the Subcontractors listed in Exhibit F.
If the Contractor proposes to perform portions of the Work itself, it shall
identify such items of Work and provide a basis for comparing the Contractor's cost for
performance to the cost of performance by a Subcontractor. The Contractor must first
obtain the written consent of the Owner, which consent may be granted or withheld in
the Owner's sole discretion, before performing any portion of the Work itself. The
Owner's acceptance of the Contractor's proposal to perform any portion of the Work
with its own forces shall not be construed as the award of a Subcontract to the
Contractor; the Contractor will be regarded as performing that Work under this
Agreement and will be bound to do so in accordance with all of the terms and conditions
of the Contract Documents.
5.3 Form of Trade Contract and Purchase Order. Trade contracts and
purchase orders shall be in form and terms as the Owner approves. All trade contracts
shall incorporate the General Conditions by reference and shall provide that, if there
should be any conflict between the terms of the Subcontract and those of the General
Conditions, the General Conditions shall apply. The forms shall provide that the
Subcontractor assumes the obligation of performing and completing the Work covered
by the Subcontract, and of paying all costs necessary for the satisfactory completion of
such Work.
5.4 Specific Provisions. All Subcontracts entered into by the Contractor
pursuant to this Agreement, in addition to any other requirements contained in the
Contract Documents, shall include the following provisions:
(a)
an agreement by the Contractor and Subcontractor that the
Owner is a third-party beneficiary of the agreement, entitled to enforce any rights
thereunder for its benefit, and that the Owner shall have the same rights and remedies
against the Subcontractor as the Contractor has, including, but not limited to, the right to
be compensated for any loss, expense or damage of any nature whatsoever incurred by
the Owner resulting from any breach of the agreement by the Subcontractor, any
Revised January 2007
10
breach of representations and warranties, implied or expressed, if any, arising out of the
agreement and any error, omission or negligence of the Subcontractor in the
performance of any of its obligations under the agreement;
(b)
a provision that the Owner may, at reasonable times, contact
the Subcontractor to discuss the Subcontractor's services; provided, that in no event
shall the Subcontractor take instructions directly from the Owner unless the Subcontract
has been assigned to the Owner and that, whenever reasonably possible, the Owner
shall first notify the Contractor that it intends to contact the Subcontractor;
(c)
a requirement that the Subcontractor promptly disclose to
the Owner and Contractor any defect, omission, error or deficiency in the Construction
Documents or the Work of which it has knowledge;
(d)
a provision that permits the Subcontract to be assigned, at
the same price, to the Owner or the Owner's designee, upon written notice by the
Owner to the Subcontractor;
(e)
a provision requiring the Subcontractor to maintain worker's
compensation insurance as required by the laws of the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania, employer's liability insurance with limits of at least $100,000.00, and
commercial general liability insurance and comprehensive automobile liability insurance
with minimum limits and terms approved in advance by the Owner. These policies shall
provide that they may not be altered, cancelled or not renewed except with thirty (30)
days' advance written notice to the Owner by certified or registered mail, and the Owner
shall be an additional insured under such general liability and automobile liability
insurance policies. The Subcontractor shall provide a copy of the applicable insurance
policies to the Owner upon request;
(f)
a provision that the agreement shall be terminable without
cause and without penalty upon seven (7) days' written notice by the Contractor, or, if
the Subcontract has been assigned to the Owner pursuant to Section 5.4(d), by the
Owner;
(g)
a provision that neither the Contractor nor the Subcontractor
shall have the right to require arbitration of any disputes in those cases where the
Owner is a party, and that the right to require arbitration in any such dispute shall be at
the sole election of the Owner;
Revised January 2007
11
(h)
a provision that the Owner shall have the right to conduct
audits or other examinations and make and take copies of the Subcontractor's books
and records relating to the Project;
(i)
a provision that, upon the filing of a petition under the
Federal Bankruptcy Code by or against the Contractor, the Owner shall have the right to
enter into an agreement with the Subcontractor to perform all of the work covered by the
Subcontract, at the same price;
(j)
a provision requiring the Subcontractor to comply with and
pass down to subsubcontractors the requirements of Article 5 of the General
Conditions;
(k)
a provision substantially similar to Section 3.30 of the
General Conditions providing that the Subcontractor shall not be entitled to
compensation for defective Work and shall be obligated promptly to repair or replace
defective Work as set forth in Section 3.30;
(l)
a provision substantially similar to Section 3.36 of the
General Conditions, imposing upon the Subcontractor the same obligations as the
Contractor has assumed toward the Owner;
(m)
a provision that the Subcontractors and their Subsubcontractors/Suppliers shall deliver to the Owner, at least three (3) days prior to the
commencement of any work by the Subcontractor and/or Sub-subcontractor/Supplier,
an executed waiver of liens, in the form attached hereto as Exhibit C-1 and Exhibit C-2
; and
(n)
a provision that all agreements, representations and
warranties of the Subcontractor contained therein or in any certificate or other document
furnished in connection with the Subcontract shall survive the term of such Subcontract
and any termination thereof.
(o)
a provision substantially similar to the provisions of Section
8.1 of the General Conditions waiving and/or limiting the applicability of the Contractor
and Subcontractor Payment Act, 73 P.S. 501 et seq. and a provision disclosing to each
subcontractor the due date for Contractor’s receipt of payments from the Owner under
this Agreement.
(p)
a provision substantially similar to Section 8.16 of the
Revised January 2007
12
General Conditions assigning to the Owner all of Subcontractor's rights to sales and use
tax refunds.
5.5 INTENTIONALLY OMITTED.
5.6 Assignment. The Contractor hereby assigns each Subcontract it has
entered into or that it shall enter into in connection with the Work to the Owner, and its
successors and assigns; provided, that such assignment shall only be effective upon (i)
acceptance of such assignment by the Owner, or its successors or assigns, by
notification in writing to the Subcontractor and (ii) the termination of this Agreement or
the Contractor's right to proceed with the Work. Notwithstanding anything else
contained in this Section 5.6, until such assignment is accepted, the Owner shall not be
responsible for performance under the assignment or any Subcontract, and the
Subcontractor shall have no claim or cause of action against the Owner.
ARTICLE 6
TERMINATION AND SUSPENSION
6.1 Termination by the Contractor. Provided that the Contractor is not in
default of this Agreement, this Agreement may be terminated by the Contractor in the
event: (i) Owner has materially breached this Agreement or the General Conditions; or
(ii) the Project is suspended for more than one hundred eighty (180) consecutive days
(provided, that the suspension is not attributable to the acts or failure to act of the
Contractor or any of the Subcontractors or anyone for whom any of them are liable)
and, in the event of either (i) or (ii) above, Owner has been given written notice at least
fifteen (15) days before the proposed date of such termination of the Contractor's intent
to terminate, provided further that if Owner cures or, as to non-monetary defaults,
commences to cure such default at any time prior to the proposed termination date and
diligently and in good faith continues to prosecute such cure, the termination notice shall
be deemed withdrawn and of no force or effect. Upon termination as aforesaid, the
Contractor may then recover from the Owner only payments due hereunder, based on
the amount of the Work properly completed by the Contractor prior to the termination
date, and any Proven Loss (as such term is hereinafter defined), pursuant to an
Application for Payment submitted in strict accordance with and subject to the
requirements of Article 8 of the General Conditions. The parties agree that the term
"Proven Loss" referenced above shall mean reasonable demobilization and cancellation
charges and expenses (including reasonable costs and expenses resulting from early
termination of Subcontracts, provided that the Subcontracts each contain termination
provisions similar to the provisions contained in this Article 6 limiting liability for early
Revised January 2007
13
termination thereof). For purposes of this Section 6.1, such Application for Payment
shall be treated as an Application for Final Payment and shall be processed in
accordance with Section 8.4 of the General Conditions, in addition to all other
requirements of Article 8 of the General Conditions.
6.2 Termination by the Owner for Default.
(a)
Should the Contractor breach or fail to perform any term of
this Agreement or the General Conditions, the Owner may, by written notice to the
Contractor, terminate this Agreement or the Contractor's right under this Agreement to
proceed with the Work, or such part of the Work as is in default. In such event, the
Owner may take over the Work and prosecute the same to final completion by separate
contract or otherwise. The Owner may take possession of and utilize in completing the
Work such materials, appliances and plant as may be on the Site or stored off-Site for
the Project and necessary therefor. If this Agreement or the Contractor's right to
proceed with the Work is terminated, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any
payment that may be claimed by the Contractor until final completion of the Work and
after Owner has assessed and charged the Contractor with costs and damages for
which the Contractor shall be liable to Owner pursuant to the Contract Documents.
Damages to the Owner (for which the Contractor shall liable) shall consist of an amount
equal to the amount by which the cost to the Owner of achieving Substantial Completion
and final completion of the Work on time (or as close thereto as possible), including
amounts paid hereunder, exceeds the Contract Price, plus any other damages
sustained by the Owner.
(b)
It is recognized that if the Contractor becomes insolvent, or
institutes or has instituted against it a case under Title 11 of the United States
Bankruptcy Code, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a
receiver is appointed for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on
account of insolvency, such event or events could impair or frustrate the Contractor's
performance of this Agreement. Accordingly, it is agreed that upon the occurrence of
any such event, the Owner shall be entitled to request of the Contractor or its successor
adequate assurances of future performance in the opinion of Owner. Failure to comply
with such request within ten (10) days of delivery of the request shall entitle the Owner
to terminate this Agreement pursuant to this Section 6.2. Pending receipt of adequate
assurances of performance and actual performance in accordance therewith, the Owner
shall be entitled to proceed with the Work with its own forces or with other contractors
on a time and material basis or other appropriate basis, the cost of which will be
backcharged against the Contractor.
(c)
If it is determined by any court that a termination under this
Revised January 2007
14
Section 6.2 was unjustified, such termination shall automatically be deemed to have
occurred pursuant to Section 6.3.
6.3 Termination by the Owner for Convenience. Notwithstanding the
provisions of Section 6.2, the Owner may, at any time and for any reason during the
course of the Work, terminate this Agreement or the Contractor's right to proceed with
the Work under this Agreement by giving written notice to the Contractor of such
termination. In such event, the Owner may take possession of and utilize in completing
the Work such materials, appliances and plant as may be on the Site or stored off-Site
for the Project and necessary therefor. In the event of such termination of this
Agreement or the Contractor's right to proceed with the Work for convenience, the
Contractor may recover from the Owner only payments due hereunder, based on the
amount of Work properly completed prior to the termination date, and any Proven Loss
sustained by the Contractor, pursuant to an Application for Payment submitted in strict
accordance with and subject to the requirements of Article 8 of the General Conditions.
For purposes of this Section 6.3, such Application for Payment shall be treated as an
Application for Final Payment and shall be processed in accordance with Section 8.4 of
the General Conditions, in addition to all other requirements of Article 8 of the General
Conditions.
6.4 Sole Remedy of the Contractor. The payments provided for in
Sections 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3, if any, shall be the Contractor's exclusive remedy for
termination of this Agreement by the Contractor or for termination of this Agreement or
of the Contractor's right to proceed with the Work by the Owner. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY CONTAINED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS,
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTRACTOR BE ENTITLED TO ANY PAYMENT
PURSUANT TO THIS ARTICLE 6 OR OTHERWISE ON ACCOUNT OF LOST
PROFITS OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES.
6.5 Cooperation in Event of Termination. In the event this Agreement or
the Contractor's right to proceed with the Work under this Agreement is terminated by
the Owner pursuant to Sections 6.2 or 6.3, the Contractor shall (i) make such
assignments of Subcontracts, licenses, permits, bills and other documents related to the
Project that the Owner may request, (ii) deliver all books, records, plans, surveys and
other documents related to the Project that the Owner may request, (iii) take such
further action that the Owner may reasonably request to minimize delay and expense
arising from such termination, and (iv) cooperate in the transition to a new general
contractor or construction manager after the same is designated by the Owner.
Revised January 2007
15
6.6 Suspension of the Work. The Owner may, without cause, in writing
order the Contractor to suspend, delay or interrupt its prosecution of all or any portion of
the Work, for such period of time as the Owner may direct. Upon receipt of such
suspension order, the Contractor shall cease its prosecution of the Work, take such
action as is necessary to protect the Work from loss and damage and direct all
Subcontractors to cease performance of the Work as soon as possible. After the first
thirty (30) days of such suspension, the Contractor shall reduce its on-site staff as
directed by the Owner. Upon termination of such delay, the Contractor shall restore its
on-site staff to its former size. After the first ninety (90) consecutive days of such
suspension the Contract Price shall be increased pursuant to a Change Order issued
under Section 5.8(d) of the General Conditions by the amount that the Contractor is
able to demonstrate to the Owner's reasonable satisfaction that the reasonable and
necessary costs to Contractor of performing the Work (that are reimbursable under
Section 5.10 of the General Conditions) incurred after the ninetieth consecutive day of
such suspension have increased as a result of such suspension; provided, however,
that the Contractor shall not be entitled to any allowance for overhead and profit.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Section 6.6, the Contractor
shall not be entitled to such an increase in the Contract Price to the extent that such
suspension is ordered by the Owner because of the Contractor's failure to comply with
one or more of the Contract Documents, or because of any force majeure event that is
beyond the Owner's reasonable control, such as fire or adverse weather conditions.
ARTICLE 7
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY; MBE/WBE PLAN
7.1 Equal Employment Opportunity. In connection with the performance
of Work under this Agreement, the Contractor agrees as follows:
(a)
The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or
applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, sexual or affectional
preference, national origin, handicap, or because he or she is a disabled veteran or
veteran of the Vietnam Era. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that
applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without
regard to their race, color, religion, sex, sexual or affectional preference, national origin,
handicap, or because he or she is a disabled veteran or veteran of the Vietnam Era.
Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading,
Revised January 2007
16
demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates
of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to
employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the
provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
(b)
The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants
will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex,
sexual or affectional preference, national origin, handicap, or because he or she is a
disabled veteran or veteran of the Vietnam Era.
(c)
The Contractor will send to each labor union or
representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other
contract or understanding, a notice to be provided advising the said labor union or
workers' representative of the Contractor's commitments under this subparagraph and
shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and
applicants for employment.
(d)
The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive
Order 11246, as amended (the "Executive Order"), with Section 503 of the
Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (the "Rehabilitation Act") and Section 402 of the
Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 (the "Readjustment
Assistance Act") as these articles make reference to the Executive Order, and with the
rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.
(e)
The Contractor will furnish all information and reports
required by the Executive Order, by Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act and Section
402 of the Readjustment Assistance Act as these articles make reference to the
Executive Order, and by the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or
pursuant thereto, and will permit access to its books, records and accounts by the
governmental agency or agencies administering grant funds for the Project and the
Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules,
regulations, and orders.
(f)
In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the
nondiscrimination clauses of this Agreement or with any of the said rules, regulations or
orders, this Agreement may be cancelled, terminated or suspended, in whole or in part,
and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or
federally assisted construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in
the Executive Order, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked
Revised January 2007
17
as provided in the Executive Order, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of
Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.
(g)
The Contractor will include the portion of the sentence
immediately preceding subparagraph (a) and the provisions of subparagraphs (a)
through (g) of this Section 7.1 in every Subcontract or purchase order unless exempted
by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204
of the Executive Order, of Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act and Section 402 of the
Readjustment Assistance Act as these articles make reference to the Executive Order,
so that such provisions will be binding upon each Subcontractor or vendor. The
Contractor will take such action with respect to any Subcontract or purchase order as
the administering agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including
sanctions for noncompliance provided, however, that in the event the Contractor
becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a Subcontractor or vendor as a
result of such direction by the administering agency, the Contractor may request the
United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States.
(h)
Anything herein elsewhere contained to the contrary
notwithstanding, the Contractor shall submit to the jurisdiction of one of the following
authorities, as selected by the Owner, concerning alleged violations of the terms of this
Agreement relating to discrimination or of the Executive Order:
1.
Philadelphia Human Relations Commission
2.
Pennsylvania Human Relations Committee Pennsylvania
3.
Equal Employment Opportunity Commission
4.
United States Secretary of Labor
7.2 Codes, Laws, and Ordinances. The Contractor shall comply with all
applicable requirements of any federal, state or local law, ordinance or regulation
relating to affirmative action, equal opportunity and nondiscrimination in employment,
and shall use its best efforts to meet all local goals relating thereto.
The Contractor represents that it is familiar with all applicable Codes,
regulations, labor agreements, minority participation and affirmative action requirements
and other conditions relating to the Project, and has made adequate provision therefor
in the Contract Price.
Revised January 2007
18
The Contractor shall prepare and administer a program of supervision to
assure that the Subcontractors comply with all legal requirements, all safety and
insurance requirements and other standards and requirements applicable to the Work.
The program shall be subject to the Owner's approval; however, the Owner's review or
approval shall not relieve the Contractor of its duty to comply fully with all appropriate
legal, safety and insurance requirements.
7.3 MBE/WBE Plan. The Contractor acknowledges that in constructing
the Project, it is the intent of the Owner to encourage the maximum practicable
participation of minority and female business enterprises, and minority and female
employees in the Project, so that such enterprises and persons shall have maximum
achievable opportunity to compete for contracts and jobs associated with the Project.
The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner in encouraging such participating and
agrees to utilize its best efforts in achieving the following goals: (i) to engage
minority-owned firms to complete 0% of the construction costs; and (ii) to engage
female-owned firms to complete
0% of the construction costs. Contractor shall
cooperate with consultants retained by Owner to promote the utilization of minority
and/or female owned firms in the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall,
promptly upon the Owner's request, provide to the Owner or to Owner's consultant
evidence of the Contractor's efforts to encourage such participation.
ARTICLE 8
MISCELLANEOUS
8.1 Ownership of Documents. All services rendered and documents
produced by the Contractor hereunder are for the exclusive use and benefit, and shall
become the property, of the Owner. Within five (5) days after the Contractor's receipt of
the Owner's request, the Contractor will turn over to Owner all notes, documents,
drawings, schedules and materials produced by Contractor up to the time of the
request. The parties agree that, if the Contractor fails to comply with Owner's request,
any remedy at law would be inadequate and the Owner will be entitled to appropriate
injunctive and other equitable relief, including, without limitation, the remedy of specific
performance.
8.2 Undefined Terms. Capitalized terms used, but not defined, in this
Agreement shall have the same meaning as set forth in the General Conditions or, if not
defined therein, then as generally understood in the construction industry, unless such a
definition would be inconsistent with either this Agreement or the General Conditions.
Revised January 2007
19
8.3 Governing Law. This Agreement, the undertakings hereunder and all
documents prepared in connection herewith shall be governed by and construed in
accordance with the substantive laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, which the
parties hereto have selected as mutually satisfactory and appropriate.
8.4 Assignment of Agreement. The Owner has entered into this
Agreement in reliance upon the unique knowledge, experience, and expertise of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall therefore not assign, transfer, delegate, or otherwise
convey its duties or rights under this Agreement (except as provided in Article 5)
without the prior written consent of the Owner, which may be withheld in the Owner's
sole discretion.
8.5 Survival. All covenants, agreements, representations and warranties,
insurance obligations, warranty obligations and indemnification obligations of the
Contractor contained herein or in any certificate or other document furnished in
connection with this Agreement shall survive the expiration of this Agreement and any
sooner termination thereof..
8.6 Independent Contractor. All services performed by the Contractor
under this Agreement shall be performed in the capacity of independent contractor, and
not as agent of the Owner.
8.7 No Waiver. If the Owner waives any power, right or remedy arising
hereunder or under any applicable law, that waiver shall not be deemed to waive the
power, right or remedy upon the later occurrence or reoccurrence of any similar events.
No
act, delay or course of conduct by the Owner shall be deemed to constitute a waiver by
the Owner; only an express written waiver signed by the Owner shall be effective
against the Owner.
8.8 Captions. The table of contents, titles, section headings, running
headlines and marginal notes contained in the Contract Documents are solely to
facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way
affect, limit, or cast light upon the interpretation or construction of the provisions to
which they refer.
8.9 Owner's Liability for Third Parties. The Owner shall not be
responsible or liable to the Contractor in any way for any act or omission of any party
other than the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The parties acknowledge that this
Agreement is not intended to and shall not create third-party beneficiary rights in any
Revised January 2007
20
third party and that the Contractor is not a third-party beneficiary of the agreements
between the Owner and the A/E.
8.10 Notices. All notices by either party to the other shall be in writing
and, with respect to notices required under this Agreement, shall be personally
delivered or forwarded by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, or by a
recognized overnight courier, addressed as follows:
To the Owner:
The Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania
3101 Walnut Street
Philadelphia, PA 19104-6289
Attention: , Project Manager
To the Contractor: COMPANY NAME
ADDRESS
CITY, STATE, ZIP
Attention: , Project Manager
A party may change the address to which any communication referred to
in this Section 8.10 is to be sent by giving written notice of such change of address to
the other party in the manner provided.
Notice personally delivered shall be effective on the date of receipt
appearing on the return receipt; notice sent by U.S. mail shall be effective two (2) days
after the date of deposit as shown on the registered receipt therefor and notice sent by
overnight courier shall be effective on the day after the date appearing on the receipt
therefor.
8.11 Entire Agreement; Modification. This Agreement and the exhibits,
documents and other agreements to be furnished or executed in connection herewith
supersede all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral,
and constitute the entire agreement of the parties with respect to the subject matter of
this Agreement. No modification to this Agreement shall be effective unless made in a
writing signed by both the Owner and Contractor, unless otherwise specifically provided
for herein. Exhibits A through F attached hereto are made a part hereof and
incorporated herein by reference. If any discrepancy or ambiguity exists between the
terms of this Agreement proper and any term contained in any Exhibit hereto, the terms
Revised January 2007
21
of this Agreement shall control.
8.12 Owner's Consent. Unless expressly provided otherwise, in any
instance in which the Owner's consent or approval is required, the Owner may grant or
withhold its consent or approval in its sole discretion.
8.13 Consent to Jurisdiction, Service and Venue. For the purpose of
enforcing performance of its obligations hereunder or otherwise in connection herewith,
the Contractor hereby consents to the jurisdiction and venue of the courts of the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania or of any federal court located in such state including,
without limitation, the Court of Common Pleas of Philadelphia County and the Federal
District Court for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania, and appoints and constitutes the
Secretary of State of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania as its agent for all service of
process in connection with any such matter, copies of which process shall be mailed
registered or certified mail, return receipt requested or personally delivered to and
receipted for by the Contractor. The provisions of this Subsection 8.13 shall not limit or
otherwise affect the right of the Owner to institute and conduct action in any other
appropriate manner, jurisdiction or court.
8.14 Inspections. Neither the observations of the A/E or the Owner, nor
inspections, tests, approvals or consents made or given by the Engineer or the Owner,
nor the failure to make or give the same, shall relieve the Contractor from its obligations
to perform the Work of its other obligations under the Contract Documents or waive or
affect any of the Contractor's representations or warranties given in the Contract
Documents, and no waiver or approval of any element of the Work shall be implied or
inferred from the failure of the Engineer or the Owner to object to the same, or create
any liability on the part of the Owner with respect thereto.
8.15 Arbitration.
a) Any dispute or controversy arising out of or in connection with
the Contract, whether relating to the execution and enforceability thereof or of any
provision therein, shall be subject to binding arbitration in accordance with the terms of
this Section and the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration
Association then in effect (the "Rules"), at the election and in the sole discretion of the
Owner. For this purpose, three arbitrators, at least one of whom shall be an attorney,
shall be appointed by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with Section
13 of the Rules. Notwithstanding the foregoing sentence, if the dispute or controversy
involves less than $25,000 only one arbitrator, who shall be an attorney, shall be
appointed. In no event shall the Contractor initiate or have the right to initiate any
arbitration proceeding.
Revised January 2007
22
(b)
The parties mutually promise and agree that in disputes
which the Owner has elected to arbitrate, they shall, before the hearing, make discovery
and disclosure of all matters relevant to the subject matter of such dispute, to the extent
and in the manner provided by the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. All questions that
may arise with respect to the fulfillment of or the failure to fulfill this obligation shall be
referred to an arbitrator who is an attorney for the arbitrator's determination, which shall
be final and binding. This obligation shall be specifically enforceable.
(c)
Arbitration under this Section, and all hearings in connection
therewith, shall be held in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. All witnesses who testify at such
hearings shall be sworn and subject to cross-examination by the adverse party.
Depositions may be used in lieu thereof if, in the discretion of a majority of the
arbitrators, the deponent is not reasonably available to testify at the arbitration hearing,
and provided that the deposition offered in lieu of the testimony was taken under oath
and after reasonable notice to the adverse party of the time and place of the deposition.
An ex parte affidavit shall in no event be considered over the objection of the party
against whom it is offered.
(d) Any dispute or controversy subject to arbitration under this
Section 8.15 shall, at the Owner's option, be consolidated with any other arbitration
proceeding with respect to the Project and determined in a single arbitration
proceeding.
(e)
The Owner may join the Contractor in any arbitration
proceeding involving the Owner and the Engineer. The Contractor agrees to cooperate
fully with and assist the Owner in any arbitration proceeding involving the Project and
the Owner in which the Contractor is not a party.
(f) The Contractor agrees that the provisions of this Section 8.15
shall be included in all Subcontracts.
Revised January 2007
23
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have duly executed this Agreement
as of the day and year first written above.
CONTRACTOR
By: _______________________
Name:
Title:
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
By: _________________________
Anne Papageorge RLA
Vice President for Facilities and Real Estates Services
Revised January 2007
24
EXHIBITS
EXHIBIT A
EXHIBIT B
EXHIBIT C
EXHIBIT C-1
EXHIBIT C-2
EXHIBIT D
EXHIBIT E-1
EXHIBIT E-2
EXHIBIT F
EXHIBIT G-1
EXHIBIT G-2
EXHIBIT G-3
EXHIBIT H-1
EXHIBIT H-2
EXHIBIT H-3
Drawings and Specifications
Organizational Chart of Contractor
Addendum to Construction Services Agreement
Form of Subcontractor's Waiver of Liens
Form of Sub-Subcontractor/Supplier's Waiver of Liens
Form of Contractor's Waiver of Liens
Form of Performance Bond
Form of Payment Bond
List of Proposed Subcontractors
Form of Contractor Monthly Affidavit, Release and Waiver of
Liens
Form of Subcontractor Monthly Affidavit, Release and
Waiver of Liens
Form of Sub-subcontractor/Supplier Monthly Affidavit,
Release and Waiver of Liens
Form of Contractor Final Payment Affidavit, Release and
Waiver of Liens
Form of Subcontractor Final Payment Affidavit, Release and
Waiver of Liens
Form of Sub-subcontractor/Supplier Final Payment Affidavit,
Release and Waiver of Liens
Revised January 2007
25
ADDENDUM TO CONSTRUCTION SERVICES AGREEMENT
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Agreement, General Conditions
or other Contract Documents, the terms and conditions of this Addendum shall
apply:
1. Performance and Payment Bonds. The Construction Manager
(hereinafter called “Contractor”) shall post a Performance Bond and a Labor and
Material Payment Bond, each in the full amount of the Contract Sum and in the
form attached hereto as Exhibits E-1 and E-2, issued by a corporate surety
listed as acceptable on U.S. Department of Treasury Circular 570 and otherwise
acceptable to Owner, unless the Owner waives the requirement for such Bonds
in a writing issued to Contractor.
2. Waiver of Liens.
(a)(i) Unless Owner has waived in writing the requirement that
Contractor post a Payment Bond, the Contractor does hereby waive and
relinquish all right of all of its Subcontractors (as defined in the Pennsylvania
Mechanics Lien Law, as amended), and all subcontractors and suppliers in direct
privity
of
contract
with
each
Subcontractor
(hereinafter
“Subsubcontractor/Supplier”), to file a mechanics' or materialmen's lien, or notice of
intention to file any lien, and does hereby covenant, promise and agree that no
mechanics' lien or other lien of any kind whatsoever shall be filed or maintained
against the improvements to be constructed or renovated pursuant to the
Contract Documents (the "Improvements") or the estate or title of the Owner in
the Site or any part thereof, or the appurtenances thereto, or against any other
improvements or appurtenances thereto now or hereafter located on the Site (the
"Other Improvements"), by or in the name of Subcontractor or Subsubcontractor/Supplier or others acting or claiming through or under the
Contractor for work done or materials furnished in connection with the
Improvements or under this Agreement or by any other party acting through or
under them or any of them for and about the Improvements, the Other
Improvements, the Site or any part thereof.
(a)(ii)This agreement by Contractor waiving the right of lien of its
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers shall be an independent
covenant and shall operate and be effective as well with respect to work done
and materials furnished under any supplemental contract for extra work in the
erection, construction and completion of the Improvements to the same extent as
any work and labor done and materials furnished in connection with the
Improvements or under this Agreement.
Revised January 2007
(a)(iii)This undertaking shall be further implemented by the
execution and delivery by the Contractor to the Owner of a general Waiver of
Liens executed by Contractor, in the form attached hereto as Exhibit D, with
regard to its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers, which shall be
filed on record and indexed in the Office of the Prothonotary of the Court of
Common Pleas of Philadelphia County prior to the commencement of any work
by the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers
hereunder.
(b) Unless Owner has waived in writing the requirement that
Contractor post a Payment Bond, (i) Contractor shall notify each Subcontractor
and each Sub-subcontractor/Supplier that it has posted a Payment Bond; and
Contractor shall provide a copy of the Payment Bond to each Subcontractor, and
to each Sub-subcontractor/Supplier, upon demand, (ii) Contractor shall require
each of the Subcontractors, and each of their Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers, to
waive and relinquish all right to file a mechanics’ lien, or notice of intention to file
any lien, and each shall covenant, promise and agree that no mechanics’ lien or
other lien of any kind whatsoever shall be filed or maintained against the
improvements represented by the Project or the estate or title of Owner in the
property or the appurtenances thereto, or any part thereof, by or in the name of
the Subcontractor, or any such Sub-subcontractor/Supplier, or anyone else, for
work done or materials furnished in connection with the Subcontract for and
about the Site, the Project, or any part thereof; and (iii) Contractor shall require
each of the Subcontractors, and each of their Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers, prior
to commencing work on the Project, to execute a separate Subcontractor
Waiver of Liens in the form attached hereto as Exhibit C-1, and a separate
Sub-subcontractor/Supplier Waiver of Liens in the form attached hereto as
Exhibit C-2.
3.
Applications for Payment. In addition to any other requirements in the
Agreement, General Conditions and other Contract Documents, each Application
for Payment shall be supported by the following additional documentation, each
in a form satisfactory to the Owner:
(a) The Contractor’s Monthly Affidavit, Release and Waiver of Liens in
the form attached hereto as Exhibit “G-1” with respect to work performed and
materials supplied for the Project and monies to be paid pursuant to the
Application for Payment.
(b) Each Subcontractor’s Monthly Affidavit, Release and Waiver of
Liens in the form attached hereto as Exhibit “G-2” with respect to work
performed and materials supplied for the Project.
(c) Each Sub-Subcontractor/Supplier’s Monthly Affidavit, Release and
Waiver of Liens in the form attached hereto as Exhibit “G-3” with respect to
Revised January 2007
work performed and materials supplied for the Project.
4.
Final Payment Application.
In addition to any other requirements in
the Agreement, General Conditions and other Contract Documents, the Final
Payment Application shall be supported by the following additional
documentation, each in a form satisfactory to the Owner:
(a) The Contractor shall submit, with its Application for Final Payment, (i) a
Final Payment Affidavit, Release and Waiver of Liens executed by
Contractor in the form attached hereto as Exhibit “H-1”, (ii) a Final Payment
Affidavit, Release and Waiver of Liens executed by each Subcontractor in
the form attached hereto as Exhibit “H-2”, and (iii) a Final Payment Affidavit,
Release and Waiver of Liens executed by each Sub-subcontractor/Supplier
in the form attached hereto as Exhibit “H-3” releasing all claims and waiving all
mechanics' and materialmen's liens when final payment is made. Should
Contractor fail or be unable to provide a Final Payment Affidavit, Release and
Waiver of Liens from a Subcontractor and its Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers with
respect to work performed and materials supplied for the Project as set forth
above, then Owner may withhold payment from Contractor in such amounts as
Owner may determine are necessary to protect Owner against claims or liens by
such Subcontractor or its Sub-subcontractor/Supplier, subject to Contractor’s
right to provide Owner with a bond (from a surety company, and in form and
substance, acceptable to Owner) to indemnify, defend and hold harmless the
Owner against all possible claims and liens by such Subcontractor and its Subsubcontractors/Suppliers.
5. Owner's Right to Withhold Payments. In addition to any other rights in the
Agreement, General Conditions and other Contract Documents, the Owner may
withhold payment for any Work claimed to have been performed by Contractor if
any of the Contractor’s laborers or Subcontractors (or any of their Subsubcontractors/Suppliers) has filed a mechanic's or materialmen's lien against
the Project, and the Contractor has not caused the lien to be discharged;
provided, that the amount withheld shall not exceed the amount of the lien plus
any reasonable expenses which may be incurred in dealing with the lien;
6. Removal of Liens. Should any mechanic's or materialmen's lien attach to the
Site or the Project in violation of the provisions hereof, the Contractor shall cause
the immediate removal thereof; provided, that if then approved by the Owner, the
Revised January 2007
Contractor may remove such lien by obtaining and filing a bond satisfactory in
form and in an amount acceptable to the Owner and the court, and otherwise in
accordance with all applicable legal requirements. Said bond shall be obtained
and filed within ten (10) days after the date on which such lien attaches to the
Project. The cost of such bond and resolving lien claims may be allowed as a
Cost of the Work if approved in writing by the Owner in its sole discretion.
7. Indemnity. The Contractor shall, at its sole expense, defend, indemnify, and
hold harmless Owner from all mechanics’ liens, or claims of rights to enforce
such liens, filed or asserted by any Subcontractor or any of their respective Subsubcontractors/Suppliers or anyone else claiming by or through any of them or
any of Contractor’s laborers, against the Project or the improvements to be
erected thereon arising out of any Work performed or labor or materials furnished
under the Contract. Neither final payment by the Owner nor acceptance of the
Work shall constitute a waiver of this duty to defend, indemnify and hold
harmless Owner.
If any such mechanics’ lien or claim for lien shall be filed at any time, the
Contractor shall promptly defend such lien or claim for lien at its sole expense
(including without limitation attorneys fees and expenses), and shall pay and
satisfy any lien or judgment as may be established in such case. Further, upon
the filing of any such lien, the Contractor shall, at its sole expense, promptly
cause the lien to be discharged, whether by posting a bond with the court or by
other means acceptable to Owner; and the Contractor shall thereupon seek
leave from the court to substitute itself for the Owner as the party defendant. The
Contractor may litigate any lien claim or suit filed thereon, at its sole expense
(including without limitation attorneys fees and expenses), provided that the
Contractor causes the lien to be discharged and fulfills its obligation to defend,
indemnify and hold harmless Owner. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner
for all damages and expenses incurred by the Owner, including without limitation
any costs incurred by Owner (including without limitation all attorneys fees and
expenses) and any amounts that Owner may be compelled to pay to bond off,
discharge or satisfy any such lien or claim. Owner shall have the right to deduct
any such damages and expenses from any and all sums due to Contractor,
without prejudice to the right of Owner to recover any further amounts due to
Owner from Contractor.
Revised January 2007
Exhibit A
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Contract Drawings and Project Manual
Prepared by:
Prepared on:
Addenda:
Contractor’s Proposal:
Dated
Contractor’s Alternates
& Exclusions & Clarifications
Dated
Bid Clarifications
Dated
Economic Inclusion Plan
Revision III
Dated
Contract Breakdown:
Dated
(Attached hereto and made a part
hereof, excluding those portions which
are in direct conflict with this
Agreement)
Exhibit B
CONTRACTOR'S ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR
Exhibit C-1
WAIVER OF LIENS BY SUBCONTRACTOR
TO BE INDEXED AS FOLLOWS:
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA (PLAINTIFF)
V.
SUBCONTRACTOR (DEFENDANT)
AND
SUBCONTRACTOR (PLAINTIFF)
V.
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA (DEFENDANT)
Contract No.
Project No.
Title
Address
Subcontractor___________________________________________________________
SUBCONTRACTOR WAIVER OF LIENS
THIS INSTRUMENT is executed this ____ day of_________________________, 20__
by,___________________________ having an office at_________________________________
(“Subcontractor”), in favor of THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, having an
office at Franklin Building, 3451 Walnut Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19104 (“Owner”) and
________________________________ (“Contractor”).
W I T N E S S E T H:
1.
Subcontractor and Contractor have entered or shall enter into a certain agreement (the
“Trade Contract”) for the construction of certain improvements and the renovation of certain other
improvements (collectively, the “Improvements”), pursuant to a prime contract between Contractor and
Owner, on a parcel of land located at __________________________________ and known as the
_________________________________________ project (collectively, the “Property”). The Property is
owned by Owner.
2.
Contractor has posted a bond guaranteeing payment for labor and materials provided by
subcontractors on the project (as defined in the Pennsylvania Mechanics’ Lien Law, as amended).
3.
By the terms of the Trade Contract and by this Instrument, Subcontractor has covenanted,
promised and agreed and hereby covenants, promises and agrees that no mechanic’s or materialmen’s liens
would be or will be filed or maintained against the Improvements or the estate or title of Owner in the
Property, or any part thereof, or the appurtenances thereto, either by itself or anyone else for or on account
of any work, labor or materials supplied in the performance of the Trade Contract, or under any
supplemental contract or for extra work, or in the erection, construction or completion of the Improvements
on the Property or any appurtenance thereto.
NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of ten dollars ($10.00) and other good and valuable
consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, and the Trade Contract and
this Instrument, and intending to be legally bound hereby, Subcontractor agrees as follows:
1.
Subcontractor is or may be a “Subcontractor” within the meaning of the Pennsylvania
Mechanics’ Lien Law, as amended (the “Act”).
2.
Subcontractor, for itself and anyone else acting or claiming through or under it, does
hereby waive and relinquish all right to file a mechanics’ lien, or notice of intention to file any lien, and
does hereby covenant, promise and agree that no mechanics’ lien or other lien of any kind whatsoever shall
be filed or maintained against the Improvements or the estate or title of Owner in the Property or the
appurtenances thereto, or any part thereof, by or in the name of Subcontractor, or any sub-subcontractor,
materialman, consultant or laborer for work done or materials furnished in connection with the Trade
Contract or by any other party acting through or under them or any of them for and about the Improvements
or the Property or any part thereof.
3.
This Instrument waiving the right of lien shall be an independent covenant and shall
operate and be effective as well with respect to work done and materials furnished under any supplemental
contract for extra work in the erection, construction and completion of the Improvements to the same extent
as to any work and labor done and materials furnished in connection with the Trade Contract.
4.
THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH CONTAINS A WARRANT OF ATTORNEY FOR
THE CONFESSION OF JUDGMENT AGAINST SUBCONTRACTOR AND ANYONE ACTING
UNDER OR THROUGH SUBCONTRACTOR. In order to give Owner full power and authority to protect
itself, the Improvements, the Property, the estate or title of Owner therein, and the appurtenances thereto,
against any and all liens filed by Subcontractor or anyone acting under or through it in violation of the
foregoing covenants, Subcontractor, knowingly and with the opportunity to consult with its counsel, hereby
irrevocably authorizes and empowers any Attorney of any Court of Common Pleas of the Commonwealth
of Pennsylvania, to appear as Attorney for it, them or any of them, in any such Court, and in its or their
name or names, to the extent permitted by law, mark satisfied of record at the cost and expense of the
Subcontractor or of any sub- subcontractor or materialman, any and all lien or liens, filed in violation of the
foregoing covenants, or cause to be filed and served in connection with such lien or liens any pleading or
instrument, or any amendment to any pleading or instrument previously filed by it or them, and to
incorporate therein, as part of the record, the waiver and release contained in this Instrument, and for such
act or acts this Instrument or a copy thereof shall be good and sufficient warrant and authority. A reference
to the court, term and number in which and where this Instrument shall have been filed shall be conclusive
evidence of the authority herein contained to warrant such action, and the Subcontractor, for itself and for
them, hereby remises, releases and quit-claims all rights and all manner or errors, defects and imperfections
whatsoever in entering such satisfaction or in filing such pleading, instrument or amendment, or in any way
concerning them.
5.
This Instrument is made and may be filed with the Prothonotary or Clerk of the county in
which the Property is located in accordance with the requirements of the Act.
6.
The provisions of this Instrument are severable. Any provisions of this Instrument which
shall be invalid, void or illegal shall in no way affect, impair or invalidate any other provision hereof, and
the remaining provisions shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Subcontractor has executed this Instrument as of the
date and year first above written.
SUBCONTRACTOR:
__________________________________
Attest: ________________________________
Secretary
By: _______________________________
(Signature)
Title: ______________________________
Name: _____________________________
(Corporate Seal)
:
: ss
:
On the ______ day of _________________, 20___, before me, the subscriber, a notary public in
and for the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, personally appeared
____________________________________ (name of person signing on behalf of Subcontractor), who
acknowledged himself to be the ______________________________________________ (title of the
person signing for the Subcontractor) of ____________________________________ (the name of the
company), a _________________ (corporation or general partnership or sole proprietorship), and that
he/she, being authorized to do so, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by
signing the name of the ______________(corporation or general partnership or sole proprietorship) by
himself as such ________________________ (title of person signing on behalf of the Subcontractor).
WITNESS my hand and seal the day and year aforesaid.
(SEAL)
___________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
LEGAL DESCRIPTION
University of Pennsylvania/Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania
On File at University Planning Office
Checked December 21, 1981
CITY OF PHILADELPHIA
(Bill No. 1979)
AN ORDINANCE
To amend the Philadelphia Zoning Maps, by changing the designation of the following area of the City from partly Class
"R-5 Residential," partly Class "R-10 Residential" and partly Class "C-2 Commercial" to a single designation of Class
"Institutional Development District": area situate southwest of the point of intersection of the easterly houseline of Thirtyninth Street and the southerly side of Spruce Street through to Pine Street and Baltimore Avenue, including the bed of
Thirty-ninth Street and a portion of the bed of Pine Street.
The Council of the City of Philadelphia hereby ordains:
SECTION 1. Pursuant to Section 14-103 of The Philadelphia Code, the Philadelphia Zoning Maps are hereby
amended by changing the designation of the following area of the city from partly Class "R-5 Residential," partly Class
"R-10 Residential" and partly Class "C-2 Commercial" to a single designation of Class "Institutional Development
District":
BEGINNING at the point of intersection of the easterly side of Thirty-ninth Street (sixty feet wide) and the
southerly side of Spruce Street (eighty feet wide); thence along the said side of Thirty-ninth Street south eleven degrees
one minute zero seconds west, two hundred twenty-six feet five and three-quarter inches; thence south nineteen degrees
forty-one minutes fifty-three seconds east, two hundred twenty-four feet and one-quarter of an inch to the northwesterly
side of Woodland Avenue (varying widths); thence along the said side of Woodland Avenue south seventy degrees
eighteen minutes seven seconds west, three feet eleven and one-eighth inches to a point within the bed of Thirty-ninth
Street (which is the point of intersection with the northerly side of Baltimore Avenue (eighty feet wide) and Thirty-ninth
Street along the said side of Baltimore Avenue south eighty-nine degrees six minutes thirty-six seconds west, fifty-eight
feet one and one-quarter inches to the point of intersection of the westerly side of Thirty-ninth Street and the northerly side
of Baltimore Avenue; thence continuing along the said side of Baltimore Avenue south eighty-nine degrees six minutes
thirty-six seconds west, one hundred twelve feet eleven and one-half inches; thence north eleven degrees one minute zero
seconds east, crossing the bed of Pine Street (sixty feet wide) one hundred thirty-six feet four and one-eighth inches to a
point on the northerly side of Pine Street; thence along the said side of Pine Street north seventy-eight degrees fifty-nine
minutes zero seconds west, one hundred sixty-two feet; thence, north eleven degrees one minute zero seconds east, one
hundred sixty feet to the center line of former Delancey Street (now on the City Plan as a drainage right-of-way thirty feet
wide) thence along the said center line of Delancey Street south seventy-eight degrees fifty-nine minutes zero seconds east,
one hundred fifty-eight feet four inches to the point of intersection with the westerly side of Thirty-ninth Street; thence
along the said side of Thirty-ninth Street north eleven degrees one minute zero seconds east, one hundred sixty feet to the
southerly side of Spruce Street; thence along the said side of Spruce Street crossing the bed of Thirty-ninth Street south
seventy-eight degrees fifty-nine minutes zero seconds east, sixty feet to the aforementioned point and place of beginning.
SECTION 2. This ordinance shall not become effective unless the sum of one hundred (100) dollars, toward
costs thereof, is paid into the City Treasury within thirty days after the approval of this ordinance.
CERTIFICATION: This is a true and correct copy of the original Ordinance approved by the Mayor on
September 30, 1975.
SIGNED BY: Charles H. Sawyer, Jr.
Chief Clerk of the Council
CITY OF PHILADELPHIA
(Bill No. 1444)
AN ORDINANCE
To amend the Philadelphia Zoning Maps, by changing the designation of the following area of the City from the following
Class Districts: "G-2 General Industrial," "C-2 Commercial," "C-3 Commercial," "C-4 Commercial," "R-5 Residential,"
"R-9 Residential," "R-10 Residential," "R-15 Residential," and "R-16 Residential" to a single designation of Class
"Institutional Development District": portions of the area bounded generally by Ludlow Street, the Schuylkill Expressway,
South Street, Convention Avenue, Curie Avenue, University Avenue, Thirty-ninth Street, Spruce Street and Fortieth Street.
The Council of the City of Philadelphia hereby ordains:
SECTION 1. Pursuant to Section 14-103 of The Philadelphia Code, the Philadelphia Zoning Maps are hereby
amended by changing the designation of the following area of the City from the following Class Districts: "G-2 General
Industrial," "C-2 Commercial," "C-3 Commercial," "C-4 Commercial," "R-5 Residential," "R-9 Residential," "R-10
Residential," "R-15 Residential," and "R-16 Residential" to a single designation of Class "Institutional Development
District":
AREA beginning at the intersection of the northerly side of Baltimore Avenue (ninety feet wide) with the
westerly side of Thirty-ninth Street (sixty feet wide) and bounded by the following directions and distances: thence
extending northwardly along the said side of Thirty-ninth Street to the northerly side of Spruce Street (eighty feet wide);
thence westwardly along the said side of Spruce Street to the westerly side of Fortieth Street (sixty feet wide); thence
northwardly along the said side of Fortieth Street to the northerly side of Irving Street (thirty feet wide); thence westwardly
along the said side of Irving Street to a point approximately three hundred fifty feet west of Fortieth Street; thence
northwardly, along a line parallel with Fortieth Street, to the southerly side of Locust Street (sixty feet wide); thence
eastwardly along the said side of Locust Street to the easterly side of Fortieth Street; thence northwardly along the easterly
side of Fortieth Street to the southerly side of Walnut Street (eighty feet wide); thence eastwardly along the said side of
Walnut Street to the easterly side of Thirty-eighth Street (sixty feet wide); thence northwardly along the said side of Thirtyeighth Street to the southerly side of Sansom Street (fifty feet wide); thence eastwardly along the said side of Sansom
Street to the easterly side of Thirty-seventh Street (sixty feet wide); thence northwardly along the said side of Thirtyseventh Street to the southerly side of Chestnut Street (eighty feet wide); thence eastwardly along the said side of Chestnut
Street to the easterly side of Thirty-fourth Street (sixty feet wide); thence northwardly along the said side of Thirty-fourth
Street to the southerly side of Ludlow Street (forty feet wide); thence eastwardly along the said side of Ludlow Street
approximately two hundred forty feet; thence southwardly along a line parallel with Thirty-fourth Street to the southerly
side of Chestnut Street; thence eastwardly along the said side of Chestnut Street to the westerly side of Thirty-third Street
(sixty feet wide); thence southwardly along the said side of Thirty-third Street approximately two hundred forty feet to a
point; thence eastwardly, along a line parallel with Chestnut Street, to the westerly side of Thirty-second Street (ninety feet
wide); thence southwardly along the said side of Thirty-second Street to the southerly side of Walnut Street; thence
eastwardly along the said side of Walnut Street to the westerly boundary line of the Schuylkill Expressway (varying
width); thence southwestwardly along the boundary line of the Schuylkill Expressway to the southerly side of South Street
(eighty feet wide); thence northwestwardly along the said side of South Street to the westerly side of Convention Avenue
(seventy feet wide); thence southwestwardly and northwestwardly along the northwesterly and northeasterly sides of
Convention Avenue, in that order, to the westerly side of Thirty-fourth Street; thence northwardly along the said side of
Thirty-fourth Street to a point approximately three hundred ninety feet south of Spruce Street; thence westwardly along a
line parallel with Spruce Street, approximately four hundred fifteen feet to a point; thence southwardly, along a line
parallel with Thirty-fourth Street, approximately one hundred twenty-five feet to a point; thence westwardly, along a line
parallel with Spruce Street, approximately four hundred forty feet to a point; thence southwestwardly, along a line parallel
to Curie Avenue, approximately five hundred eighty-five feet to a point; thence in a northwestwardly direction, along a
property line of the University of Pennsylvania, approximately one hundred twenty-five feet to a point; thence in a
southwestwardly direction, along a property line of the University of Pennsylvania and crossing the bed of University
Avenue, approximately three hundred
forty feet to the westerly side of University Avenue (ninety feet wide); thence northwestwardly along the said side of
University Avenue to the southeasterly side of Woodland Avenue (seventy feet wide); thence northwestwardly to the place
of beginning.
SECTION 2. This ordinance shall not become effective unless the sum of one hundred (100) dollars, toward
costs thereof, is paid into the City Treasury within thirty days after the approval of this ordinance.
SECTION 3. The effective date of this ordinance for the parcels of land described as follows shall be January 1,
1967:
BEGINNING at the intersection of the southerly side of Walnut Street (eighty feet wide) with the easterly side of
Thirty-seventh Street (sixty feet wide); thence extending south seventy-eight degrees fifty-nine minutes zero seconds east,
along the said side of Walnut Street one hundred fifty-one feet; thence south eleven degrees one minute zero seconds west,
fourteen feet; thence south eleven degrees seventeen minutes forty-one seconds west, fifty-one feet six inches; thence south
twelve degrees forty-two minutes thirty-two seconds west, thirty-nine feet six inches; thence south eleven degrees one
minute zero seconds west, two hundred forty-five feet nine and one-half inches; thence north seventy-eight degrees fiftynine minutes zero seconds west, one hundred fifty feet five inches to the easterly side of Thirty-seventh Street (sixty feet
wide);thence along the said side of Thirty-seventh Street north eleven degrees one minute zero seconds east, approximately
three hundred forty-six feet to the place of beginning.
AREA bounded by Spruce Street, Fortieth Street, Walnut Street, Thirty-eighth Street, Sansom Street, Thirtyseventh Street, Chestnut Street, Thirty-sixth Street, Sansom Street, Thirty-fourth Street, Walnut Street, and Thirty-seventh
Street to Spruce Street.
AREA bounded by Locust Street (sixty feet wide), Fortieth Street (sixty feet wide), Irving Street (thirty feet
wide), and a line parallel with and three hundred fifty feet west of Fortieth Street.
CERTIFICATION: This is a true and correct copy of the original Ordinance approved by the Mayor on
December 13, 1965.
Signed By:
Nathan Wolfman
Chief Clerk of the Council
Exhibit C-2
WAIVER OF LIENS BY SUB- SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER
TO BE INDEXED AS FOLLOWS:
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA (PLAINTIFF)
V.
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER (DEFENDANT)
AND
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER (PLAINTIFF)
V.
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA (DEFENDANT)
Contract No.
Project No.
Title
Address
Sub-Subcontractor/Supplier________________________________________________________
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER WAIVER OF LIENS
THIS INSTRUMENT is executed this ____ day of_________________________, 20__
(“Subby,___________________________
having
an
office
at_________________________________
subcontractor/Supplier”), in favor of THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, having an
office at Franklin Building, 3451 Walnut Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19104 (“Owner”) and
________________________________(“Contractor”)and___________________________________(“Subcontractor”).
W I T N E S S E T H:
1.
Sub-subcontractor/Supplier and Subcontractor have entered or shall enter into a certain agreement
(the “Sub-subcontract/Supply Contract”) for the construction of certain improvements and the renovation of certain
other improvements (collectively, the “Improvements”), pursuant to a Trade Contract between Subcontractor and
Contractor, which in turn is pursuant to a prime contract between Contractor and Owner, on a parcel of land located
at______________________________ and known as the ____________________________________________project
(collectively, the “Property”). The Property is owned by Owner.
2.
Contractor has posted a bond guaranteeing payment for labor and materials provided by
subcontractors on the project (as defined in the Pennsylvania Mechanics’ Lien Law, as amended).
3.
By the terms of the Sub-subcontract/Supply Contract and by this Instrument, Subsubcontractor/Supplier has covenanted, promised and agreed and hereby covenants, promises and agrees that no
mechanic’s or materialmen’s liens would be or will be filed or maintained against the Improvements or the estate or title
of Owner in the Property, or any part thereof, or the appurtenances thereto, either by itself or anyone else for or on
account of any work, labor or materials supplied in the performance of the Sub-subcontract/Supply Contract, or under
any supplemental contract or for extra work, or in the erection, construction or completion of the Improvements on the
Property or any appurtenance thereto.
NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of ten dollars ($10.00) and other good and valuable consideration, the
receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, and the Sub-subcontract/Supply Contract and this Instrument,
and intending to be legally bound hereby, Sub-subcontractor/Supplier agrees as follows:
1.
Sub-subcontractor/Supplier is or may be a “Subcontractor” within the meaning of the Pennsylvania
Mechanics’ Lien Law, as amended (the “Act”).
2.
Sub-subcontractor/Supplier, for itself and anyone else acting or claiming through or under it, does
hereby waive and relinquish all right to file a mechanics’ lien, or notice of intention to file any lien, and does hereby
covenant, promise and agree that no mechanics’ lien or other lien of any kind whatsoever shall be filed or maintained
against the Improvements or the estate or title of Owner in the Property or the appurtenances thereto, or any part
thereof, by or in the name of Sub-subcontractor/Supplier or any sub-subcontractor, materialman, consultant or laborer
for work done or materials furnished in connection with the Sub-subcontract/Supply Contract or by any other party
acting through or under them or any of them for and about the Improvements or the Property or any part thereof.
3.
This Instrument waiving the right of lien shall be an independent covenant and shall operate and be
effective as well with respect to work done and materials furnished under any supplemental contract for extra work in
the erection, construction and completion of the Improvements to the same extent as to any work and labor done and
materials furnished in connection with the Sub-subcontract/Supply Contract.
4.
THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH CONTAINS A WARRANT OF ATTORNEY FOR THE
CONFESSION OF JUDGMENT AGAINST SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER AND ANYONE ACTING
UNDER OR THROUGH SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER. In order to give Owner full power and authority to
protect itself, the Improvements, the Property, the estate or title of Owner therein, and the appurtenances thereto, against
any and all liens filed by Sub-subcontractor/Supplier or anyone acting under or through it in violation of the foregoing
covenants, Sub-subcontractor/Supplier, knowingly and with the opportunity to consult with its counsel, hereby
irrevocably authorizes and empowers any Attorney of any Court of Common Pleas of the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania, to appear as Attorney for it, them or any of them, in any such Court, and in its or their name or names, to
the extent permitted by law, mark satisfied of record at the cost and expense of the Sub-subcontractor/Supplier or of any
sub- subcontractor or materialman, any and all lien or liens, filed in violation of the foregoing covenants, or cause to be
filed and served in connection with such lien or liens any pleading or instrument, or any amendment to any pleading or
instrument previously filed by it or them, and to incorporate therein, as part of the record, the waiver and release
contained in this Instrument, and for such act or acts this Instrument or a copy thereof shall be good and sufficient
warrant and authority. A reference to the court, term and number in which and where this Instrument shall have been
filed shall be conclusive evidence of the authority herein contained to warrant such action, and the Subsubcontractor/Supplier, for itself and for them, hereby remises, releases and quit-claims all rights and all manner or
errors, defects and imperfections whatsoever in entering such satisfaction or in filing such pleading, instrument or
amendment, or in any way concerning them.
5.
This Instrument is made and may be filed with the Prothonotary or Clerk of the county in which the
Property is located in accordance with the requirements of the Act.
6.
The provisions of this Instrument are severable. Any provisions of this Instrument which shall be
invalid, void or illegal shall in no way affect, impair or invalidate any other provision hereof, and the remaining
provisions shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Sub-subcontractor/Supplier has executed this Instrument as of the
date and year first above written.
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER:
__________________________________
Attest: ________________________________
Secretary
By: _______________________________
(Signature)
Title: ______________________________
Name: _____________________________
(Corporate Seal)
:
: ss
:
On the ______ day of _________________, 20___, before me, the subscriber, a notary public in and for the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, personally appeared ____________________________________ (name of person
signing
on
behalf
of
Sub-contractor/Supplier),
who
acknowledged
himself
to
be
the
______________________________ (title of the person signing for the Sub-subcontractor/Supplier)
of
____________________________________ (the name of the company), a _________________ (corporation or
general partnership or sole proprietorship), and that he/she, being authorized to do so, executed the foregoing
instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the name of the ______________(corporation or general
partnership or sole proprietorship) by himself as such ________________________ (title of person signing on behalf
of the Sub-subcontractor/Supplier).
WITNESS my hand and seal the day and year aforesaid.
(SEAL)
___________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
LEGAL DESCRIPTION
University of Pennsylvania/Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania
On File at University Planning Office
Checked December 21, 1981
CITY OF PHILADELPHIA
(Bill No. 1979)
AN ORDINANCE
To amend the Philadelphia Zoning Maps, by changing the designation of the following area of the City from partly Class
"R-5 Residential," partly Class "R-10 Residential" and partly Class "C-2 Commercial" to a single designation of Class
"Institutional Development District": area situate southwest of the point of intersection of the easterly houseline of Thirtyninth Street and the southerly side of Spruce Street through to Pine Street and Baltimore Avenue, including the bed of
Thirty-ninth Street and a portion of the bed of Pine Street.
The Council of the City of Philadelphia hereby ordains:
SECTION 1. Pursuant to Section 14-103 of The Philadelphia Code, the Philadelphia Zoning Maps are hereby
amended by changing the designation of the following area of the city from partly Class "R-5 Residential," partly Class
"R-10 Residential" and partly Class "C-2 Commercial" to a single designation of Class "Institutional Development
District":
BEGINNING at the point of intersection of the easterly side of Thirty-ninth Street (sixty feet wide) and the
southerly side of Spruce Street (eighty feet wide); thence along the said side of Thirty-ninth Street south eleven degrees
one minute zero seconds west, two hundred twenty-six feet five and three-quarter inches; thence south nineteen degrees
forty-one minutes fifty-three seconds east, two hundred twenty-four feet and one-quarter of an inch to the northwesterly
side of Woodland Avenue (varying widths); thence along the said side of Woodland Avenue south seventy degrees
eighteen minutes seven seconds west, three feet eleven and one-eighth inches to a point within the bed of Thirty-ninth
Street (which is the point of intersection with the northerly side of Baltimore Avenue (eighty feet wide) and Thirty-ninth
Street along the said side of Baltimore Avenue south eighty-nine degrees six minutes thirty-six seconds west, fifty-eight
feet one and one-quarter inches to the point of intersection of the westerly side of Thirty-ninth Street and the northerly side
of Baltimore Avenue; thence continuing along the said side of Baltimore Avenue south eighty-nine degrees six minutes
thirty-six seconds west, one hundred twelve feet eleven and one-half inches; thence north eleven degrees one minute zero
seconds east, crossing the bed of Pine Street (sixty feet wide) one hundred thirty-six feet four and one-eighth inches to a
point on the northerly side of Pine Street; thence along the said side of Pine Street north seventy-eight degrees fifty-nine
minutes zero seconds west, one hundred sixty-two feet; thence, north eleven degrees one minute zero seconds east, one
hundred sixty feet to the center line of former Delancey Street (now on the City Plan as a drainage right-of-way thirty feet
wide) thence along the said center line of Delancey Street south seventy-eight degrees fifty-nine minutes zero seconds east,
one hundred fifty-eight feet four inches to the point of intersection with the westerly side of Thirty-ninth Street; thence
along the said side of Thirty-ninth Street north eleven degrees one minute zero seconds east, one hundred sixty feet to the
southerly side of Spruce Street; thence along the said side of Spruce Street crossing the bed of Thirty-ninth Street south
seventy-eight degrees fifty-nine minutes zero seconds east, sixty feet to the aforementioned point and place of beginning.
SECTION 2. This ordinance shall not become effective unless the sum of one hundred (100) dollars, toward
costs thereof, is paid into the City Treasury within thirty days after the approval of this ordinance.
CERTIFICATION: This is a true and correct copy of the original Ordinance approved by the Mayor on
September 30, 1975.
SIGNED BY: Charles H. Sawyer, Jr.
Chief Clerk of the Council
CITY OF PHILADELPHIA
(Bill No. 1444)
AN ORDINANCE
To amend the Philadelphia Zoning Maps, by changing the designation of the following area of the City from the following
Class Districts: "G-2 General Industrial," "C-2 Commercial," "C-3 Commercial," "C-4 Commercial," "R-5 Residential,"
"R-9 Residential," "R-10 Residential," "R-15 Residential," and "R-16 Residential" to a single designation of Class
"Institutional Development District": portions of the area bounded generally by Ludlow Street, the Schuylkill Expressway,
South Street, Convention Avenue, Curie Avenue, University Avenue, Thirty-ninth Street, Spruce Street and Fortieth Street.
The Council of the City of Philadelphia hereby ordains:
SECTION 1. Pursuant to Section 14-103 of The Philadelphia Code, the Philadelphia Zoning Maps are hereby
amended by changing the designation of the following area of the City from the following Class Districts: "G-2 General
Industrial," "C-2 Commercial," "C-3 Commercial," "C-4 Commercial," "R-5 Residential," "R-9 Residential," "R-10
Residential," "R-15 Residential," and "R-16 Residential" to a single designation of Class "Institutional Development
District":
AREA beginning at the intersection of the northerly side of Baltimore Avenue (ninety feet wide) with the
westerly side of Thirty-ninth Street (sixty feet wide) and bounded by the following directions and distances: thence
extending northwardly along the said side of Thirty-ninth Street to the northerly side of Spruce Street (eighty feet wide);
thence westwardly along the said side of Spruce Street to the westerly side of Fortieth Street (sixty feet wide); thence
northwardly along the said side of Fortieth Street to the northerly side of Irving Street (thirty feet wide); thence westwardly
along the said side of Irving Street to a point approximately three hundred fifty feet west of Fortieth Street; thence
northwardly, along a line parallel with Fortieth Street, to the southerly side of Locust Street (sixty feet wide); thence
eastwardly along the said side of Locust Street to the easterly side of Fortieth Street; thence northwardly along the easterly
side of Fortieth Street to the southerly side of Walnut Street (eighty feet wide); thence eastwardly along the said side of
Walnut Street to the easterly side of Thirty-eighth Street (sixty feet wide); thence northwardly along the said side of Thirtyeighth Street to the southerly side of Sansom Street (fifty feet wide); thence eastwardly along the said side of Sansom
Street to the easterly side of Thirty-seventh Street (sixty feet wide); thence northwardly along the said side of Thirtyseventh Street to the southerly side of Chestnut Street (eighty feet wide); thence eastwardly along the said side of Chestnut
Street to the easterly side of Thirty-fourth Street (sixty feet wide); thence northwardly along the said side of Thirty-fourth
Street to the southerly side of Ludlow Street (forty feet wide); thence eastwardly along the said side of Ludlow Street
approximately two hundred forty feet; thence southwardly along a line parallel with Thirty-fourth Street to the southerly
side of Chestnut Street; thence eastwardly along the said side of Chestnut Street to the westerly side of Thirty-third Street
(sixty feet wide); thence southwardly along the said side of Thirty-third Street approximately two hundred forty feet to a
point; thence eastwardly, along a line parallel with Chestnut Street, to the westerly side of Thirty-second Street (ninety feet
wide); thence southwardly along the said side of Thirty-second Street to the southerly side of Walnut Street; thence
eastwardly along the said side of Walnut Street to the westerly boundary line of the Schuylkill Expressway (varying
width); thence southwestwardly along the boundary line of the Schuylkill Expressway to the southerly side of South Street
(eighty feet wide); thence northwestwardly along the said side of South Street to the westerly side of Convention Avenue
(seventy feet wide); thence southwestwardly and northwestwardly along the northwesterly and northeasterly sides of
Convention Avenue, in that order, to the westerly side of Thirty-fourth Street; thence northwardly along the said side of
Thirty-fourth Street to a point approximately three hundred ninety feet south of Spruce Street; thence westwardly along a
line parallel with Spruce Street, approximately four hundred fifteen feet to a point; thence southwardly, along a line
parallel with Thirty-fourth Street, approximately one hundred twenty-five feet to a point; thence westwardly, along a line
parallel with Spruce Street, approximately four hundred forty feet to a point; thence southwestwardly, along a line parallel
to Curie Avenue, approximately five hundred eighty-five feet to a point; thence in a northwestwardly direction, along a
property line of the University of Pennsylvania, approximately one hundred twenty-five feet to a point; thence in a
southwestwardly direction, along a property line of the University of Pennsylvania and crossing the bed of University
Avenue, approximately three hundred
forty feet to the westerly side of University Avenue (ninety feet wide); thence northwestwardly along the said side of
University Avenue to the southeasterly side of Woodland Avenue (seventy feet wide); thence northwestwardly to the place
of beginning.
SECTION 2. This ordinance shall not become effective unless the sum of one hundred (100) dollars, toward
costs thereof, is paid into the City Treasury within thirty days after the approval of this ordinance.
SECTION 3. The effective date of this ordinance for the parcels of land described as follows shall be January 1,
1967:
BEGINNING at the intersection of the southerly side of Walnut Street (eighty feet wide) with the easterly side of
Thirty-seventh Street (sixty feet wide); thence extending south seventy-eight degrees fifty-nine minutes zero seconds east,
along the said side of Walnut Street one hundred fifty-one feet; thence south eleven degrees one minute zero seconds west,
fourteen feet; thence south eleven degrees seventeen minutes forty-one seconds west, fifty-one feet six inches; thence south
twelve degrees forty-two minutes thirty-two seconds west, thirty-nine feet six inches; thence south eleven degrees one
minute zero seconds west, two hundred forty-five feet nine and one-half inches; thence north seventy-eight degrees fiftynine minutes zero seconds west, one hundred fifty feet five inches to the easterly side of Thirty-seventh Street (sixty feet
wide);thence along the said side of Thirty-seventh Street north eleven degrees one minute zero seconds east, approximately
three hundred forty-six feet to the place of beginning.
AREA bounded by Spruce Street, Fortieth Street, Walnut Street, Thirty-eighth Street, Sansom Street, Thirtyseventh Street, Chestnut Street, Thirty-sixth Street, Sansom Street, Thirty-fourth Street, Walnut Street, and Thirty-seventh
Street to Spruce Street.
AREA bounded by Locust Street (sixty feet wide), Fortieth Street (sixty feet wide), Irving Street (thirty feet
wide), and a line parallel with and three hundred fifty feet west of Fortieth Street.
CERTIFICATION: This is a true and correct copy of the original Ordinance approved by the Mayor on
December 13, 1965.
Signed By:
Nathan Wolfman
Chief Clerk of the Council
Exhibit D
WAIVER OF LIENS BY CONTRACTOR ON BEHALF OF SUBCONTRACTORS
TO BE INDEXED AS FOLLOWS:
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA (PLAINTIFF)
V.
CONTRACTOR (DEFENDANT)
AND
CONTRACTOR (PLAINTIFF)
V.
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA (DEFENDANT)
Contract No.
Project No.
Title
Address
WAIVER OF LIENS BY CONTRACTOR ON BEHALF OF SUBCONTRACTORS
THIS INSTRUMENT is executed this ____ day of_________________________, 20__
by,___________________________ having an office at_________________________________ (“Contractor”) in
favor of THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, having an office at Franklin Building, 3451
Walnut Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19104 (“Owner”).
W I T N E S S E T H:
1.
Owner and Contractor have entered or shall enter into a certain agreement (the “Contract”) for the
construction of certain improvements and the renovation of certain other improvements (collectively, the
“Improvements”) on a parcel of land located at ______________________________ and known as the
________________________________ project (collectively, the “Property”). The Property is owned by Owner.
2.
Contractor has posted a bond guaranteeing payment for labor and materials provided by
Subcontractors on the project (as defined in the Pennsylvania Mechanics’ Lien Law, as amended).
3.
Contractor has entered or shall enter into a certain agreements with Subcontractors, and the
Subcontractors have or shall enter into agreements with Sub-subcontractors and Suppliers.
4.
By the terms of the Contract and by this Instrument, Contractor has covenanted, promised and agreed
and hereby covenants, promises and agrees that no mechanic’s or materialmen’s liens would be or will be filed or
maintained against the Improvements or the estate or title of Owner in the Property, or any part thereof, or the
appurtenances thereto, by any Subcontractor as defined by the Pennsylvania Mechanics’ Lien Law, as amended,
including without limitation any Subcontractor in direct privity of contract with Contractor, and also any subcontractor
or supplier in direct privity of contractor with any Subcontractor, or anyone else for or on account of any work, labor or
materials supplied in the performance of any Trade Contract, or under any supplemental contract or for extra work
under or related to any Trade Contract, or in the erection, construction or completion of the Improvements on the
Property or any appurtenance thereto under or related to any Trade Contract.
NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of ten dollars ($10.00) and other good and valuable consideration, the
receipt and sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, and the Contract and this Instrument and the covenants of
Owner herein and therein contained, and intending to be legally bound hereby, Contractor agrees as follows:
1.
Contractor is or may be a contractor within the meaning of the Mechanics’ Lien Law of 1963, as
amended (the “Act”).
2.
Each Subcontractor is or may be a “Subcontractor” within the meaning of the Pennsylvania
Mechanics’ Lien Law, as amended (the “Act”).
3.
Each subcontractor and supplier in direct privity of contract with a Subcontractor (hereinafter “Subsubcontractor/Supplier”) is or may be a “Subcontractor” within the meaning of the Pennsylvania Mechanics’ Lien Law,
as amended (the “Act”).
4.
Contractor, on behalf of all of its Subcontractors, all Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers and all other
persons who are “Subcontractors” as defined in the Pennsylvania Mechanics Lien Law as amended, and anyone else
acting or claiming through or under any of them, does hereby waive and relinquish all rights of all of its Subcontractors,
all Sub-subcontractors/Suppliers, and all other persons who are “Subcontractors” as defined in the Pennsylvania
Mechanics Lien Law as amended, and anyone else acting or claiming through or under any of them, to file a mechanics’
lien, or notice of intention to file any lien, and Contractor does hereby covenant, promise and agree that no mechanics’
lien or other lien of any kind whatsoever shall be filed or maintained by any of them against the Improvements or the
estate or title of Owner in the Property or the appurtenances thereto, or any part thereof, for work done or materials
furnished in connection with any Trade Contract for and about the Improvements or the Property or any part thereof.
5.
This Instrument waiving the right of lien on behalf of all Subcontractors, Subsubcontractors/Suppliers and any other party acting through or under them or any of them, shall be an independent
covenant and shall operate and be effective as well with respect to work done and materials furnished under any
supplemental contract for extra work relating to any such Trade Contract in the erection, construction and completion of
the Improvements to the same extent as to any work and labor done and materials furnished in connection with any such
Trade Contract.
6.
THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH CONTAINS A WARRANT OF ATTORNEY FOR THE
CONFESSION OF JUDGMENT AGAINST ANYONE ACTING UNDER OR THROUGH CONTRACTOR IN
VIOLATION OF THIS WAIVER. In order to give Owner full power and authority to protect itself, the Improvements,
the Property, the estate or title of Owner therein, and the appurtenances thereto, against any and all liens filed by any
Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor/Supplier or anyone acting by or through them, whether in their own name or in the
name of Contractor or anyone acting under or through it, in violation of the foregoing covenants, Contractor, knowingly
and upon advice of separate counsel, hereby irrevocably authorizes and empowers any Attorney of any Court of
Common Pleas of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, to appear as Attorney for it, them or any of them, in any such
Court, and in its or their name or names, to the extent permitted by law, mark satisfied of record at the cost and expense
of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor, subcontractor or materialman, any and all lien or liens, filed in violation of
the foregoing covenants, or cause to be filed and served in connection with such lien or liens any pleading or
instrument, or any amendment to any pleading or instrument previously filed by it or them, and to incorporate therein,
as part of the record, the waiver and release contained in this Instrument, and for such act or acts this Instrument or a
copy thereof shall be good and sufficient warrant and authority. A reference to the court, term and number in which and
where this Instrument shall have been filed shall be conclusive evidence of the authority herein contained to warrant
such action, and the Contractor, for itself and for them, hereby remises, releases and quit-claims all rights and all
manner or errors, defects and imperfections whatsoever in entering such satisfaction or in filing such pleading,
instrument or amendment, or in any way concerning them.
7.
This Instrument is made and may be filed with the Prothonotary or Clerk of the county in which the
Property is located in accordance with the requirements of the Act.
8.
The provisions of this Instrument are severable. Any provisions of this Instrument which shall be
invalid, void or illegal shall in no way affect, impair or invalidate any other provision hereof, and the remaining
provisions shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Contractor has executed this Instrument as of the date and year
first above written.
CONTRACTOR:
__________________________________
Attest: ________________________________
Secretary
By: _______________________________
(Signature)
Title: ______________________________
Name: _____________________________
(Corporate Seal)
:
: ss
:
On the ______ day of _________________, 20___, before me, the subscriber, a notary public in and for the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, personally appeared ____________________________________ (name of person
signing
on
behalf
of
contractor),
who
acknowledged
himself
to
be
the
______________________________________________ (title of the person signing for the contractor)
of
____________________________________ (the name of the company), a _________________ (corporation or
general partnership or sole proprietorship), and that he/she, being authorized to do so, executed the foregoing
instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the name of the ______________(corporation or general
partnership or sole proprietorship) by himself as such ________________________ (title of person signing on behalf
of the contractor).
WITNESS my hand and seal the day and year aforesaid.
(SEAL)
___________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
EXHIBIT E-1
PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that the Contractor:
(Here insert full name and address of Contractor)
as Principal, hereinafter called “Contractor”,
and the Surety:
(Here insert full name and address of Surety)
as Surety, hereinafter called “Surety”,
are held and firmly bound unto the Owner:
(Here insert full name and address of Owner)
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
Franklin Building
3456 Walnut Street
Philadelphia, PA 19104
as Obligee, hereinafter called “Obligee”, in the amount of:
(Here insert dollar amount of Bond)
for the payment whereof the Contractor and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, Contractor has by written agreement dated ____________________________ entered
into a contract with Obligee for:
(Here insert full name, address and description of project)
which contract is incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof, and is hereinafter
referred to as the “Contract.”
November, 2005
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if Contractor shall promptly and
faithfully perform said Contract, including all of the obligations set forth therein, in accordance with the terms
thereof, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
b)
(i) If the Contractor has been
terminated by the Obligee for default, and if the
Obligee elects not to arrange itself for the completion
of the work under the Contract as set forth under
subparagraph 3(a) of this Bond, then the Surety shall
promptly and without delay, upon demand from the
Obligee, undertake to perform and complete all of the
obligations of the Contractor under the Contract, in
accordance with all of its terms and conditions,
including without limitation performance of all
remaining work, correction of all defective and nonconforming work, and satisfaction of all other
obligations of the Contractor under the Contract,
including without limitation monetary obligations,
warranties, guarantees, and the payment of damages
to Obligee, including without limitation damages
caused by the late completion of the work, and the
Obligee shall pay to the Surety the balance of the
contract price, as and when due under the Contract,
for work performed by the Surety or any contractor
retained by the Surety to complete the work under the
Contract .
1.
The Surety hereby waives notice of any
modifications or changes to the Contract, including
without limitation change orders and time extensions.
2.
Whenever Contractor shall be, and shall be
declared by Obligee to be, in default under the
Contract, the Owner having performed its obligations
thereunder, the Surety shall:
a)
Promptly pay to the Obligee, upon
demand, any and all costs, expenses, losses and other
damages which the Obligee has or shall sustain as a
result of the Contractor’s default or defaults; and
b)
Upon demand by the Obligee,
promptly remedy the Contractor’s default or defaults,
in addition to paying any sums due to the Obligee
under subparagraph 2(a) above.
The Obligee
reserves the right, in each instance, in its sole
discretion, either (i) to demand that the Surety
remedy any or all of the Contractor’s defaults and/or
(ii) to make the Obligee’s own arrangements to
remedy any or all of the Contractor’s defaults. In the
latter event, the Obligee may demand payment from
the Surety for all the costs thereof under
subparagraph 2(a) above, and the Surety shall
promptly make payment to the Obligee of all of said
costs.
(ii) If the Owner makes demand
upon the Surety to perform and complete the
obligations of the Contractor pursuant to Section
3(b)(i) of this Bond, then the Surety shall make its
own arrangements for the completion of the Contract;
provided, however, that the Surety must obtain the
Obligee’s prior approval of all proposed contractors
and subcontractors that the Surety desires to retain
for the performance by Surety of the work under the
Contract.
The Owner shall not unreasonably
withhold its approval of contractors and/or
subcontractors that the surety proposes to retain, but
shall not be required to approve any entity that
Owner believes to lack proper experience or
appropriate financial strength or with whom the
Owner has previously had an unsatisfactory
experience or whose reputation Owner believes to be
unfavorable. In no event shall the Owner be required
to approve selection of the Contractor to perform any
portion of the work under the Contract.
3.
a)
If the Contractor has been
terminated by the Obligee for default, then the
Obligee may elect, in its sole discretion, to arrange
itself for the completion of the work under the
Contract, in which event the Surety shall promptly
pay to the Obligee, upon demand, all of the Obligee’s
costs, expenses, losses and other damages which the
Obligee has or shall sustain as a result of the default
or defaults of the Contractor, including without
limitation all of the additional costs incurred by the
Obligee for the completion of the work and the
correction of all defective and non-conforming work,
beyond the balance of the contract price and all of the
Obligee’s other damages, including without
limitation damages caused by the late completion of
the work. The Surety shall also remain responsible
for the satisfaction of all of the other obligations of
the Contractor under the Contract, in accordance with
all of its terms and conditions.
4.
The term “balance of the contract price”, as
used in this Bond, shall mean the total amount
payable by Obligee to the Contractor under the
Contract and any amendments thereto, less the
amount previously paid by the Obligee to the
November, 2005
6
Contractor, and less adjustments and offsets to the
balance of the contract price for costs, expenses,
losses and other damages incurred or to be incurred
by the Obligee as a result of the Contractor’s default
or defaults.
5.
In no event may the Surety use the
Contractor to remedy a default or to complete the
Contract, if the Obligee has terminated the Contractor
for default, unless the Obligee consents in its sole
discretion.
6.
Any suit by Obligee against Surety under
this Bond must be instituted within four (4) years
after final completion of the work under the Contract.
In any suit by any party under this Bond, the
exclusive forum shall be the state or federal court in
the county where the project is located, and not any
other forum, except with the written consent of the
Obligee.
7.
If the Surety breaches its obligations under
this Bond, then the Obligee shall be entitled to
recover its attorney’s fees and costs in any suit
against the Surety.
8.
No right of action shall accrue on this Bond
to or for the use of any person or legal entity other
than the Obligee named herein, or the heirs,
executors, administrators, successors or assigns of the
Obligee.
Signed and sealed this _________ day of ___________________.
CONTRACTOR (Insert Name):___________________________
________________________
(Witness)
By:
_____________________________________[SEAL]
Name of Person Signing:_______________________
Title:________________________________________
SURETY (Insert Name):_________________________
________________________
(Witness)
By:
_____________________________________[SEAL]
Name of Person Signing:____________________________
Title:____________________________________________
November, 2005
7
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS TO BOND
SURETY ACKNOWLEDGMENT
STATE OF ____________________ :
: SS.
COUNTY OF __________________ :
On this ______ day of ____________ in the year ________, before me personally came ______________, to me known, who being by me
duly sworn, did depose and say that he/she resides in ____________________; that he/she is the attorney-in-fact of
_______________________________________________________, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument
as surety; that he/she knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed
by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he/she signed his/her name thereto by like order and with authority to do so.
NOTARY PUBLIC STAMP
NOTARY PUBLIC
INDIVIDUAL - PRINCIPAL
STATE OF ____________________ :
: SS.
COUNTY OF __________________ :
On
this
_________
day
of
_______________
in
the
year
______,
before
me
personally
came
_________________________________________, to me known and known to me to be the individual of said name described in and who
executed the foregoing instrument and duly acknowledged to me that he/she executed the same.
NOTARY PUBLIC STAMP
NOTARY PUBLIC
CORPORATION - PRINCIPAL
STATE OF ____________________ :
: SS.
COUNTY OF __________________ :
On this ______ day of ____________ , in the year ______, before me personally came ______________________________, to me known,
who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that he/she resides in _______________________________________; that he/she
is______________________________of ________________________________________________, the corporation described in and which
executed the foregoing instrument as principal; that he/she knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such
corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he/she signed his name thereto by like
order and with authority to do so.
NOTARY PUBLIC STAMP
NOTARY PUBLIC
PARTNERSHIP - PRINCIPAL
STATE OF ____________________ :
: SS.
COUNTY OF __________________ :
On this ___________ day of _____________________, in the year ____, before me personally came _____________________, to me
known, and known to me to be a partner of the firm of ___________________________________, and he/she duly acknowledged to me that
he/she executed the same for the uses and purposes therein mentioned and with authority to do so.
NOTARY PUBLIC STAMP
NOTARY PUBLIC
November, 2005
POWER OF ATTORNEY
[Attach power of attorney for attorney-in-fact who signs for Surety]
November, 2005
Exhibit E-2
Labor and Material Payment Bond
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that:
(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor)
as Principal, hereinafter called “Principal”, and,
(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety)
as Surety, hereinafter call the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto:
(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner)
THE TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA
Franklin Building
3451 Walnut Street
Philadelphia, PA 19104
as Obligee, hereinafter called Obligee, for the use and benefit of the claimants hereinbelow
defined, in the amount of_____________________ , for the payment where Principal and Surety
bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and
severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS,
Principal has by written agreement dated
entered into a contract with Owner for
(Here insert full name, address and description of project)
in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by
(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Architect)
which contract is by reference made a part of, and it hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBILIGATION is such that, if Principal
shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and material
used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Contract, then this obligation shall
November, 2005
be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect subject, however to the following
conditions:
1.
A claimant is defined as one having
a direct contract with the Principal or with a
subcontractor or a subsubcontractor of the
Principal for labor, material, or both, used or
reasonable required for use in the
performance of the Contract, labor and
material being construed to include that part
of water, gas power, light, heat, oil,
gasoline, telephone service or rental
equipment directly applicable to the
Contract.
whom the work or labor was done or
performed. Such notice shall be signed by
mailing the same registered mail or certified
mail, postage prepaid, in an envelope
addressed to the Principal, Obligee or
Surety, at any place where an office is
regularly maintained for the transaction of
business, or served in any manner in which
legal process may be served in the state in
which the aforesaid project is located, save
that such service need not be made by a
public officer.
2.
The above named Principal and
Surety hereby jointly and severally agree
with the Obligee that every claimant as
herein defined, who has not been paid in full
before the expiration period of ninety (90)
days after the date on which the last of such
claimant’s work or labor was done or
performed, or materials were furnished by
such claimant, may sue on this bond for the
use of such claimant, prosecute the suit to
the final judgment for such sum or sums as
may be justly due claimant, and have
execution thereon. The Obligee shall not be
liable for the payment of any costs for
expenses of any such suit.
b)
After the expiration of one (1) year
following the date on which Principal ceased
work on said Contract, it being understood,
however, that if any limitation embodied in
this Bond is prohibited by any law
controlling the construction hereof, such
limitation shall be deemed to be amended so
as to be equal to the minimum period of
limitation permitted by such law.
3.
No suit of action shall
commenced hereunder by any claimant:
be
a)
Unless claimant, other than on
having a direct contract with the Principal,
shall have given written notice to any two of
the following: the Principal, the Obligee, or
the Surety above named, within ninety (90)
days after such claimant did or performed
the last of the work or labor, or furnished the
last of the materials for with said claim is
made, stating with substantial accuracy the
amount claimed and the name of the party to
whom the materials were furnished or for
c)
Other than in a state court of
competent jurisdiction in and for the county
or other political subdivision of the state in
which the Project, or any part thereof, is
situated, or in the United States District
Court for the district in which the aforesaid
project, or any part thereof, is situated, and
not elsewhere.
4.
The amount of this bond shall be
reduced by and to the extent of any payment
or payments made in good faith hereunder,
inclusive of the payment by Surety of
mechanics’ liens, which may be filed of
record against said improvement, whether or
not claim for the amount of such lien be
presented under and against this Bond.
November, 2005
5.
The Surety waives notice of any alteration or extension of the Contract.
Signed and sealed this ______ day of _________________________________.
___________________________
(Witness)
_________________________________
(Principal)
(Seal)
__________________________________
(Title)
____________________________
(Witness)
__________________________________
Surety
(Seal)
___________________________________
(Title)
November, 2005
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS TO BOND
SURETY ACKNOWLEDGMENT
STATE OF ____________________ :
: SS.
COUNTY OF __________________ :
On this ______ day of ____________ in the year ________, before me personally came ______________, to me known, who being by me
duly sworn, did depose and say that he/she resides in ____________________; that he/she is the attorney-in-fact of
_______________________________________________________, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument
as surety; that he/she knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed
by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he/she signed his/her name thereto by like order and with authority to do so.
NOTARY PUBLIC STAMP
NOTARY PUBLIC
INDIVIDUAL - PRINCIPAL
STATE OF ____________________ :
: SS.
COUNTY OF __________________ :
On
this
_________
day
of
_______________
in
the
year
______,
before
me
personally
came
_________________________________________, to me known and known to me to be the individual of said name described in and who
executed the foregoing instrument and duly acknowledged to me that he/she executed the same.
NOTARY PUBLIC STAMP
NOTARY PUBLIC
CORPORATION - PRINCIPAL
STATE OF ____________________ :
: SS.
COUNTY OF __________________ :
On this ______ day of ____________ , in the year ______, before me personally came ______________________________, to me known,
who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that he/she resides in _______________________________________; that he/she
is______________________________of ________________________________________________, the corporation described in and which
executed the foregoing instrument as principal; that he/she knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such
corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he/she signed his name thereto by like
order and with authority to do so.
NOTARY PUBLIC STAMP
NOTARY PUBLIC
PARTNERSHIP - PRINCIPAL
STATE OF ____________________ :
: SS.
COUNTY OF __________________ :
On this ___________ day of _____________________, in the year ____, before me personally came _____________________, to me
known, and known to me to be a partner of the firm of ___________________________________, and he/she duly acknowledged to me that
he/she executed the same for the uses and purposes therein mentioned and with authority to do so.
NOTARY PUBLIC STAMP
NOTARY PUBLIC
November, 2005
POWER OF ATTORNEY
[Attach power of attorney for attorney-in-fact who signs for Surety]
November, 2005
Exhibit F
LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS
TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR
Exhibit G-1
CONTRACTOR MONTHLY AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
Exhibit G-1
CONTRACTOR MONTHLY AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
TO OWNER: Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania—
FROM CONTRACTOR: ___________________________________PROJECT: ____________________________________________________________________Payment Request No.: ______.
Period From: _______________, 20___ to_______________,20
(hereinafter the “Partial Completion Date”)
Payment Request Amount: $_________________________________.
1.
CERTIFICATIONS AND WARRANTIES. The Contractor (hereinafter "the Undersigned"), hereby certifies and warrants as
follows:
(a)
The Payment Request Amount set forth above represents the actual value of all work performed for the payment request
period listed above for which payment is due under the Contract (and all authorized changes thereto) between the Undersigned and the
Owner, including (i) all labor furnished in the construction of the Project, (ii) all materials and equipment delivered to the site and
incorporated or to be incorporated in the Project; (iii) all materials and equipment for the Project stored off-site to the extent payment
therefor is permitted by the Contract, (iv) all other services performed in the construction of the Project, and (v) all equipment used, or
provided for use, in the construction of the Project. Items (i) through (v) above are hereafter collectively referred to as "work performed
in the construction of the Project."
(b)
Subject to receipt of payment for the Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned certifies that it has
received payment in full, less retainage, for all work performed in the construction of the Project through the Partial Completion Date set
forth above and, except for retainage, the Undersigned has no claims, on its own behalf or on behalf of others, against Owner or the
Project, based upon or relating to work performed in the construction of the Project through the Partial Completion Date, except for
outstanding written requests for change orders previously submitted by Contractor to Owner in writing and in conformity with the terms
of the General Conditions of the Contract.
(c)
The Undersigned has not assigned any claim, lien or any right to file a lien against Owner or the Project.
(d)
The Undersigned has paid in full all laborers and, subject to retainage no greater than the percentage retainage held by
Owner, all Subcontractors, subcontractors, materialman and others for all work performed for the Project through and including the last
application for payment for which Owner has paid Contractor.
(e)
The Undersigned has not given any security interests for any materials, equipment, appliances, fixtures or furnishings
which have been or are to be installed as part of the Project, and is conveying good title to the same to Owner.
2.
WAIVER OF LIENS AND RELEASE. Subject to receipt of payment for the Payment Request Amount set forth above, the
Undersigned does hereby waive and release all rights that presently exist or hereafter may accrue to the Undersigned to assert a mechanics
lien or other lien upon the land and/or improvements comprising the Project by reason of work performed in the construction of the
Project through the Partial Completion Date. Subject to receipt of payment for the Payment Request Amount set forth above and to
paragraph 1(b) above, the Undersigned hereby releases, acquits and forever discharges Owner and its trustees, directors, officers,
employees, agents, and their successors and assigns, from all claims, liabilities, obligations, liens, causes of action and demands
whatsoever, whether known or unknown, arising now or in the future, relating to or arising from the Project from its inception through the
Partial Completion Date.
3.
INDEMNIFICATION. Subject to receipt of payment for the Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned
hereby agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Owner and its trustees, directors, officers, employees, agents, successors and
assigns, from and against all damages, judgments, liabilities, mechanics liens, suits and expenses (including attorney's fees) directly or
indirectly relating to any cause of action, claim or lien filed by any person with respect to any work performed in the construction of the
Project through the Partial Completion Date. Upon demand, the Undersigned shall defend such causes of actions, claims or liens, and shall
bond off any mechanics’ liens, at its sole expense.
CONTRACTOR: ______________________________By:
Name and Title: ________________________________Date: _________________________SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBEDBEFORE ME THIS ___ DAY
OF_______________, ____
-Notary Public
-
Exhibit G-2
SUBCONTRACTOR MONTHLY AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
Exhibit G-2
SUBCONTRACTOR MONTHLY AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
TO CONTRACTOR: _____________________________________
FROM SUBCONTRACTOR: ___________________________________PROJECT: ______________________________________________ ; OWNER: Trustees of University of Pennsylvania
Subcontractor Payment Request No.: ____
Period From: _______________, 20___ to_______________,20
(hereinafter the “Partial Completion Date”)
Subcontractor Payment Request Amount: $_________________________________.
1.
CERTIFICATIONS AND WARRANTIES. The undersigned Subcontractor (hereinafter "the Undersigned"), hereby certifies
and warrants as follows:
(a)
The Subcontractor Payment Request Amount set forth above represents the actual value of all work performed for the
payment request period listed above for which payment is due under the contract (and all authorized changes thereto) between the
Undersigned and Contractor, including (i) all labor furnished in the construction of the Project, (ii) all materials and equipment delivered
to the site and incorporated or to be incorporated in the Project; (iii) all materials and equipment for the Project stored off-site to the extent
payment therefor is permitted by the Contract, (iv) all other services performed in the construction of the Project, and (v) all equipment
used, or provided for use, in the construction of the Project. Items (i) through (v) above are hereafter collectively referred to as "work
performed in the construction of the Project."
(b)
Except for the Subcontractor Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned certifies that it has received
payment in full, less retainage, (i) for all prior Subcontractor Payment Requests and (ii) for all work performed in the construction of the
Project through the Partial Completion Date set forth above. Except for retainage, the Undersigned certifies that it has no claims, on its
own behalf or on behalf of others, against Contractor, Owner or the Project, based upon or relating to work performed in the construction
of the Project through the Partial Completion Date, except for outstanding written requests for change orders previously submitted to
Contractor and Owner in writing and in conformity with the terms of the contract.
(c)
The Undersigned has not assigned any claim, lien or any right to file a lien against Owner or the Project.
(d)
The Undersigned has paid in full all laborers and, subject to retainage no greater than the percentage retainage held by
Contractor, all subcontractors, materialman and others for all work performed for the Project through and including the last application for
payment for which Contractor has paid Subcontractor.
(e)
The Undersigned has not given any security interests for any materials, equipment, appliances, fixtures or furnishings
which have been or are to be installed as part of the Project, and is conveying good title to the same.
2.
WAIVER OF LIENS AND RELEASE. Subject to receipt of payment for the Payment Request Amount set forth above, the
Undersigned does hereby waive and release all rights that presently exist or hereafter may accrue to the Undersigned to assert a mechanics
lien or other lien upon the land and/or improvements comprising the Project by reason of work performed in the construction of the
Project through the Partial Completion Date. Subject to paragraph 1(b) above, the Undersigned hereby releases, acquits and forever
discharges Contractor, Owner and their successors and assigns from all claims, liabilities, obligations, liens, causes of action and demands
whatsoever, whether known or unknown, arising now or in the future, relating to or arising from the Project from its inception through the
Partial Completion Date.
3.
INDEMNIFICATION. Subject to receipt of payment for the Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned
hereby agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Contractor, Owner and their successors and assigns from and against all damages,
judgments, liabilities, mechanics liens, suits and expenses (including attorney's fees) directly or indirectly relating to any cause of action,
claim or lien filed by any person with respect to any work performed in the construction of the Project through the Partial Completion
Date. Upon demand, the Undersigned shall defend such causes of actions, claims or liens, and shall bond off any mechanics’ liens, at its
sole expense.
SUBCONTRACTOR: ______________________________-
SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBEDBEFORE ME
THIS ____ DAY OF ____________, ____
____________________________-Notary Public
By:
Name and Title: ________________________________Date: _________________________-
-
Exhibit G-3
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER MONTHLY AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
Exhibit G-3 SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER MONTHLY AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE, WAIVER OF LIENS
TO: SUBCONTRACTOR: _____________________________________FROM: SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER: ___________________________________PROJECT:___________________________; CONTRACTOR: ______________; OWNER: University of Pennsylvania
Sub-Subcontractor/Supplier Payment Request No.: ____
Period From: _______________, 20___ to______________,20
(hereinafter the “Partial Completion Date”)
Sub-Subcontractor/Supplier Payment Request Amount: $_________________________________.
1.
CERTIFICATIONS AND WARRANTIES. The undersigned Sub-Subcontractor/Supplier (hereinafter "the Undersigned"),
hereby certifies and warrants as follows:
(a)The Sub-Subcontractor/Supplier Payment Request Amount set forth above represents the actual value of all work performed
for the payment request period listed above for which payment is due under the contract (and all authorized changes thereto) between the
Undersigned and Subcontractor, including (i) all labor furnished in the construction of the Project, (ii) all materials and equipment
delivered to the site and incorporated or to be incorporated in the Project; (iii) all materials and equipment for the Project stored off-site to
the extent payment therefor is permitted by the contract, (iv) all other services performed in the construction of the Project, and (v) all
equipment used, or provided for use, in the construction of the Project. Items (i) through (v) above are hereafter collectively referred to as
"work performed in the construction of the Project."
(b)Except for the Subcontractor/Supplier Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned certifies that it has received
payment in full, less retainage, (i) for all prior Sub-Subcontractor/Supplier Payment Requests and (ii) for all work performed in the
construction of the Project through the Partial Completion Date set forth above. Except for retainage, the Undersigned certifies that it has
no claims, on its own behalf or on behalf of others, against Subcontractor, Contractor, Owner or the Project, based upon or relating to
work performed in the construction of the Project through the Partial Completion Date, except for outstanding written requests for change
orders previously submitted to Subcontractor, Contractor and Owner in writing and in conformity with the terms of the SubSubcontract/Purchase Order.
(c)The Undersigned has not assigned any claim, lien or any right to file a lien against Owner or the Project.
(d)The Undersigned has paid in full all laborers and, subject to retainage no greater than the percentage retainage held by
Subcontractor, all lower tier subcontractors, materialman and others for all work performed for the Project through and including the last
application for payment for which Subcontractor has paid Sub-Subcontractor/Supplier.
(e)
The Undersigned has not given any security interests for any materials, equipment, appliances, fixtures or furnishings
which have been or are to be installed as part of the Project, and is conveying good title to the same.
2.
WAIVER OF LIENS AND RELEASE. Subject to receipt of payment for the Payment Request Amount set forth above, the
Undersigned does hereby waive and release all rights that presently exist or hereafter may accrue to the Undersigned to assert a mechanics
lien or other lien upon the land and/or improvements comprising the Project by reason of work performed in the construction of the
Project through the Partial Completion Date. Subject to paragraph 1(b) above, the Undersigned hereby releases, acquits and forever
discharges Subcontractor, Contractor, Owner and their successors and assigns from all claims, liabilities, obligations, liens, causes of
action and demands whatsoever, whether known or unknown, arising now or in the future, relating to or arising from the Project from its
inception through the Partial Completion Date.
3.
INDEMNIFICATION. Subject to receipt of payment for the Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned
hereby agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Subcontractor, Contractor, Owner and their successors and assigns from and
against all damages, judgments, liabilities, mechanics liens, suits and expenses (including attorney's fees) directly or indirectly relating to
any cause of action, claim or lien filed by any person with respect to any work performed in the construction of the Project through the
Partial Completion Date. Upon demand, the Undersigned shall defend such causes of actions, claims or liens, and shall bond off any
mechanics’ liens, at its sole expense.
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER:
SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBEDBEFORE ME
By:
THIS ____ DAY OF ____________, ____
Name and Title: ____________________________________________________________-Notary Public
Date: _________________________-
Exhibit H-1
CONTRACTOR FINAL PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
Exhibit H-1 CONTRACTOR FINAL PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
TO OWNER: Trustees of University of Pennsylvania
-
FROM CONTRACTOR:______________________________________________PROJECT: _________________________________________________________
Payment Request No.: ________(Final Payment)
Period From: Inception to _______________, ____(hereinafter the “Final Completion Date”)
Final Payment Request Amount: $_______________ 1.
CERTIFICATIONS, AFFIRMATIONS AND WARRANTIES. The undersigned Contractor (hereinafter "the Undersigned")
hereby affirms, certifies and warrants as follows:
(a) The Undersigned has completed all of its work on the Project, and has achieved Final Completion of the Project.
(b) The Final Payment Request Amount set forth above represents the actual value of all work performed through Final
Completion and for which final payment is due under the terms of the Contract (and all authorized changes thereto) between the
Undersigned and the Owner relating to the Project, including (i) all labor expended or furnished in the construction of the Project, (ii) all
materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the Project; (iii) all materials, fixtures and equipment for the Project stored
off-site to the extent authorized by Owner and for which payment therefor is permitted by the Contract, (iv) all services furnished or
performed in the construction of the Project, and (v) all equipment used, or provided for use, in the construction of the Project. Items (i)
through (v) above are hereafter collectively referred to as "work performed in the construction of the Project."
(c) Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned certifies that it has received
payment in full, including all retainage, for all work performed through Final Completion of the Project; and the Undersigned certifies
that no further payments are or will be due to it on this Project. The Undersigned further certifies that it has no claims, on its own behalf
or on behalf of others, against Owner or the Project, based upon or relating to work performed in the construction of the Project or
otherwise relating to or arising from the Project, whether for labor, materials, equipment or otherwise relating to the Project.
(d) The Undersigned has not assigned to anyone any claim, any lien, or any right to file or perfect a lien, against Owner or the
Project.
(e) The Undersigned has paid in full all laborers, Subcontractors, subcontractors, suppliers, materialman and others with respect
to all work performed in the construction of the Project through Final Completion.
(f) The Undersigned has not given or executed any security interests for or in connection with any materials, equipment,
appliances, machines, fixtures or furnishings which have been or are to be installed as part of the Project, and is conveying good title to
the same to Owner.
2.
WAIVER OF LIENS AND RELEASE. Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set forth above, the
Undersigned does hereby forever waive and release all rights that presently exist or hereafter may accrue to the Undersigned, by reason of
work performed in the construction of the Project or by reason of any other cause, matter or thing relating to the Project, to assert a
mechanics lien upon the land and/or improvements comprising the Project. Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set
forth above, the Undersigned hereby releases, acquits and forever discharges Owner and its trustees, directors, officers, employees, agents,
successors and assigns, from all claims, liabilities, obligations, liens, causes of action and demands whatsoever, whether known or
unknown, arising now or in the future, relating to or arising from the Project, based upon any cause, matter or thing whatsoever, from
inception of the project through Final Completion.
3
INDEMNIFICATION. Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned hereby
agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Owner and its trustees, directors, officers, employees, agents, successors and assigns, from
and against any and all damages, costs, judgments, liabilities, mechanics liens, demands, suits and expenses (including attorney's fees)
directly or indirectly relating to any cause of action, claim or lien filed by any person with respect to any work performed in the
construction of the Project. Upon demand, the Undersigned shall defend such causes of actions, claims or liens, and shall bond off any
liens, at its sole expense.
SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED
BEFORE ME THIS __ DAY OF__________, ____
Notary Public
CONTRACTOR: ________________________By:
Name and Title: __________________Date:
____________________-
Exhibit H-2
SUBCONTRACTOR FINAL PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
Exhibit H-2 SUBCONTRACTOR FINAL PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
TO CONTRACTOR: ___________________________________________
FROM SUBCONTRACTOR:______________________________________________
PROJECT: _________________________________; OWNER: Trustees of University of Pennsylvania
Payment Request No.: ________(Final Payment)
Period From: Inception to _______________, ____(hereinafter the “Final Completion Date”)
Final Payment Request Amount: $_______________ 1.
CERTIFICATIONS, AFFIRMATIONS AND WARRANTIES.
The undersigned Subcontractor (hereinafter "the
Undersigned") hereby affirms, certifies and warrants as follows:
(a) The Undersigned has completed all of its work on the Project, and has achieved Final Completion of the Project.
(b) The Final Payment Request Amount set forth above represents the actual value of all work performed through Final
Completion and for which final payment is due under the terms of the contract (and all authorized changes thereto) between the
Undersigned and Contractor relating to the Project, including (i) all labor expended or furnished in the construction of the Project, (ii) all
materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the Project; (iii) all materials, fixtures and equipment for the Project stored
off-site to the extent authorized by Owner and for which payment therefor is permitted by the contract, (iv) all services furnished or
performed in the construction of the Project, and (v) all equipment used, or provided for use, in the construction of the Project. Items (i)
through (v) above are hereafter collectively referred to as "work performed in the construction of the Project."
(c) Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned certifies that it has received
payment in full, including all retainage, for all work performed through Final Completion of the Project; and the Undersigned certifies that
no further payments are or will be due to it on this Project. The Undersigned further certifies that it has no claims, on its own behalf or on
behalf of others, against Contractor, Owner or the Project, based upon or relating to work performed in the construction of the Project or
otherwise relating to or arising from the Project, whether for labor, materials, equipment or otherwise relating to the Project.
(d) The Undersigned has not assigned to anyone any claim, any lien, or any right to file or perfect a lien, against Owner or the
Project.
(e) The Undersigned has paid in full all laborers, subcontractors, suppliers, materialman and others with respect to all work
performed in the construction of the Project through Final Completion.
(f) The Undersigned has not given or executed any security interests for or in connection with any materials, equipment,
appliances, machines, fixtures or furnishings which have been or are to be installed as part of the Project, and is conveying good title to
the same to Contractor and Owner.
2.
WAIVER OF LIENS AND RELEASE. Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set forth above, the
Undersigned does hereby forever waive and release all rights that presently exist or hereafter may accrue to the Undersigned, by reason of
work performed in the construction of the Project or by reason of any other cause, matter or thing relating to the Project, to assert a
mechanics lien upon the land and/or improvements comprising the Project. Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set
forth above, the Undersigned hereby releases, acquits and forever discharges Contractor, Owner and their successors and assigns from all
claims, liabilities, obligations, liens, causes of action and demands whatsoever, whether known or unknown, arising now or in the future,
relating to or arising from the Project, based upon any cause, matter or thing whatsoever, from inception of the project through Final
Completion.
3
INDEMNIFICATION. Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned hereby
agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Contractor, Owner and their successors and assigns from and against any and all damages,
costs, judgments, liabilities, mechanics liens, demands, suits and expenses (including attorney's fees) directly or indirectly relating to any
cause of action, claim or lien filed by any person with respect to any work performed in the construction of the Project. Upon demand, the
Undersigned shall defend such causes of actions, claims or liens, and shall bond off any liens, at its sole expense.
SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED
BEFORE ME THIS __ DAY OF__________, ____
Notary Public
SUBCONTRACTOR: ________________________By:
Name and Title: __________________Date: ____________________-
Exhibit H-3
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER FINAL PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT,
RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
EXHIBIT H-3
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER FINAL PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT, RELEASE AND WAIVER OF LIENS
TO SUBCONTRACTOR: __________________________________________
FROM SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER: ________________________________________________
PROJECT: ________________________; Contractor ___________________ ; Owner: University of Pennsylvania
Payment Request No.: ________(Final Payment)
Period From: Inception to _______________, ____(hereinafter the “Final Completion Date”)
Final Payment Request Amount: $_______________ 1.
CERTIFICATIONS, AFFIRMATIONS AND WARRANTIES. The undersigned Sub-Subcontractor/Supplier (hereinafter
"the Undersigned") hereby affirms, certifies and warrants as follows:
(a) The Undersigned has completed all of its work on the Project, and has achieved Final Completion of the Project.
(b) The Final Payment Request Amount set forth above represents the actual value of all work performed through Final
Completion and for which final payment is due under the terms of the contract (and all authorized changes thereto) between the
Undersigned and Subcontractor relating to the Project, including (i) all labor expended or furnished in the construction of the Project, (ii)
all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the Project; (iii) all materials, fixtures and equipment for the Project
stored off-site to the extent authorized by Owner and for which payment therefor is permitted by the contract, (iv) all services furnished or
performed in the construction of the Project, and (v) all equipment used, or provided for use, in the construction of the Project. Items (i)
through (v) above are hereafter collectively referred to as "work performed in the construction of the Project."
(c) Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned certifies that it has received
payment in full, including all retainage, for all work performed through Final Completion of the Project; and the Undersigned certifies
that no further payments are or will be due to it on this Project. The Undersigned further certifies that it has no claims, on its own behalf
or on behalf of others, against Subcontractor, Contractor, Owner or the Project, based upon or relating to work performed in the
construction of the Project or otherwise relating to or arising from the Project, whether for labor, materials, equipment or otherwise
relating to the Project.
(d) The Undersigned has not assigned to anyone any claim, any lien, or any right to file or perfect a lien, against Owner or the
Project.
(e) The Undersigned has paid in full all laborers, subcontractors, suppliers, materialman and others with respect to all work
performed in the construction of the Project through Final Completion.
(f) The Undersigned has not given or executed any security interests for or in connection with any materials, equipment,
appliances, machines, fixtures or furnishings which have been or are to be installed as part of the Project, and is conveying good title to
the same to Subcontractor, Contractor and Owner.
2.
WAIVER OF LIENS AND RELEASE. Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set forth above, the
Undersigned does hereby forever waive and release all rights that presently exist or hereafter may accrue to the Undersigned, by reason of
work performed in the construction of the Project or by reason of any other cause, matter or thing relating to the Project, to assert a
mechanics lien upon the land and/or improvements comprising the Project. Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set
forth above, the Undersigned hereby releases, acquits and forever discharges Subcontractor, Contractor, Owner and their successors and
assigns from all claims, liabilities, obligations, liens, causes of action and demands whatsoever, whether known or unknown, arising now
or in the future, relating to or arising from the Project, based upon any cause, matter or thing whatsoever, from inception of the project
through Final Completion.
3
INDEMNIFICATION. Subject to receipt of the Final Payment Request Amount set forth above, the Undersigned hereby
agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless Subcontractor, Contractor, Owner and their successors and assigns from and against any
and all damages, costs, judgments, liabilities, mechanics liens, demands, suits and expenses (including attorney's fees) directly or
indirectly relating to any cause of action, claim or lien filed by any person with respect to any work performed in the construction of the
Project. Upon demand, the Undersigned shall defend such causes of actions, claims or liens, and shall bond off any liens, at its sole
expense.
SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED
BEFORE ME THIS __ DAY OF__________, ____
Notary Public
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER: ________________________By:
Name and Title: __________________Date: ____________________-
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
[INSERT FORM OF BONDS HERE]
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
[INSERT WAIVER OF LIENS HERE]
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
[INSERT SPECIAL / SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS HERE]
PENN - Facilities Services - Design and Construction
4.14 Bidding and Contracting Requirements 1-093000
Project Schedule and Milestones:
1.
The following schedule reflects critical dates to be utilized in the generation of
the construction schedule. Contractor to submit as part of their bid documents a
complete schedule for construction and deliveries for approval by the University.
a.
Spring Break: March 5, 2010 – March 15, 2010
b.
Commencement: May 17, 2010
c.
Summer Session 1: May 24, 2010 – July 2, 2010
1)
The classrooms and hallway spaces for all three floors will not
available for construction during this time period. Only work within
the basement areas will be permitted. No HVAC, electrical, fire
safety shutdowns will be permitted without consent from the
University.
d.
Summer Session 2: July 6, 2010 – August 13, 2010
1)
The classrooms and hallway spaces for all three floors will be
available for construction during this time period. No classes are
scheduled for the building during this time frame. No HVAC,
electrical, fire safety shutdowns will be permitted without consent
from the University.
e.
Latest Delivery Date for AHU: June 20, 2010
f.
Substantial Completion: July 31, 2010
1)
Work must be substantially completed by this date. Completed work
to include, but not limited to, the restoration of all classroom and
hallway finishes, the installation of all VAV units and associated
controls, ductwork installation, AHU activation and preliminary
balancing, and the plaza fully restored.
g.
Fall Session Begins: September 1, 2010
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Drawings:
G-001
G-002
A-101
A-102
A-103
A-104
A-105
A-200
A-201
A-201
A-202
A-203
A-204
A-205
A-206
FN-201
E-101
E-201
E-202
E-300
E-301
Cover Page
General Details, Notes and Schedules
DRL 4N30 Plans and Notes
DRL 4E9 Plans and Notes
DRL 4E19 Plans and Notes
DRL 4N30 and 4E9 Elevations
DRL 4E19 Elevations
Williams Hall Demolition Plans
Williams Hall Demolition Plans
Williams Hall Plans and Notes
Williams Hall Plans and Notes
Williams Hall Interior Elevations
Williams Hall Interior Elevations
Williams Hall Interior Elevations
Williams Hall Classroom 843 Plans and Notes
Classroom Furniture Layouts (Informational Use Only)
DRL - Electrical Lighting and Power Plans
Williams Hall - Electrical Lighting and Power Plans
Williams Hall - Electrical Lighting and Power Plans
Electrical Notes and Schedules
Electrical Panel Schedules
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1
SECTION 01100
SUMMARY
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and all Sections of
the Specifications
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification: Renovations to Classrooms located within the Williams Hall Building
and David Rittenhouse Laboratories Building at the University of Pennsylvania
1.
Project Location:
Williams Hall
The Univ of Pennsylvania
255 South 36th Street
Philadelphia, PA 19104
2.
Owner: The Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania
David Rittenhouse Labs
The Univ of Pennsylvania
209 South 33rd Street
Philadelphia, PA 19104
B.
Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated April 2, 2012, were prepared for the
Project by Lennox Design Studios, 2801 Soni Drive, Trooper, Pennsylvania 19403.
C.
Project Manager: Jim Palka has been appointed by Owner to serve as Project Manager.
D.
Project Summary:
1.
2.
E.
Abbreviated written summary: Interior alterations in existing classroom spaces to
upgrade finishes, audio-visual systems, mechanical and electrical systems.
Work includes: Demolition, doors and hardware, interior finishes and specialties, visual
display boards, projection screens, audio-visual equipment, HVAC and electrical work
specific to the rooms listed above.
Particular Project Requirements:
1.
Existing site conditions and restrictions: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated
on the Construction Documents.
a.
Do not disturb portions of the site beyond areas in which work is indicated. Only
the spaces being renovated may be used for storage and staging.
b.
Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to University
staff and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for vehicular
parking or storage of materials.
c.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SUMMARY 01100 - 1
SECTION 01100
SUMMARY
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
Vehicular access and parking: Limited; obtain advance authorization from the University
before parking contractor vehicles on site.
Requirements for sequencing or scheduling: Develop, in consultation with the University,
a schedule for work in occupied areas of the building, to permit the continued occupancy
and to provide advance notice to the University, of construction activities that will
necessitate vacating certain areas.
a.
4.
Submit the schedule to the Owner’s Representative and obtain approval before
proceeding with work in occupied areas.
Owner-purchased, Contractor-installed items:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
A Dumpster location to be determined. GC to coordinate with the University prior
to bringing one on-site.
There will be no long term parking on the project site. Parking will be limited to
picking up the dumpster and dropping off of materials.
Regular hours for building are 7AM to 10PM. The building will be occupied
throughout the construction phase.
A minimum of 2 weeks notice must be given to the Owner prior to any cutting of
the concrete floor slab.
A minimum of 2 weeks notice must be given to the Owner for any system shut
downs that will be required. Including, but not limited to electrical and HVAC
systems.
Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner furnished items.
Upon delivery, the Contractor shall inspect items delivered for damage and notify
the Owner of condition. If Owner furnished items are damaged, defective or
missing, the Owner will arrange for replacement.
Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading and handling of Owner
furnished items at the project site.
Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner furnished items from damage. The
contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of contractor’s
operations.
Owner purchase items include the following:
1)
General Contractor is responsible for the installation of all pathways and
infrastructure for the A/V system.
2)
GC is responsible for the installation of Owner supplied wiring associated
with the A/V system. The A/V system will be installed by another vendor.
3)
GC is responsible for the installation and associated wiring for the Owner
supplied motorized projection screens. GC to purchase mounting brackets in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Separate Contracts and Vendors: Cooperate fully with separate contractors and vendors
so work under those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or
delaying work under this contract. Separate contracts include:
a.
Audio-visual systems and equipment.
b.
Sound reinforcement systems and equipment.
c.
Security, voice, data and communications systems.
d.
Furniture.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SUMMARY 01100 - 2
SECTION 01100
SUMMARY
6.
Special Coordination Requirements: Coordinate work under this contract to
accommodate work of separate contractors and vendors, including the following:
a.
Raceways: Provide concealed raceways and other pathways as indicated to
accommodate equipment and systems furnished under separate contracts.
Coordinate with separate contractors to ensure pathways are of proper type, size
and location.
F.
Permits and Fees: Apply for, obtain and pay for permits, fees, licenses, and utility company
charges required to perform the work. Submit copies to the Owner’s Representative.
G.
Codes: Comply with all applicable codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Submit copies of inspection reports, notices and similar communications to the Owner’s
Representative.
H.
Dimensions: Verify dimensions indicated on Drawings with field dimensions before fabrication
or ordering of materials. Do not scale Drawings.
I.
Existing Conditions: Notify Architect of existing conditions differing from those indicated on
the Drawings. Do not remove or alter structural components without prior written approval.
J.
Installation Requirements, General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
K.
Extra Stock: Where extra stock or extra material is required for specific products, furnish not
less than (2.0) two percent of the quantity of each type and color of product installed on the
Project, packaged with a protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly
describing contents.
1.
L.
Inspect substrates and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Provide openings, chases, sleeves and similar provisions in walls and partitions, floors,
roofs, and other construction as needed.
Take filed measurements prior to fabrication where practical. Form to the required shapes
and sizes with true edges, lines and angles. Provide inserts and templates as needed for
work of other trades.
Install materials in exact accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved
submittals.
Install materials in proper relation with adjacent construction and with proper appearance.
Restore items damaged during installation. Replace items which cannot be restored at no
additional expense to the University.
Refer to additional installation requirements and tolerances specified under individual
specification sections.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to assure operability without damaging effects.
Where specified quantity of extra stock equals less than one full container or package,
furnish not less than one full container of package, of manufacturer’s standard packaging,
for each type and color.
Definitions:
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SUMMARY 01100 - 3
SECTION 01100
SUMMARY
1.
2.
3.
M.
1.3
Provide: Furnish and install, complete with all necessary accessories, ready for intended
use. Pay for all related costs.
Approved: Acceptance of item submitted for approval. Not a limitation or release for
compliance with the Contract Documents or regulatory requirements. Refer to limitations
of “Approved” in General and Supplementary Conditions.
Match Existing: Match existing as acceptable to the Architect.
Intent: Drawings and Specifications are intended to provide the basis for proper completion of
the work suitable for the intended use of the University. Anything not expressly set forth but
which is reasonably implied or necessary for the proper performance of the Project shall be
included.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1.
B.
Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the
beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the
Contract Documents.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,
are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SUMMARY 01100 - 4
SECTION 01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS
SECTION 01140 - WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Limits: Confine constructions operations to the classrooms and vestibule area being
renovated. There will be no on-site storage permitted except in the classroom spaces
being renovated. It is the Contractor’s responsibility for maintaining the security of all
stored materials and equipment.
Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by University Staff,
Personnel and Students.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and
available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use
these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a.
b.
B.
Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weather-tight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
1.
1.3
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
Maintain integrity of fire-resistance rated assemblies, including floors and walls. Conduct
the work and seal openings throughout the construction process so that required fireresistance ratings are not compromised.
OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire
construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize
conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's
operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 1
SECTION 01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01140
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140 - 2
SECTION 01200
PROJECT PROCEDURES
SECTION 01200 – PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Requirements include:
1.
Coordination and meetings, including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
Progress schedule and updating
Submittal schedule
Schedule of values
Payment application procedures
Contract modification procedures
Quality control during installation
Surveys, including laying out the work and verifying locations during construction
Cleaning and protecting the work.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
C.
Supervisory personnel
Emergency telephone numbers
Preconstruction conference
Progress meetings and meeting minutes.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures": Submission of shop drawings, product data
and samples.
Division 1 Section “Temporary Facilities”: Temporary utilities, support facilities and
security.
Division 1 Section “Product Requirements”: Substitution procedures
Division 1 Section “Cutting and Patching”: Procedures for cutting and patching
Division 1 Section “Protecting Existing Construction”: Procedures for protecting existing
finishes, furniture and equipment
Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures”: Contract closeout procedures
Division 2 through 16 Sections: Specific quality assurance provisions applicable to
particular work.
Correlation with Related Documents: Refer to University of Pennsylvania standard contract
provisions for other requirements related to project procedures. Where conflicts occur between
those requirements and the requirements specified in the Specifications, the standard contract
provisions shall supersede.
SUBMITTALS
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT PROCEDURES 01200 - 1
SECTION 01200
PROJECT PROCEDURES
A.
Staff Names: Submit a list of Contractor’s principal staff assignments, including project
manager and superintendent. List their addresses, telephone numbers, cell phone numbers, email addresses and emergency phone numbers.
B.
Test Reports: Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar
quality-control service performed.
1.3
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Coordinate the work of all trades.
Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for
required maintenance, service and repair.
Prepare coordination drawings for areas where close tolerances are required between
building elements and mechanical and electrical work.
Verify location of utilities and existing conditions.
Make provisions to accommodate work scheduled for later execution.
Meetings:
1.
Preconstruction Conference: Hold the conference at project site, attended by
representatives of the University, the Architect, the consultants, the Contractor, major
subcontractors, manufacturers and suppliers as applicable. Conduct the meeting to review
responsibilities, personnel assignments and the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at project site at regular intervals, attends
by Owner’s representative, Architect, Contractor, subcontractors and consultants as
applicable. Review minutes of previous meeting and discuss the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
C.
Schedule
Sequencing
Procedures for change orders, payment applications, submittals and record
documents
Use of premises, parking availability, office, work and storage areas
Security
Housekeeping
Working Hours
Progress and projected work.
Timing and sequencing.
Submittal Status.
Deliveries and fabrication.
Change orders.
Payment applications.
Progress Meeting Reporting: Architect or Owner’s representative will prepare and
distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other interested parties.
Progress Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type contractor’s
construction schedule. Submit with 30 days after date established for commencement of work.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT PROCEDURES 01200 - 2
SECTION 01200
PROJECT PROCEDURES
1.
2.
D.
Submittal Schedule: Prepare a complete schedule of submittals, coordinated with the Schedule
of Values and Contractor’s Construction Schedule.
1.
E.
2.
Break down Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of
payment applications
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; show percentage of Contract Sum to nearest onehundredth percent.
Payment Applications: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 as the form for
payment applications.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Include date for the Architect’s final release or approval that will avoid delays in the
work.
Schedule of Values: Prepare a schedule of values following major headings in the Project
Manual’s table of contents, and coordinate with Contractor’s Construction Schedule and
Payment applications.
1.
F.
Distribution: Distribute copies to Owner’s representative, Architect, subcontractors and
other parties required to comply with scheduled dates.
Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
meeting.
Include notarization and execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on
behalf of the Contractor.
Match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor’s Construction Schedule.
Submit (3) three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment.
Once copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and backup documents.
Contract Modification Procedures: Changes in the work shall be administered as follows:
1.
2.
Minor changes in the Work: Architect may issue supplemental instructions authorizing
minor changes in the work, not involving adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time,
on AIA Form G710, Architect’s Supplemental Instructions.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a details description of proposed
changes in the work that require adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time. The
description may include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
a.
3.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent of unforeseen conditions require
modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a
change request.
a.
4.
Submit an estimate of cost necessary to execute the change. List quantities of
products required and unit costs. State the effect the proposed change in work will
have on the Contract Time.
State the reasons for the change and the effect on the work. Provide a complete
description of the proposed change and indicate the effect on the Contract Sum and
Contract Time.
Construction Change Directive: When the University and Contractor disagree on the
terms of a Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT PROCEDURES 01200 - 3
SECTION 01200
PROJECT PROCEDURES
AIA Form G714. The Construction Change Directive instructs the Contractor to proceed
with a change in the work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order
a.
b.
c.
5.
H.
The Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of the change
in the work. It also designates the method to be followed to determine change in
the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
After completion of the change, submit and itemized account and supporting data
necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
Change Orders: Upon approval by the Owner’s representative of a Proposal Request, the
Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner’s representative and
Contractor on AIA Form G701.
Quality Control: Provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified in the
Contract Documents and required by all authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
For quality-control testing indicated as Contractor’s responsibility, employ and pay a
qualified independent testing agency to perform the required services. Costs for these
services are included in the Contract Sum.
2.
For quality-control testing indicated as the University’s responsibility, the University will
employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services.
3.
Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of test or other quality-control
services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document
requirements.
4.
Cooperate with agencies performing required test and similar services, and provide
reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of
operations to allow scheduling of tests.
5.
Upon completion of testing, sampling and similar services, repair damaged construction
and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements of Cutting and Patching”
Section of this specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SURVEYING
A.
3.2
Existing Services and Equipment: The existence and location of utility services and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of concealed services, equipment and other construction.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Waste Collection and Disposal: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Do
not hold materials more than (7) seven days during normal weather or (3) three days when the
temperature is expected to rise above (80) eighty degrees Fahrenheit. Handle hazardous,
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT PROCEDURES 01200 - 4
SECTION 01200
PROJECT PROCEDURES
dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing
properly. Dispose of all materials lawfully.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 01200
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT PROCEDURES 01200 - 5
SECTION 01210
ALLOWANCES
SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
1.
B.
Types of allowances include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.
1.4
Lump-sum allowances.
Unit-cost allowances.
Contingency allowances.
Testing and inspecting allowances.
Quantity allowances.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances.
In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established
in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment
to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary,
additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.
Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and
handling Change Orders.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of
allowances for testing and inspecting.
SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A.
At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final
selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed
to avoid delaying the Work.
B.
At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections.
Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C.
Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
SUBMITTALS
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1
SECTION 01210
ALLOWANCES
A.
Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form
specified for Change Orders.
B.
Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for
use in fulfillment of each allowance.
1.5
TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES
A.
Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests and
inspections, and reporting results.
B.
The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for
retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure.
C.
Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance.
D.
At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to
Owner by Change Order.
1.6
UNUSED MATERIALS
A.
Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to
Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
1.
If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not
economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver
unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is
Contractor's responsibility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return
damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with
related work.
SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 2
SECTION 01210
ALLOWANCES
A.
GC to allow $1500 for repair of ducts and insulation within DRL 4N30.
END OF SECTION 01210
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ALLOWANCES 01210 - 3
SECTION 01230
ALTERNATES
SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1.
1.4
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in
writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or
deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to
alternates.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D.
Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the
work described under each alternate.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ALTERNATES 01230 - 1
SECTION 01230
ALTERNATES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A.
None
END OF SECTION 01230
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ALTERNATES 01230 - 2
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General project coordination procedures.
Conservation.
Coordination Drawings.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
Project meetings.
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
will be assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
Division 1 Section "Project Procedures" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
2.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.
1.3
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of
attendees at meetings.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1.
C.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.
1.4
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Staff Names: Within (15) fifteen days of starting construction operations, submit a list of
principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at
Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and
telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals
assigned to Project.
1.
1.5
Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing
requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A.
General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 2
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1.
1.6
Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Preconstruction Conference:
Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Project Manager and Architect, but no later than
(15) fifteen days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or
another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel
assignments.
1.
2.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Project Manager Architect, and their
consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers;
suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
C.
Tentative construction schedule.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of Record Documents.
Use of the premises.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Working hours.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 3
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
2.
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
and Project Manager of scheduled meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
3.
4.
D.
Contract Documents.
Options.
Related Change Orders.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
Review of mockups.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility problems.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Required performance results.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1.
2.
Coordinate dates of
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Project Manager and Architect, each
contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or
involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be
represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
b.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 4
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
3.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since
the previous meeting and report.
a.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01310
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 5
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination
Drawings.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require approval. Submittals may
be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
Architect and Project Manager reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal
requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
C.
Submittals Schedule: All required shop drawing submittals are to be furnished to Lennox
Design Studios no later than May 16, 2008.
D.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Initial Review: Allow (15) fifteen days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent
submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be
delayed for coordination.
Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is required, allow (21) twenty-one days for initial review of each
submittal.
Direct Transmittal to Consultant: All submittals must be submitted to the Architect
unless prior written approval has been granted.
If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.
Allow (15) fifteen days for processing each resubmittal.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on a label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Unique identifier, including revision number.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
F.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents
on submittals.
G.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,
without review received from sources other than Contractor.
Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Project name.
Date.
Destination (To:).
Source (From:).
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Remarks.
Signature of transmitter.
H.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect
in connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1.
B.
Number of Copies: Submit (6) six copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return (3) three copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
C.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Standard color charts.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Mill reports.
Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.
Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
3.
4.
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Design calculations.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
Number of Copies: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and (5) five
copies of each submittal. Architect will return the reproducible print and (2) copies.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management
and Coordination."
E.
Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified,
and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review
of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated.
Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name or name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's
letterhead, provide the following:
a.
Size limitations.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
b.
c.
d.
6.
Compliance with recognized standards.
Availability.
Delivery time.
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
a.
b.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the
product represented by a Sample, submit at least (3) three sets of paired units that
show approximate limits of the variations.
Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections,
operation, and similar construction characteristics.
F.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.
G.
Application for Payment:
Procedures."
H.
Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
2.2
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1.
2.
3.
Number of Copies: Submit (3) three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality
Requirements."
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
C.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience
where required.
D.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed
by a qualified testing agency.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
E.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
F.
Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect,
Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
1.
Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor’s responsibility.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each
submittal to appropriate party.
D.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified
in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also
cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect,
Owner, Project Manager or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions
of this Section.
Division 1 Section "Allowances" for testing and inspecting allowances.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction
disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed
construction complies with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements.
Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Project
Manager
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
C.
Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups
are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction,
coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples
D.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
1.4
DELEGATED DESIGN
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
1.5
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for
each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a
design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with
performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
C.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Specification Section number and title.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
E.
1.6
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
C.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F.
Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
G.
Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations
governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and
similar conventions.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct
testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types
of tests and inspections to be performed.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
H.
Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance
with specified requirements for performance and test methods.
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
I.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.7
Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and
construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately
demonstrate capability of product to comply with performance requirements.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same
tasks for Project.
When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Notify Architect and Project Manager (7) seven days in advance of dates and times when
mockups will be constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's and Owner’s approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or
construction.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are
engaged to perform.
Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor and will
not be admissible as a Change Order.
Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services
specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 4
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
1.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least (24) twenty four hours in advance of time when Work that
requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested
and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing.
E.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established
by the Contract Documents.
F.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Project Manager and Contractor in
performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 5
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
G.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
I.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within (21) twenty one
days prior to the commencement of work.
1.
Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Project Manager, testing agencies,
and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and
inspections are required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIES
3.2
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
2.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections
of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 6
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 7
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including
temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection..
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Division 1 Section "Summary": Requirements for use or premises, including vehicular
access and parking, trash chute and dumpster locations, and site utilization.
Division 1 Section "Project Procedures”: Progress cleaning and trash removal.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures": Final cleaning.
USE OF UNIVERSITY FACILITIES
A.
Utilities: Use of electrical power and water available in the building will be permitted, provided
such use does not interfere with the University’s operations
1.
2.
3.
Where existing service is inadequate for construction activities, arrange and pay for
temporary power as needed for the work.
Provide adequate distribution to areas where power is required.
Provide adequate lengths of hose, with couplings that prevent leakage and allow water to
shut off automatically when not in use. Do not permit water to leak in or around the
buildings.
B.
Toilets: Use of designated toilet facilities will be permitted, provided facilities are cleaned and
maintained in a condition acceptable to the University. At Substantial Completion, restore these
facilities to the condition prevalent at time of initial use.
C.
Office and Storage: Use of space in Construction area will be permitted for Contractor’s field
office and temporary materials storage.
1.
2.
1.3
Contractor shall provide telephone service, office equipment and secure lockup.
Vacate temporary offices and storage areas at time of Substantial Completion unless
otherwise acceptable to the University.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Provide temporary services and utilities as needed for construction. These services shall include
but are not limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
Water.
Lighting and Power.
Telephone.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 1
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
4.
B.
Provide construction facilities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Construction equipment.
Enclosures.
Heating.
Lighting.
Access.
Provide security and protection requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Materials Storage.
Fire extinguishers.
Barricades, warning signs, and lighting.
Enclosure and lock-up for construction areas.
Environmental protections.
Provide personnel support facilities:
1.
2.
3.
Contractor’s field office.
Sanitary facilities.
Drinking water.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
A.
Heating Units: Tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to
type of fuel being consumed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01500
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 - 2
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of
products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard
warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Division 1 Section “Project Procedures”: Requirements for Contractor’s Construction
Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and Contract modifications.
Division 1 Section "Allowances": Requirements for products selected under an
allowance.
Division 1 Section "Alternates": Requirements for products selected under an alternate.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures": Requirements for submitting warranties for
contract closeout.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
D.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for
a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
E.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for
Owner.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
l.
2.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
(15) fifteen days of receipt of request, or (7) seven days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
B.
1.5
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.
2.
1.6
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
9.
B.
1.7
Protect stored products from damage.
Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document
using appropriate form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or
equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
B.
Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1.
Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a
single product and manufacturer, provide the product named.
2.
Manufacturer/Source:
Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by
the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.
3.
Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a
list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that
complies with requirements.
4.
Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers"
introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers
listed that complies with requirements.
5.
Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available
Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of
the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with
provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed
product.
Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by
one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements.
Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of
an unnamed product.
Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that
size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product
or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable
product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product
Substitutions" Article.
Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled
"Basis-of-Design Product[s]" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of
manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by
one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes,
profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of
an unnamed product.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and
matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed
product matches satisfactorily.
a.
If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and
complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the
Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 5
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
10.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and
manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements.
a.
b.
11.
2.2
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture
from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in
Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for
processing such selections.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within (60) sixty days
following commencement of the project. Requests received after that time may be considered or
rejected at discretion of Architect.
B.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to
other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 6
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01600
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 7
SECTION 01731
CUTTING AND PATCHING
SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the
building for alterations.
Division 1 Section “Protecting Existing Construction”: Requirements for protecting
existing construction, finished surfaces, furniture and equipment during construction and
demolition operations.
Division 9 Section “Paints and Coatings”: Requirements for painting areas of existing
construction
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated
construction.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
a.
1.2
Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations.
Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations
applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other Work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide cutting and patching work to properly complete the work of the project, complying with
requirements for:
1.
Mechanical/electrical systems
2.
Visual requirements, including detailing and tolerances
3.
Operational and safety limitations
4.
Fire resistance ratings
5.
Inspections, preparation and performance
6.
Cleaning
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1
SECTION 01731
CUTTING AND PATCHING
B.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
C.
Do not cut and patch in a manner that would result in a failure of the work to perform as
intended, decreased energy performance, increased maintenance, decreased operational life, or
decreased safety.
D.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
1.4
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
B.
Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1.
2.
3.2
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 2
SECTION 01731
CUTTING AND PATCHING
B.
Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D.
Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or
abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to minimize interruption of services to occupied
areas.
E.
Clean work area and areas affected by cutting and patching operations immediately after work
is completed.
3.3
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections of these Specifications.
1.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3
SECTION 01731
CUTTING AND PATCHING
2.
3.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence
of patching and refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
4.
5.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint
coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weather-tight condition.
END OF SECTION 01731
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 4
SECTION 01732
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes selective demolition as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Work of prior separate contract:
1.
C.
If materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, notify Owner’s
representative, who will arrange for removal under separate contract.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
None.
Asbestos and hazardous materials demolition or removal work is not part of this Contract.
1.
D.
Selective demolition of interior partitions, systems, building components and finish
materials designated to be removed and as required to accommodate new construction
Protection of portions of buildings adjacent to or affected by selective demolition
Removal of abandoned utilities and wiring systems
Notification to Owner’s representative of schedule for shutting off utilities serving
occupied areas.
Pollution control during selective demolition, including noise control.
Removal and legal disposal of materials.
Removal and storage of existing interior doors for Owner’s disposal.
Removal of existing ceiling tiles and suspended ceiling grid.
Removal of existing doors to the rooms associated with this project for re-use by Owner.
Contractor to carefully remove and store doors under Owner’s direction.
Division 1 Section "Summary" for use of the premises and phasing requirements.
Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and
environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for
selective demolition operations.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures": Record document requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Remove, clean and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify
contents of containers and deliver to the University’s designated storage area.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 1
SECTION 01732
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated, clean, service and otherwise prepare them for
reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in locations indicated following
requirements specified for new construction.
D.
Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
demoltion. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable protected storage
location during demolition, then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Immediate areas of work will not be occupied during selective demolition. Adjacent areas may
be occupied by the public, including children.
B.
Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with the University’s on-site operations.
C.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1.
D.
Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without
written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 2
SECTION 01732
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A.
Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate occupied area from fumes and noise.
1.
3.2
Maintain means of egress and access as required by authorities having jurisdiction and as
acceptable to the University.
DEMOLITION
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain [fire watch and] portable firesuppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing
before selective demolition operations began.
B.
Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting
elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during
selective demolition operations.
C.
Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 3
SECTION 01732
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition, cleaned and reinstalled in their original
locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
F.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw
cuts.
G.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
H.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
I.
Resilient Floor Coverings:
Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum.
1.
3.3
Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the
methods recommended by RFCI.
PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A.
General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition
operations.
B.
Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C.
Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for
new materials.
1.
Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with
an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
D.
Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
E.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into
another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of
uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 4
SECTION 01732
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
1.
2.
3.
F.
3.4
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply
with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats
over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch.
Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity
of installation.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to
accumulate on-site.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.5
SCHEDULE
A.
Items for protection during Demolition and Construction:
1.
2.
B.
Site improvements adjacent to construction access routes
Adjacent construction
Items to be Removed and Disposed:
1.
2.
Items indicated on Drawings
Other items as necessary to accommodate new construction indicated
END OF SECTION 01732
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 5
SECTION 01760
PROTECTING EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes requirements for temporary measures and procedures for protecting
existing construction, finished surfaces, furniture and equipment during construction and
demolition operations.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Immediate areas of work will be occupied during demolition and construction.
B.
Arrange schedule for protection, demolition, construction, and cleanup to minimize interference
with tenants’ use of resident rooms and other areas.
C.
Refer to contract general provisions for other requirements including, but not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Scheduling work in occupied areas.
Obtaining approval of Owner’s representative before entering occupied areas to proceed
with work.
Progress cleaning and removal of trash and debris.
Corrective work and restoring damaged elements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PROTECTION MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide clean materials suitable for use intended, that will not scratch, puncture, or
leave residue on items or surfaces being protected.
B.
Panels: Provide rigid panel products for protection of flat surfaces such as floors and walls.
Provide means for securing panels in place without damaging finished surfaces, and to prevent
tripping hazards and other dangerous conditions.
C.
Tarpaulins: Suitable sheet materials free of dust, paint and residue that might be released to
protected items or surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROTECTING EXISTING CONSTRUCTION 01760 - 1
SECTION 01760
PROTECTING EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
A.
Erect and maintain temporary protection and enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration, to
separate occupied areas from fumes and noise, and to prevent damage or soiling of existing
finishes, furnishings and equipment.
1.
2.
Arrange temporary protection to permit access and use of resident rooms by tenants.
Maintain means of egress and access as required by authorities having jurisdiction and as
acceptable to the University.
B.
Do not damage building elements, finishes, improvements and furnishings indicated to remain.
C.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise demolition and construction operations to assure that no part of
the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
END OF SECTION 01760
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROTECTING EXISTING CONSTRUCTION 01760 - 2
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Inspection procedures.
Project Record Documents.
Operation and maintenance manuals.
Warranties.
Instruction of Owner's personnel.
Final cleaning.
Division 1 Section "Summary" for requirements for Applications for Payment for
Substantial and Final Completion.
Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final
Completion construction photographs and negatives.
Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion
construction photographs and negatives.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for progress cleaning of Project site.
Division 1 Section "Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for products of those Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect and Project Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor
of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion
after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.4
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property
surveys, and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect and Project Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1.
1.5
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Preparation: Submit (3) three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.6
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents
for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1.
Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are
marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
3.
4.
5.
C.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.
3.
1.7
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where applicable.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to
indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated
in Product Data.
1.
E.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications, where
applicable.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual
performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for
continued use and reference.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble (3) three complete sets of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation
and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as
follows:
1.
Operation Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Emergency instructions and procedures.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend
operations.
Description of controls and sequence of operations.
Piping diagrams.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 4
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
2.
Maintenance Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
1.8
Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
Maintenance procedures.
Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
Maintenance record forms.
Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
Copies of maintenance service agreements.
Copies of warranties and bonds.
Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets.
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within (15) fifteen days of completion
of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 ½” x 11” paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 5
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Operation and Maintenance Instructions: For equipment that requires regular maintenance,
arrange for manufacturer’s representative to meet with University personnel to provide
instruction in proper operation and maintenance.
1.
Include detailed review of the following items
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Demonstrate the following procedures:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.2
Maintenance manuals
Spare parts and materials
Tools
Lubricants
Fuels
Identification systems
Control sequences
Cleaning
Warranties
Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Startup
Shutdown
Emergency operations
Noise and vibration adjustments
Safety procedures
Economy and efficiency adjustments
Effective energy utilization
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 6
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1)
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
C.
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 7
SECTION 01781
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1.
B.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures and
maintenance manual requirements.
2.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents
of products in those Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
Number of Copies: Submit (1) one set of marked-up Record Prints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 1
SECTION 01781
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
2.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
2.
Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
Identification: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
Depths of foundations below first floor.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
Changes made following Architect's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
Project name.
Date.
Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 2
SECTION 01781
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's] reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01781
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 3
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Suspended items, including projection screens and other audio-visual equipment.
Other applications not specified elsewhere.
Division 9Section "Paints and Coatings”: Field painting metal fabrications.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
1.4
Unistrut assemblies.
Acoustical ceiling grid assemblies.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products from acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers.
Deliver, handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.:
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
2.
field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2.4
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold formed steel tubing
Uncoated Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611 or A 570
Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 or A569
Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30
Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510
Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal
Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS Specifications
Zinc-Coating: Hot dip galvanized coating for metals in exterior walls
FASTENERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92
Wood Screws: Flat headed carbon steel, FS FF-S-111
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.5
Plain Washers: Round carbon steel, FS FF-S-92
Drilled-in Expansion Anchors: FS FF-S-325
Toggle Bolts: Tumble wing type, FS FF-B-588
Lock Washers: Spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84
Zinc Coating: Fasteners in exterior walls.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
Interior Anchoring Cement: Hydraulic expansion cement
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79: FS TT-P-625
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20
Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer
for interior and exterior applications: CE CRD-C621
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
H.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
1.
2.7
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch
embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24
inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,
hangers, and similar items.
1.
2.
Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.
C.
Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with
attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to
receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop
Drawings.
D.
Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated.
Drill girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated.
Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24
inches o.c.
Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel
baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection
bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch baseplates with four 5/8-inch anchor bolts
and 1/4-inch top plates.
F.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
G.
Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
2.8
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5
SECTION 06105
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Wood grounds, nailers and blocking.
Backing panels.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Submit for approval product data as requested in the Construction Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers
B.
Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around
stacks and under temporary coverings.
C.
Lumber Standards and Grade Stamps: U.S. Product Standard PS20, American Softwood
Lumber Standard and inspection agency grade stamps
D.
Construction Panel Standards: PS 1, U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial
Plywood; APA PRP-108
E.
Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2 for lumber and AWPA C9 for plywood; waterborne
pressure treatment. Provide for wood in contact with concrete and masonry.
F.
Fire-Retardant Treatment: AWPA C20 for lumber and AWPA C27 for plywood; non-corrosive
type. Provide at building interior where required by code..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 1
SECTION 06105
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
A.
Miscellaneous Lumber:.
1.
2.
B.
Construction Panels:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Moisture Content: 19 Percent.
Grade: Standard grade light framing.
Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than 3/4 inch
Edge Detail: Square
Plywood Backing Panels: APA C-D Plugged Exposure 1 with exterior glue, fire-retardant
treated.
Auxiliary Materials:
1.
2.
Fasteners: Non-corrosive, suitable for load and exposure. Drywall screws are not
acceptable
Glue: Aliphatic- or Phenolic-resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general
carpentry use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Condition carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation, for a minimum of 24 hours
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,
nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
C.
Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
D.
Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized
standards.
E.
Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
F.
Use fasteners of appropriate type and length.
splitting wood.
G.
Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where miscellaneous carpentry is in area of high
relative humidity
Predrill members when necessary to avoid
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 2
SECTION 06105
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
H.
Plywood: Comply with recommendations of APA Design and Construction Guide – Residential
and Commercial.
I.
Restore damaged components. Protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION 06105
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 3
SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Interior standing and running trim.
Plastic-laminate countertops.
Interior ornamental work.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before
woodwork installation.
Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors."
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For solid-surfacing material and finishing materials and processes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
C.
Samples for Verification: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
Lumber with or for transparent finish, 5 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on
1 side and 1 edge.
Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparentfinished woodwork.
Wood-veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each
species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1
SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
4.
5.
6.
Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches for each type, color, pattern, and
surface finish.
Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square.
Corner pieces as follows:
a.
Miter joints for standing trim.
D.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
E.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to
that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and
other requirements.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified
in "Project Conditions" Article.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2
SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Birch and Birch Veneer. Plain sliced and book
matched.
C.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue.
Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturer:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure
decorative laminates by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a
precoated finish.
1.
2.
2.2
Formica Corporation.
Laminart.
Pioneer Plastics Corp.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
Corian; DuPont Polymers.
b.
Surell; Formica Corporation.
c.
Gibraltar; Wilsonart International, Div. of Premark International, Inc.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3
SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to
less than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kilndried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
2.3
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Premium grade interior woodwork complying with the
referenced quality standard.
B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
C.
Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
D.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
indicated for the following:
E.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
2.4
Ease edges to radius
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
B.
Grade: Premium.
C.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D.
Wood Species and Cut: Birch and Birch Veneer, plain sawn and book matched
1.
2.5
Provide split species on trim that face areas with different wood species, matching each
face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative
laminate countertops.
B.
Quality Standard: Comply with WIC Section 16.
C.
Grade: Premium.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4
SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
D.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
E.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
F.
2.6
Match color, pattern, and finish as indicated by manufacturer's designations for these
characteristics.
Edge Treatment: Lumber edge for transparent finish matching wood species and cut on trim.
SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with WIC Section 17D.
B.
Grade: Premium.
C.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch .
D.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solidsurfacing material complying with the following requirements:
1.
E.
2.7
Match color, pattern, and finish as indicated by manufacturer's designations for these
characteristics.
Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for
adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
General: Shop finish transparent finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as
specified in this Section. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for finishing opaque finished
architectural woodwork.
C.
Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1.
D.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
overlay.
Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system,
staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
1.
Grade: Premium
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5
SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
WIC Finish System #3: Polyurethane.
Staining: Natural Finish
Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from closedgrain wood before staining and finishing.
Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to
open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
a.
7.
Apply vinyl wash coat sealer after staining and before filling.
Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before
installation.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
B.
Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with WIC Section 26 for the same grade
specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
E.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails [or finishing screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush
with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
F.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base, if finished.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6
SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
2.
G.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.3
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation
from a straight line.
Calk space between counter and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified
finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only
sealer/prime coats were applied in shop.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06402
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 7
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for foam-plastic board sheathing over wood
framing.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies” for installation in metal-framed
assemblies of insulation specified by reference to this Section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for insulation products.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Cavity wall insulation.
Concealed building insulation.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Glass-Fiber Insulation:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
CertainTeed Corporation.
Johns Manville Corporation.
Owens Corning.
INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1.
B.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and IB; with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; and of the
following properties:
1.
C.
2.3
Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's
standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
Nominal density of 2.25 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at
75 deg F
Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
characteristics.
INSULATION FASTENERS
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors:
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
a.
b.
c.
C.
AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.
Eckel Industries of Canada Limited; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners.
Gemco; Spindle Type.
Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of
holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer
in place; and complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.105 inch in diameter, length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
3.4
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
D.
Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
E.
Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C.
Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.5
Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more
than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of
metal studs.
Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.
Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of
approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4
SECTION 07841
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes firestopping at all penetrations in adjoining spaces beside, above and
below the construction area, including the following locations::
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor construction.
Penetrations through fire-resistance rated walls and partitions.
Sealant joints in through fire-resistance rated construction.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants": Non-fire-resistive joint sealants.
Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.
Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Submit for approval product data and test reports.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as
determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating
of constructions penetrated.
B.
T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems
with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems
protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable
floor areas:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings.
Penetrating items larger than 4-inch-diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall crosssectional area.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions
both during and after construction.
1.
For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moistureresistant through-penetration firestop systems.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1
SECTION 07841
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
2.
3.
For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to
possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads
involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems
not requiring removal of insulation.
D.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread
ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
E.
Information on Drawings referring to specific design designations of Firestop systems is
intended to establish requirements based on conditions expected. Any changes in conditions and
designated systems require Architect’s prior approval. Submit documentation showing that
performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds that of the systems they would replace
and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through-penetration
firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Comply with governing codes and regulations.
C.
Fire Performance: ASTM E 119, ASTM E 814, and local regulations
D.
Sequencing and Scheduling: Do not cover up firestopping installations that will become
concealed behind other construction until authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have
examined each installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
3M Fire Protection Products.
Tremco.
United States Gypsum Company.
Pecora Corp
Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
systems designed for use required, of one or more of the following types:
1.
2.
3.
Endothermic, latex sealant and compounds
Intumescent latex sealant, putty and wrap strips
Job mixed vinyl compound
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 2
SECTION 07841
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
4.
5.
6.
C.
Fire-Resistive Elastomeric Joint Sealants:
1.
D.
Mortar
Pillow/bags
Silicone foams and sealants.
Single-component, nonsag, urethane sealant
Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to comply with “System Performance Requirements” article in Part 1. Use only
components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing
and inspecting agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories may
include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.
Temporary forming materials
Substrate primers
Collars
Steel sleeves
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Review extent of work with authorities having jurisdiction and obtain approval of installation
thicknesses and methods
B.
Sequence work to avoid need for removal of firestopping by work of other trades
C.
Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Securely anchor insulation
with safing clips. Install firestops without gaps or voids
D.
Protect, inspect and repair work until final acceptance
END OF SECTION 07841
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 3
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes joint sealants for the at interior vertical and horizontal joints
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 7 Section "Firestopping " for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated construction.
2.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum
board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers.
Deliver, handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Latex Joint Sealants.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Acoustical Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturers: USG, Pecora, Tremco or approved equal
Type and Application: Synthetic rubber acoustical sealant for conealed joints
Type and Application: Paintable, non-staining latex acoustical sealant for exposed joints
Silicone Elastomeric Joint Sealants:
1.
2.
D.
Manufacturers: Dow Corning, Pecora, Tremco or approved equal
Type: Silicone emulsion, ASTM C 834, and ASTM C 920; paintable
Application: Interior joints in vertical and overhead surfaces with limited movement
Manufacturers: Dow Corning, General Electric, Pecora, Tremco or approved equal
Type and Application: One part mildew resistant silicone sealant, ASTM C 920 for
sanitary applications, interior use.
Auxiliary Materials:
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Plastic foam joint fillers
Bond breaker tape
Cleaners
Masking tape
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Examine substrate; report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Remove contaminants that might
interfere with sealanat adhesion. Beginning work indicates acceptance of substrates.
B.
Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer.
C.
Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing
joint seal.
D.
Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to
produce shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
1.
Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and
replace with dry material.
E.
Provide sealants in colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of available
colors.
F.
Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved
submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with
uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
G.
Depth shall equal width up to ½ inch wide; depth shall equal ½ width for joints over ½ inch
wide.
H.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform
beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of
sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
1.
I.
Provide concave joint configuration unless otherwise indicated.
Cure and protect sealants as directed by manufacturers. Replace or restore damaged sealants.
Clean adjacent surfaces to remove spillage.
END OF SECTION 07920
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
Factory finishing flush wood doors.
Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for requirements for veneers from
the same flitches for both flush wood doors and wood paneling.
Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for
openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1.
Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
2.
Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
3.
Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.
C.
Samples for Verification:
1.
1.4
Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for
each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of
three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished
work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated”
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
1.
C.
1.5
Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project
indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and
Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in
materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a
3-inch span.
1.
2.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair
or replacement of defective doors.
Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial
Completion:
a.
Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Flush Wood Doors:
a.
b.
c.
Buell Door Company.
Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc.
Marlite.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
d.
e.
f.
2.2
Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
VT Industries Inc.
Weyerhaeuser Company.
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Doors for Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces
Species and Cut: White birch, plain sliced
Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
Stiles: Same species as faces.
SOLID-CORE DOORS
A.
Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:
1.
2.
B.
Fire-Rated Doors:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Core: Either glued or nonglued block or structural composite lumber.
Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or
manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating
indicated.
Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screwholding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to
eliminate through-bolting hardware.
Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge
construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer
stile matching face veneer.
LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A.
2.5
Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard woodveneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in
doors of fire rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening
size and fire rating indicated.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1.
C.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of
referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.
1.
2.6
Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" for factory
finishing.
B.
Finish doors at factory.
C.
Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors
indicated to receive opaque finish.
D.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
Grade: Premium.
Finish: AWI System .
Sheen: Match Existing Sheen.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
C.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for firerated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1.
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold
is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.
a.
2.
D.
3.3
Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08211
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 5
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
08710
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions
and Division 1 Specifications, apply to the Section.
B. This Section describes the scope and intention for the door hardware. All door hardware is to by
Best Locking Systems in accordance with University of Pennsylvania standards.
C. This section covers the following
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Hinges
Key control system
Lock cylinders and keys
Lock and latch sets
Bolts
Exit devices
Pus/pull units
Closers
Overhead holders
Miscellaneous door control devices
Door trim units
Protection devices
Sound stripping for interior doors
Astragals or meeting seals for pairs of doors.
Thresholds
D. The Work includes complete replacement for existing hardware to comply with ADA
requirements.
E. Related Sections:
1. Section 08211, Flush Wood Doors
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A. Product data including manufacturers technical product data for each item of door hardware,
installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish and other information
necessary to show compliance with requirements.
B.
Final hardware schedule to be coordinated with doors, frames and related work to ensure
proper thickness, hand, function and finish of door hardware.
1.
Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on intent of hardware indicated, organize
schedule into “hardware sets” indicating complete designations of every item required
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
2.
3.
C.
1.3
for each door or opening. Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes.
h. Keying information.
i. Fire rated assemblies shall be listed separately from non-rated.
Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date where particular
acceptance hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in
the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop
drawings of other work affected by door hardware and other information essential to the
coordinated review of schedule.
Keying schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner’s
final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.
Templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation
of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Accessibility: Comply with applicable requirements of the American with Disabilities Act
(ADA), together with ANSI A117.1 “Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities
Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.”
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges,
closers, etc.) from a single source manufacturer.
C. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing
facilities in the Project’s vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for
supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type and quality to that for this indicated Project
and that employs an experienced certified architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is
available to Owner, Architect and Contractor at reasonable times during the course of the
Work, for consultation.
1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final
instruction in writing.
D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA
Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of
door hardware that are listed and identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM or
other testing and inspection organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use
on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and
frame labels.
1.4
PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule.
Include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 2
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with
appropriate hardware set number to match numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or
more identical sets may be packed in the same container.
C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware
installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.
D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware promptly to place of installation (shop or Project
site).
E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed.
Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so
that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after
installation.
1.5
MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance and
removal and replacement of door hardware. .
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Butts and Hinges
a.
b.
c.
2
Pivots
a.
b.
c.
3.
Dor-O-Matic
LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group
Glynn Johnson Corp.
Cylinders and Locks
a.
4.
Bommer Industries
McKinney Products CO.
Stanley Hardware Div. Stanley Works
Best Access Products (NO SUBSTITUTIONS)
Bolt:
a.
b.
c.
Burns Manufacturing.
Door Controls International
H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
5. Exit Devices
a.
5.
Push/Pull Units
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
Burns Manufacturing.
NT Quality Hardware
H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company
Rockwood
Door Striping, Seals, Astragals and Thresholds
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Burns Manufacturing.
NT Quality Hardware.
H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company
Door Controls International
Kick Plates:
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
Door Controls International.
Glynn-Johnson Corp.
H.B. Ives.
Door Trim Units
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group
Door Control Devices
a.
b.
c.
8.
Burns Manufacturing.
Rockwood
NT Quality Hardware.
H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company
Overhead Closers
a.
7.
Precision Hardware Inc.
Safe T Metal Company Inc
National Guard Products, Inc.
Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Reese Enterprises Inc.
SCHEDULED HARDWARE
B.
Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each
type of finish hardware are to be confirmed with Architect and Owner. Contractor to provide
certified hardware schedule based on outline functional requirements for hardware sets as
indicated herein. Products will be identified by using hardware designation numbers of the
following:
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 4
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
2.3
1.
Manufacturers Product Designations: The product designation and name of one
manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing
minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one
manufacturer is specified under the Article “Manufacturers” in Part 2 for each hardware
type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with
requirements.
2.
ANSI/BHMA designations are used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe
hardware items or to define quality or function, are derived from the following standards.
Provide products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere
in the Section:
a.
Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1
b.
Bored and Pre-assembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2
c.
Exit Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.3
d.
Door Controls: ANSI/BHMA A156.4
e.
Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6
f.
Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7
g.
Door Controls-Overhead Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8
h.
Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.13
i.
Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15
j.
Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16
k.
Material and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using
manufacturer’s standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser
(commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish
designations indicated.
B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates generally
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for
self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
C. Furnish screws for installation for each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except
as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match
hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as
closely as possible including “prepared for paint” surfaces to receive painted finish.
D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to
extend no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use
thru-blots for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work
unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware
securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for
each thru-bolt or use sex screws fasteners.
2.4
HINGES
A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood frames,
provide only template-produced units.
B. Screw: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
1.
2.
3.
C.
Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
2.5
For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes
For doors and frames install wood screws.
Install screw heads to match surface of hinges and pivots.
Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins.
Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins.
Interior Doors: Non rising pins.
Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.
Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges required for adequate performance of door
operation, size, weight and material, but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches
(2250 mm) or less in height and one additional hinges for each 30 inches of additional height.
LOCK CYLIDERS AND KEYING
A. Review the keying system with Owner and provide the type required (master, grand-master or
great-grand-master), key to existing Best System.
B. Equip locks with manufacturer’s special 7-pin interchangeably core system.
C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
D. Comply with Owner’s instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise indicated,
provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a
group of related locks.
E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
F. Key Quality: Furnish 2 change keys for each lock, 6 master keys, 6 control keys.
1.
2.
2.7
Deliver keys to Owner
Provide temporary cores during construction.
LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock blot with
curved lip extended to protect frames, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Provide flat lip strikes for locks with 3-piece, anti-friction latch bolts as recommended by
manufacturer.
Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction
provides non-recessed strike for blot.
Provide roller type strikes where recommended by manufacturer of the latch and lock
units.
Lock Throw: Provide ¾-inch (16mm) minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with
UL requirements for throw of blots and latch blots on rated fire openings.
1.
Provide 9/16-inch (16mm) minimum throw of latch for bored and pre-assembled types of
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
locks and ¾-inch (19mm) minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1-inch
(25mm) minimum throw for all dead bolts.
C.
Cylindrical Locks: Best Lock, Grade 1, 35 Series,
D
Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of ½-inch (13mm) diameter rods of brass, bronze or stainless steel
with minimum 12-inch (300mm) long rod for doors up to 84 inches (2100mm) in height.
2.8
PUSH/PULL UNITS
C.
2.9
Concealed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s special concealed fasteners system for
installation, thru-bolted for matched pairs, but not for single trim.
CLOSERS AND DOORS CONTROL DEVICES
A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for
size of door control device depending on size of door, exposure to weather and anticipated
frequency of use.
1.
2.
2.10
Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than
recommended for use with standard arms.
Provide extra heavy duty parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise
indicated.
B.
Access-Free manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be
accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI
A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing.
C.
All door closers to be equipped with “fire-fluid” as the hydraulic fluid.
D.
Closer to provide silent closing operation for door.
DOOR TRIM UNITS
A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of
either machine screw or self-tapping screws.
B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in standard lengths or to match height
of protection plates.
C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches (38mm) less than door width on hinge
side and not more than ½ (13mm) less than door width on the pull side by height indicated.
1.
2.
2.11
Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (US 18 gage) (1.3mm)
Metal Plates: To match existing
WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and light or sound seals on
interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior
applications and elsewhere as indicated.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metal retainer
strips, surface applied unless shown as mortised or semi mortised.
2.12
THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and
profile required for application.
2.13
HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer’s standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets
(or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).
B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match existing.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer’s standards, but in no case less than
specified by referenced standards for applicable units of hardware.
D. Provide lacquer coating on all hardware finishes of brass, bronze and aluminum, except as
otherwise indicated. The suffix “-NL” is used with standard finish designations to indicate “no
lacquer.”
E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the
industry–recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.
F. Provide US32D/630 where indicated in hardware sets.
G. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metal retainer
strips, surface applied unless shown as mortised or semi mortised.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as
specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise
directed by Architect.
1. “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” by
the Door and Hardware Institute.
2. “Recommended Locations for Builders for Custom Steel Doors and Frames” by the Door
and Hardware Institute.
3. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, “Hardware Locations for Wood Doors.”
B.
C.
Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces
that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing completed on the substrates
involved.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 8
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
E. Weather-stripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations to
the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.2
ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted freely and smoothly or as intended
for the application made.
1. Where the door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy
of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or
occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area.
Operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
B.
C.
3.3
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
Instruct Owner’s personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and
hardware finishes.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide hardware for each door in accordance with the outlined functional
requirements of this Section and as follows.
Door Type A (applies to all new Williams Hall classroom doors indicated on drawings):
Solid Core, book matched plain sliced Birch Veneer, 1Hr rated, flush wood door with vision
panel in existing or new metal frames. Provide the following hardware set:
Hinges:
3 Each. Stanley Full Mortise Bearing Hinges
Model: FBB168 4.5”x4.5” NRP Hinges
Finish: 652
Lockset:
Best (NO SUBSTITUTIONS)
Model: 93K-7-R-15-D-S3
Finish: 626
Door Closer: 1 Each. LCN 4010 Series, pull side mounting closer with silent action
Arm: #4010-3077
Finish: 689
Kick Plate:
2 Each. Rockwood stainless steel kickplate
Model: K1050 – 8”x34”x.050”
Finish: 630
Threshold:
2” rubber threshold
Silencer:
1 Each. Rockwood
Model: 608
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 9
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
Door Type B (applies to all new DRL classroom doors indicated on drawings):
Solid Core, 1Hr rated, paint grade flush wood door with vision panel in existing or new metal
frames. Provide the following hardware set:
Hinges:
3 Each. Stanley Full Mortise Bearing Hinges
Model: FBB168 4.5”x4.5” NRP Hinges
Finish: 652
Lockset:
Best (NO SUBSTITUTIONS)
Model: 93K-7-R-15-D-S3
Finish: 626
Door Closer: 1 Each. LCN 4010 Series, pull side mounting closer with silent action
Arm: #4010-3077
Finish: 689
Kick Plate:
2 Each. Rockwood stainless steel kickplate
Model: K1050 – 8”x46”x.050”
Finish: 630
Threshold:
2” rubber threshold
Silencer:
1 Each. Rockwood
Model: 608
Door Type Existing (applies to all existing DRL classroom doors indicated on drawings):
Provide the following hardware set:
Hinges:
Existing to remain
Lockset:
Existing to remain
Door Closer: 1 Each. LCN 4010 Series, pull side mounting closer with silent action
Arm: #4010-3077
Finish: 689
Kick Plate:
2 Each. Rockwood stainless steel kickplate
Model: K1050 – 8”x46”x.050”
Finish: 630
Threshold:
2” rubber threshold
Silencer:
1 Each. Rockwood
Model: 608
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 10
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Interior doors with non fire-resistive glazing
Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors."
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Submit for approval samples, product data, warranty, test reports and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers.
Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part
1201 for Category II materials.
C.
Testing: Glazing performance
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Glazing:
1.
2.
Heat-treated glass products: Tempered glass, ASTM C 1048
Primary Glass Products: Clear float glass, ASTM C 1036
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GLAZING 08800 - 1
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
B.
Glazing Accessories:
1.
2.
C.
Glazing sealants for glazing.
Setting blocks and spacers to suit conditions.
Fabrication: Fabricate glazing products with edge and face clearances, edge and surface
conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced
glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Inspect framing and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing
B.
Comply with FGMA “Glazing Manual” and manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
Use manufacturer’s recommended spacers, blocks, primers, sealers, gaskets, and accessories
C.
Remove and replace damaged glass and glazing. Wash, polish and protect all glass supplied
under this section
END OF SECTION 08800
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GLAZING 08800 - 2
SECTION 09210
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
SECTION 09210 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Requirements of this section apply to walls, bulkheads and ceilings
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Nonstructural steel framing and furring.
Gypsum plasterwork on plaster bases.
Solid-plaster partitions.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that support lath and
gypsum plaster.
2.
Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders
included in gypsum plaster assemblies.
3.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for acoustical sealants included in gypsum plaster
assemblies.
4.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plaster" for gypsum-based veneer plaster applied on
gypsum base for veneer plaster, unit masonry, and monolithic concrete.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with GA-201, GA -Application of Gypsum Base for Gypsum
Veneer Plasters and Application of Gypsum Veneer Plaster, GA-600
B.
Maintain one copy of each on site..
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five
years documented experience.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09210 - 1
SECTION 09210
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to ANSI/ASTM E119 and applicable code for fire rated assemblies as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL or FM
Fire Rated Ceilings, Bulkheads and Interior Soffits: Listed assembly by UL or FM
Fire Rated Structural Column Framing: Listed assembly by UL or FM
Fire Rated Structural Beam Framing: Listed assembly by UL or FM
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with ASTM C 842 requirements or gypsum plaster manufacturer's written
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Room Temperatures: Maintain temperatures at not less than 55 deg F or greater than 80 deg F
for at least 7 days before application of gypsum plaster, continuously during application, and for
7 days after plaster has set, or until plaster has dried.
C.
Avoid conditions that result in gypsum plaster drying out too quickly.
1.
2.
3.
Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster.
Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produces
normal drying conditions.
Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces
during plaster application and until plaster is dry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTER BASE MATERIALS
A.
One coat plaster system: Uni-Kal 3000 System, ASTM C588 and gypsum type as manufactured
by National Gypsum Company or equal:
B.
Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C442
C.
Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that can affect plaster.
D.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C631
2.2
FINISHING PLASTER
A.
Gypsum/Lime Putty Type: ASTM C28; mixture of gauging plaster and lime
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09210 - 2
SECTION 09210
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
B.
Keene’s Cement/Lime Putty Type: ASTM C61 and C206; mixture of Keene’s cement and lime
C.
Sand Float Type: ASTM C28 and C35; prepared mixture of gypsum plaster and sand
D.
Sand Float Type: ASTM C61 and C35; prepared mixture of Keene’s cement/lime putty and
sand
E.
Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that can affect plaster
2.3
STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS
A.
Suspended Furring:
1.
2.
Main Runners (Carrying Channels): Cold-rolled channels,1-1/2 inches deep.
Cross Furring: Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch deep.
B.
Direct Furring: Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch deep.
C.
Tie Wire:
1.
2.
For tying main runners directly to beams or joists (where wire hangers are used between
beams or joists), use double loop of 0.1205-inch- diameter wire.
For tying furring directly to concrete structure without main runners, use 0.0800-inchdiameter wire.
D.
Wire Hangers: 0.162-inch- diameter wire.
E.
Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel, ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized.
F.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete: Power-actuated fasteners that use explosive powder, gas
combustion, or compressed air or other gas to embed fasteners in concrete and that are suitable
for application indicated. Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other
devices for attaching hangers. Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to (10) ten
times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2.4
STEEL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS
A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
B.
Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled channels, 1-1/2 inches deep.
1.
C.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating .
Minimum Base Metal Thickness 0.0179 inch
Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.
Vertical Furring:
1.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09210 - 3
SECTION 09210
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
a.
b.
c.
2.
Furring Channels: Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch deep] .
a.
2.5
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating,
unless otherwise indicated.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Depth: 7/8 inch .
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type fabricated from steel sheet
with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch.
EXPANDED-METAL LATH
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO).
2.
Dale/Incor.
3.
MarinoWare; Division of Ware Industries, Inc.
4.
Phillips Manufacturing Co.
5.
Unimast, Inc.
6.
Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.
B.
Expanded-Metal Lath, General: ASTM C 847.
1.
C.
Finish: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring.
1.
Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. yd.
2.6
ACCESSORIES
1.
General: Comply with ASTM C 841 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting
plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B.
Bonding Compound: ASTM C 631.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required
by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths
required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed
threads.
D.
Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 841.
E.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09210 - 4
SECTION 09210
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
1.
F.
2.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt:
ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
unperforated.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.8
Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls:
1.
G.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:
assembly.
OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series, SC 175 Acoustical Sound Sealant Non-Flammable Latex.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone.
Tremco, Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
PLASTER MIXES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions for applications
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames
and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects
caused by plastering.
B.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09210 - 5
SECTION 09210
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
2.
3.3
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches o.c.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of plaster assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material
thickness to less than that required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect
remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design
designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations
from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
1.
2.
Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at
both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating
edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including
sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
C.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless
blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.
D.
Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting
construction with acoustical sealant.
3.4
INSTALLING NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 for applications indicated.
1.
B.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in plaster assemblies to
support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or
similar construction.
1.
C.
Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of items not addressed in ASTM C 841.
Comply with details indicated on Drawings and with plaster manufacturer's written
recommendations.
Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural
movement.
1.
2.
Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure.
Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. At
head of assemblies, install slip-type joints that avoid axial loading and that support
assembly laterally.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09210 - 6
SECTION 09210
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Frame both sides of joints independently.
E.
Soffits: Unless otherwise detailed on Drawings, install furred or suspended soffits to comply
with requirements for ceiling installation; install framed soffits to comply with requirements for
partition installation.
3.5
INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS
A.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Install hangers plumb and free of contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by
bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and
hangers to limit deflection to 1/360 of span while supporting ceiling loads.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and tying, either directly to structure or directly to
fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, in a manner that will not cause
them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Rod Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate and hanger, in a manner that will
not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Secure to fastener devices
that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Do not connect steel framing to or suspend it from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
B.
Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for ceilings so members are level to
within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between
parallel members.
C.
Install steel framing components for ceilings in sizes and spacings indicated but not less than
that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
Hanger Spacing: 48 inches o.c.
Main Runner (Carrying Channel) Spacing: For suspended ceilings, 36 inches o.c.
Cross-Furring Spacing: For suspended ceilings, 12 inches o.c.
Furring Spacing: For furred ceilings 12 inches o.c.
INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION FRAMING
A.
Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where plaster
assemblies abut other construction.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09210 - 7
SECTION 09210
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
B.
Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended
ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions
above ceiling.
C.
Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction.
D.
Frame door openings with two studs installed at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Support Spacing:
1.
2.
3.7
Install steel studs at 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Install vertical furring at 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
INSTALLING METAL LATH
A.
General: Install according to ASTM C 841.
B.
Expanded-Metal Lath:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.8
Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring diamond-mesh lath.
Solid-Plaster Partitions: Where supported by channel studs, install flat diamond-mesh
lath.
Studless Solid-Plaster Partitions: Install 3/8-inch rib lath.
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Install according to ASTM C 841.
B.
Cornerbeads: Install at external corners.
C.
Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plasterwork, except where plaster passes behind and is
concealed by other work and where metal screeds, bases, or frames act as casing beads.
D.
Control Joints: Install control joints with spacing between joints in either direction not
exceeding the following and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect
1.
2.
3.9
Partitions: 30 feet
Ceilings: 30 feet.
PLASTER APPLICATION
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 842.
1.
Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished
plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09210 - 8
SECTION 09210
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER
2.
3.
4.
Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with
base-coat plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is
indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor.
Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that
act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate
plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove
finish coat at junctures with metal.
Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
B.
Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases.
C.
Finish Coats:
1.
D.
Concealed Plaster:
1.
2.
3.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
Provide float finish.
Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings,
and equipment, apply finish coat.
Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar
locations, finish coat may be omitted.
Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and
similar finishes, finish coat may be omitted.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore
cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing
and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to
substrate has failed.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door
frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and
other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
END OF SECTION 09210
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER 09210 - 9
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry”: Wood nailers and concealed blocking for support
of wall-mounted items in gypsum board assemblies
Division 7 Section “Firestopping”: Firestopping systems and fire-resistance-rated joint
sealants
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
1.5
Interior walls and partitions.
Steel framing and furring systems to receive gypsum board.
Gypsum board screw-attached to steel framing and furring
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers.
Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
B.
Tolerances: Not more than 1/16 inch difference in true plane at joints between adjacent boards
before finishing. After finishing, joints shall not be visible. Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet
deviation from true plane, plumb, level and proper relation to adjacent surfaces in finished
work.
C.
Fire Resistance for Rated Assemblies: ASTM E 119
D.
Performance: Fire and structural performance meeting requirements of building code and local
authorities.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 1
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers of Gypsum Board: Domtar Gypsum, Georgia-Pacific Corp., National Gypsum
Co., United States Gypsum Co. or approved equal:
B.
Manufacturers of Steel Framing and Furring: Dale Industries, Dietrich Industries, Marino Ware,
National Gypsum Co., Unimast or approved equal
C.
Manufacturers of Grid Systems and Suspension Systems: Armstrong World Industries, Chicago
Metallic, USG Interiors or approved equal
D.
Steel Framing for Walls and Partitions:
1.
2.
3.
Protective Coating: Manufacturer’s standard corrosive-resistant coating
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40 hot-dip galvanized coating for framing members
attached to and within 10 feet of exterior walls
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C645 steel studs, 3-5/8 inch and 6 inch typical depths as
indicated.
a.
b.
Thickness: 0.027 inch, 22 gage, unless otherwise indicated or required by
referenced standards to support indicated loads within maximum deflections
specified.
Thickness: 0.0312 inch, 20 gage, for the following applications:
1)
4.
E.
Auxiliary Framing Components: Resilient furring channels, Z-furring members and noncorrosive fasteners
Steel Framing for Suspended and Furred Ceilings:
1.
2.
F.
For head runner, sill runner, jamb, and cripple studs at door and other
openings.
Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 0.0312 inch standard or resilient channels as indicated
with manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant coating.
Accessories: Hangers and inserts.
Gypsum Board:
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 2
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
1.
2.
G.
Trim Accessories:
1.
2.
H.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, regular and fire-rated types as required, 5/8 inch
typical thickness. Provide quiet rock type gypsum wall board within each project area
unless noted otherwise.
Joint Treatment: ASTM C 475 and ASTM C 840, 3 coat system, paper or fiberglass tape
Material: Metal trim
Types: Cornerbead, edge trim and control joints
Auxiliary Materials:
1.
Gypsum Board Screws, ASTM C 1002
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings
and that hangers will develop their full strength.
INSTALLATION
A.
Installation Tolerance for Steel Stud Walls: Install each steel framing and furring member so
that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of
adjacent framing.
B.
Installation Tolerances for Ceilings and Soffits: Install steel framing components for suspended
ceilings so that cross-furring or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet.
C.
Install gypsum board assemblies in compliance with ASTM C 840 and GA 216,
“Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board”. Install
gypsum board assemblies; true, plumb, level and in proper relation to adjacent surfaces.
D.
Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacing indicated.
E.
Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading
imposed by structural movement.
1.
Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 3
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
2.
Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure, except at floor.
F.
Extend partition framing full height to structural suppers or substrates above suspended ceilings.
Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetration
partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
G.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members.
Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring member as indicated.
H.
Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated or, in not indicated, at spacing
recommended by referenced standard and in locations acceptable to Architect, with space
between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum
panels.
I.
Provide fire-rated systems where indicated and where required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
J.
Provide acoustical sealant at both faces at top and bottom runner tracks, wall perimeters,
openings, and expansion and control joints.
K.
Install boards vertically. Do not allow butt-to-butt joints and joints that do not fall over framing
members.
L.
Where new partitions meet existing construction, remove existing cornerbeads to provide a
smooth transition.
M.
Install trim and 3-coat joint treatment in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations. Joint treatment is required at all fasteners and edges between boards. Fill all
surface defects. Sand between and after joint treatment coatings and leave ready for finish
painting or wall treatment.
END OF SECTION 09260
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 4
SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes acoustical lay-in panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
C.
1.3
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants": Acoustical Sealants
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and
ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1.
2.
1.4
Ceiling suspension members.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot .
Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch-long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers.
Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1
SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
B.
Performance: Fire and structural performance meeting requirements of building code and local
authorities. Acoustical performance based on project requirements
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with surface-burning
characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing
identical products per ASTM E 84, and the following:
1.
2.
D.
Flame-Spread Rating: 75 or less
Smoke-Developed Rating: 450 or less
Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system
components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components (if any), and partition
assemblies (if any)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers: Armstrong World Industries, USG Interiors or Approved Equal.
B.
Mineral Base Panels, Nodular, Cast or Molded Type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Direct-Hung Suspension Systems, Non-Fire-Resistance Rated
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Size: 2’x2’
Edge Detail: Square Edge
Pattern: Fine Fissured CE
Type and Finish: Factory finish, ASTM E 1264, Type III, Form 2
Equal to Armstrong #1729
Type: Narrow-face uncapped double web steel, slotted profile, intermediate duty
classification ASTM C 625
Suspension System Accessories: Attachment devices and hangers, ASTM C 635
Cap Material: Painted aluminum finish
High Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for “Coating
Classification for Severe Environment Performance” where high humidity finishes are
indicated
Auxiliary Materials:
1.
2.
3.
Edge molding and trim
Hold-down clips and impact clips
Concealed acoustical sealant
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2
SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install materials and suspension systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations, and ASTM C 636. Coordinate installation with location of mechanical and
electrical work to ensure proper locations
B.
Coordinate with locations and access required for items incorporated into gypsum board
assemblies, including metal panel ceilings, audio-visual systems and components, data and
communications systems, and other elements
C.
Level ceiling to within 1/8 inch in 10 feet in both directions. Scribe and cut panels to fit
accurately. Measure and layout to avoid less than half panel units
D.
For reveal-edge panels on suspensions system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in
firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
E.
For reveal-edge panels on suspensions system members with box shaped flanges, install panels
with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with
bottom face of runners
F.
Paint and cut edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces
using coating recommended for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer
G.
Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and in areas required by governing regulations; space
as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required
H.
Adjust, clean and touch-up all system components. Replace tiles that are marred or damaged
during construction
I.
Provide wrapped and labeled maintenance stock of new material equal to percent of ceiling
panels, tiles and suspension system installed.
END OF SECTION 09511
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3
SECTION 09680
CARPET
09680 CARPET
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes carpet and floor preparation
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 9 Section Resilient Flooring for resilient wall base and accessories installed
with carpet.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Submit for approval samples, product data, warranty, maintenance data, proposed seaming
layout, extra stock.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced
installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Performance: Fire performance meeting requirements of building code and local authorities.
1.
2.
3.
Surface Flammability. Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630
Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84
Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84
C.
Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24
hours, tested by calcium chloride moisture test per CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor temperatures
not less than 55 deg. F.
D.
Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: A pH range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable
water and pHydrion paper is applied
E.
Carpet Warranty: Submit written warranty executed by carpet manufacturer and Installer
agreeing to repair or replace carpet that does not meet requirements of that fails in materials or
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CARPET 09680 - 1
SECTION 09680
CARPET
workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to,
more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs and delamination.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A. Carpet Material: Provide carpet by Interface FLOR complying with the requirements indicated
below. Substitutions are not permitted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Carpet Material: Provide carpet by Interface FLOR complying with the requirements indicated
below. Substitutions are not permitted.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Style: The Classics Collection
Series: Silk Route Classics
Color: Kohl #9410
Backing: Glasbac
Layout: Monolithic
Auxiliary Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Style: The Classics Collection
Series: Libra Classics
Color: Equinox #101217
Backing: Glasbac
Layout: Monolithic
Edge Guards: Specified in “Resilient Floor” Section.
Adhesives, cements, and fasteners.
Concrete slab primer
Trowelable underlayments and patching compounds
Carpet Installation Method: TacTile Connector System
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with
requirements specified in this Section and those of the carpet manufacturer.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Comply with recommendations of Carpet and Rug Institute “Specifier’s Handbook”
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CARPET 09680 - 2
SECTION 09680
CARPET
B. Prepare surfaces and install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
approved submittals. Clean, patch and level substrate. Install materials in proper relation with
adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
C. .Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
E. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
F. Install edge guards and reducer strips as required; Clean and Protect.
G. Extra Stock: Provide wrapped and labeled maintenance stock of new material equal to 2 percent
of carpet installed, in full width pieces for each type and color.
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
CARPET 09680 - 3
SECTION 09720
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING
SECTION 09720 - VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for providing vinyl coated fabric wallcovering.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Section 16500 - Lighting: Permanent during installation
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Wall substrates
Section 09900 - Painting: Preparation and priming of substrate surfaces
REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D 751
Methods of Testing Coated Fabrics
F 793-93 Classification of Wallcoverings by Durability Characteristics.
E 84-91a Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
E 603-77 (1983) Guide for Room Fire Experiments
G 21-90 Recommended Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric
Materials to Fungi
D 1308-87 Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented
Organic Finishes.
B.
Chemicals Fabrics and Film Association (CFFA): CFFA-W-101-B Quality Standard for Vinyl
Coated Fabric Wallcovering..
C.
Federal Specifications (FedSpec):
1.
2.
CCC-T-191b Textile Test Methods.
CCC-W-408A Wallcovering, Vinyl Coated.
D.
Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL): UL 723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
E.
National Bureau of Standards Test Methods (NBS):
1.
2.
1.3
IR-82-2532.
IR-82-2634.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit manufacturers’ product data and installation instructions for each type of wallcovering,
adhesive, and accessory required
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING 09720 - 1
SECTION 09720
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING
1.
2.
Include data on physical properties, fire hazard classification, and fire detection
characteristics of wallcoverings
Include manufacturer’s recommendations for maximum permissible moisture content of
substrates.
B.
Submit full-size samples, 54 inches wide x 36 inches long, cut from current production of each
material selected to demonstrate quality, weight, color range, and pattern variation
C.
Submit manufacturer’s written product certification that all furnished wallcovering meets or
exceeds the specification requirements. Include certified copies of tests specified
D.
Submit wallcovering manufacturer’s written instructions for recommended maintenance of each
type of wallcovering required. Include acceptable methods and materials recommended to
maintain products in anticipated areas of use
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: Provide each type of vinyl wallcovering required produced by one manufacturer
whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance of wallcovering with specified
requirements.
B.
Applicator: Installation by skilled commercial wallcovering applicators with no less than three
years of documented experience installing wallcovering of the types and extent specified for the
project
C.
Material Standards: Provide materials that meet or exceed Federal Specification CCC-W-408A
and CFFA-W-101B Quality Standard for Vinyl Coated Fabric Wallcovering for Type I and
Type II wallcovering
D.
Composition: Provide supported vinyl material consisting of a through pigmented, mildew
inhibitorized, polyvinyl chloride film adhered to a pre-shrunk polyester/cotton blend fabric
backing
1.
2.
3.
E.
Physical Properties: Provide wallcovering with the following physical properties when tested in
accordance with ASTM D751.
1.
F.
Provide vinyl wallcoverings manufactured without the use of cadmium containing
stabilizers or color pigments
Provide vinyl wallcoverings manufactured using only water base printing inks and
coatings and containing no residual amounts of the organic solvents Methyl Ethol
Ketone, Methyl Isobutyl Ketone, and Toluene
Stain Resistant Coating: Provide KoroKlear (VicrKlear) delustered acrylic resin liquid
topcoating applied by the manufacturer as an integral part of production providing stain
protection from a variety of staining agents and greater ease of cleaning.
Total Weight:
20 oz./sq. yd
Fire Hazard Classification: Provide materials that comply with Class A fire rating when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING 09720 - 2
SECTION 09720
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING
G.
Underwriters Laboratories approval: Provide materials that have been tested and approved by
Underwriters Laboratories. Provide proof of UL labeling on every roll assuring complete
compliance with all specifications and requirements through continuous inspection by UL
inspectors
H.
Smoke Toxicity: Provide materials that have been tested for smoke toxicity and approved for
use by New York City Materials and Equipment Acceptance Division (MEA).
I.
Fire Detection Characteristics: Provide materials that have been laboratory tested for the Early
Warning Effect in accordance with ASTM E 603. Submit test results certifying that when one
square foot section of the material is heated to 300° F, the wallcovering emits an odorless,
colorless non-toxic vapor that will activate an ionization smoke detector
J.
Field Test Panels: Prior to the ordering of the material and at no cost to the Owner, install three
full width panels of each vinyl wallcovering in an area designated by the Architect. Replace
unacceptable panels. Retain approved panels as the standard of comparison for the project.
1.5
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver vinyl wallcoverings to the project site in unbroken and undamaged original factory
wrappings and clearly labeled with the manufacturer’s identification label, quality, or grade, UL
label and lot number
B.
Store materials in a clean, dry storage area with temperature maintained above 55° F with
normal humidity
C.
Store material in a flat position to prevent damage to roll-ends. Do not cross stack material.
Support material off the floor in a manner to prevent sagging and warping
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply wallcoverings when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the wallcovering manufacturer
B.
Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain substrate surface and ambient
temperatures above 60° F unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions
C.
Apply adhesive only when substrate surface temperature or ambient temperature is above 60° F,
or relative humidity is below 40%
D.
Maintain constant recommended temperature and humidity for at least 72 hours prior to,
throughout the installation period and for 72 hours after wallcovering installation completion
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING 09720 - 3
SECTION 09720
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING
E.
1.7
Provide not less than an 80-foot candles per square foot lighting level minimum measured midheight at substrate surfaces
WARRANTY
A.
1.8
Submit manufacturer’s five-year written warranty against manufacturing defects.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Replacement Materials: Provide not less than 10 percent of each type, color, and pattern of
wallcovering installed for maintenance purposes. Furnish replacement materials from same
production run as installed materials. Protect material with clearly marked packaging indicating
product identification and project location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Wallcoverings: Design Tex Vinyl Wallcoverings manufactured by Design Tex, A Steelcase
Company.
1.
2.2
Contact Information:
Stan Skulski
Design Tex
200 Vaick Street
New York, NY 10014
610-864-2344 phone
MATERIALS
A.
Wallcovering: Design Tex Vinyl Wallcovering conforming to Federal Specification CCC-W408D and CFFA-W-101-D using test methods given in Federal Specification CCC-T-191b
except as otherwise specified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Pattern: See Finish Schedule
Type: Vinyl wallcovering with Teflon top film
Color: See Finish Schedule
Width: 54”
Jointing: Butt Joints
ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesives: Design Tex Heavy-Duty Premixed vinyl adhesive or approved manufacturer’s equal
B.
Substrate Primer/Sealer: White pigmented alkyd or acrylic/latex base primer specifically
formulated for use with vinyl wallcoverings
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING 09720 - 4
SECTION 09720
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and installation conditions.
B.
Test substrates with a suitable moisture meter and verify that moisture content does not exceed
4%.
C.
Verify substrate surfaces are clean, dry, smooth, structurally sound, and free from surface
defects and imperfections that would show through the finished surface.
D.
Evaluate all painted surfaces for the possibility of pigment bleed-through
E.
Notify the contractor and architect in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the installation. Beginning of installation means acceptance of surface
conditions
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Allow wallcovering to acclimatize to the area of installation a minimum of 24 hours before
installation
B.
Before cutting, examine pattern and color and determine that they are the correct pattern and
color as specified for the correct location
C.
Read and follow the instructions in the manufacturer’s installation sheet contained in each roll
of the vinyl wallcovering
D.
Use adhesive recommended by the wallcovering manufacturer
E.
Install each roll in sequence starting from the highest to the lowest number and each strip in the
same sequence as cut from the roll
F.
Examine pattern for repeat design. Some patterns should be aligned, matched or reversed for
best results. If necessary, trim selvage deep enough to assure color uniformity
G.
Install wallcovering panels in exact order as they are cut from bolt, including pieces required to
filling in above and below windows and above doors. Reverse alternate strips of non-matching
patterns unless otherwise instructed
H.
After the application of three strips, request inspection by the Architect/Designer. If there are
variations in color or pattern that are considered to be excessive, notify the manufacturer’s
representative for an inspection before any further wallcovering is installed
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING 09720 - 5
SECTION 09720
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING
I.
Seam material at least 6 inches from inside and outside corners. Fit wallcovering into corners to
avoid bridging or spanning. Horizontal seams are not permitted
J.
Smooth wallcovering to the hanging surface using a stiff bristled sweep brush or a flexible
broad-knife to eliminate air bubbles, wrinkles, gaps, and overlaps
K.
Remove excess adhesive along finished seams immediately after each wallcovering strip
applied. Use clean warm water, a natural sponge, and clean towels. Change water often to
maintain water cleanliness
3.3
CLEAN-UP COMPLETION
A.
Upon completion of the work, remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from the
wallcovering installation. Leave areas in neat clean and orderly condition
END OF SECTION 09720
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING 09720 - 6
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND COATINGS
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING AND COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Painting and surface preparation for interior unfinished surfaces as scheduled
Field-painting and surface preparation of exposed mechanical and electrical piping,
conduit, ductwork, and equipment
Repainting and surface preparation at areas of remodeling
Painting of perimeter of suspended ceiling system after completion of ceiling work
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior
architectural woodwork.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Plaster”
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum
board.
Division 9 Section "Exterior Wood Stain."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data and Samples: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
B.
Mockups: Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate
required on the Project. The Architect will select areas to represent surfaces and conditions for
each type of coating and substrate to be painted.
1.
2.
3.
Prepare mockups after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been
activated
Provide required sheen, color and texture on each surface
Provide mockups for each color and finish as follows:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Wall Surfaces: 100 Sq. Ft.
Trim: 6 Linear Feet
Other items as designated by Architect
Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PAINTING AND COATINGS 09900 - 1
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND COATINGS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers.
Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Regulations: Compliance with VOC and environmental regulations
C.
Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F
D.
Apply solvent thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F
E.
Provide adequate ventilation, including mechanical ventilation, to remove paint odors and
fumes from areas of the building where odors might migrate to occupied spaces.
1.
2.
1.5
Perform painting that produces high odors at times when buildings are unoccupied and
not be occupied until paint odors have subsided
Premium labor rates, if required for work conducted during other than normal business
hours, are to be paid by the Contractor.
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Furnish extra paint materials packaged in unopened containers for storage and identify with
describing contents. Deliver extra materials to area designated by Owner:
1.
Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon or 1 case, as
appropriate, of each material and color applied
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed in paint
schedules or approved equivalent product by one of the following:.
1.
2.
3.
Ralph Lauren Paint (Ralph Lauren)
M.A. Bruder & Sons (MAB)
Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
B.
Provide first-line commercial quality products for all coating systems.
C.
Colors:
1.
See finish schedule on Construction Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PAINTING AND COATINGS 09900 - 2
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND COATINGS
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application.
1.
2.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1.
3.2
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over
substrates primed by others.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that
could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1.
2.
C.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
Remove chalk deposits and mildew and wash all surfaces with mild detergent.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a.
b.
c.
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac
or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill
holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PAINTING AND COATINGS 09900 - 3
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND COATINGS
d.
e.
D.
3.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop
coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a.
Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat
before priming.
b.
Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wirebrush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with
same primer as the shop coat.
4.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet
wall construction occurs on back side.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PAINTING AND COATINGS 09900 - 4
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND COATINGS
B.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by
manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply
additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special
attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a
dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not
cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
D.
Minimum Coating Thickness:
Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects
due to insufficient sealing.
G.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
H.
Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,
orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1.
Provide satin finish for final coats.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PAINTING AND COATINGS 09900 - 5
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND COATINGS
I.
Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no
evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections.
J.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
1.
3.5
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1.
3.6
After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1.
Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
B.
Gypsum Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over new interior plaster surfaces:
1.
Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
C.
Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
Primer: Interior plaster primer.
Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood
surfaces:
1.
Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater.
a.
Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel
finishes.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PAINTING AND COATINGS 09900 - 6
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND COATINGS
b.
D.
Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1.
Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over an anti-corrosive primer.
a.
b.
3.7
Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer.
Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.
INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE
A.
Natural-Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new interior woodwork:
1.
Alkyd-Based Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin varnish
over a sanding sealer. Provide wood filler on open-grain wood before applying first
varnish coat.
a.
b.
2.
Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
Finish Coats: Interior alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish.
Waterborne Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear satin varnish over
a sanding sealer. Wipe wood filler before applying stain.
a.
b.
Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear satin varnish.
END OF SECTION 09900
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PAINTING AND COATINGS 09900 - 7
SECTION 10100
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
SECTION 10100 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
.This Section includes visual display boards:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.2
Porcelain ceramic chalkboards with manufacturer’s standard frames.
Accessories for chalkboards
Installing existing chalk dispensers to be removed and reinstalled.
Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry": Requirements for wood blocking and
grounds
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Submit for approval samples, shop drawings, product data and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers.
Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Porcelain Ceramic Chalkboard Warranty: 50 Years
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturer of Chalkboards: Alliance Ceramic Steel Products, Norcross GA. No substitutions
will be permitted.
1.
Product Representative (All Contractors Must Use This Company)
a.
Chris Smith
Wirthmore Products & Services
1330 Green Hill Avenue
West Chest, PA 19380
Phone: 610-430-0300
Fax: 610-431-5715
B.
Chalk Dispensers: Salvaged units are to be reused from each classroom. If one is not present
than they shall be furnished by Owner to be installed by GC.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 1
SECTION 10100
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
C.
Fixed Chalkboards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Vertical Sliding Wall Hung Chalkboards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Materials: Porcelain ceramic face on steel
Operation: Fixed
Trim: 6063-T5 Aluminum with “Satin Anodized” finished metal frame and tray
Color: “Gray” 6502U
Materials: Porcelain ceramic face on steel. Honeycomb interior construction
Operation: Double vertical sliding with rear mounted fixed board
Trim: 6063-T5 Aluminum with “Satin Anodized” finished metal frame and tray
Color: “Gray” 6502U
Blade style chalk tray, sill mounted
Fixed Chalkboard Accessories:
1.
2.
Box type chalk tray
Map rail; one at top of each unit with the following accessories:
a.
Display rail: 1 inch wide integral with the map rail
b.
End stops: One at each end of the map rail
c.
Map hooks: 2 for each 48 inches of map rail or fraction thereof.
d.
Color: “Tan” #2166
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Take field measurements before fabrication where possible; do not delay progress.
B.
Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved
submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with
uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
C.
Tolerances: 1/16 inch in 20 feet from true plumb, level and alignment. Limit flush variation
between adjacent panels to 1/16 inch. Provide tight and closed gaps between panels unless
details otherwise.
D.
Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION 01500
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 2
SECTION 10260
WALL GUARD SYSTEM
10260
WALL GUARD SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Wall guard and chair rail systems for wall protection.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval product data, test reports.
1.3
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Performance Requirements: Provide wall guard or chair rail systems that conform to the
following requirements of regulatory agencies and the quality control of IPC Door and Wall
Protection Systems, InPro Corporation.
B. Rigid Vinyl Profile, Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide UL Classified vinyl covers
conforming with NFPA Class A fire rating. Surface burning characteristics, as determined by
UL-723 (ASTM E-84), shall be flame spread of 10 and smoke development of 350 - 450. Provide
ULC (Canada) listed vinyl covers conforming to the requirements of the National Building Code
of Canada 1990, Subsection 3.1.13. Surface burning characteristics, as determined by
CAN/ULC-S102.2, shall be flame spread of 15 and smoke developed of 35.
C. High Density Polyethylene Profile, Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide High Density
Polyethylene covers that conform with NFPA Class B fire rating.
D. Self Extinguishing: Provide rigid vinyl with a CC1 classification, as tested in accordance with
the procedures specified in ASTM D-635-74, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or
Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position, as referenced in
UBC 52-4-1988.
E. Impact Strength: Provide rigid vinyl profile materials that have an impact strength of 30.2 ftlbs/inch of thickness as tested in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-256-90b,
Impact Resistance of Plastics
F. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Provide rigid vinyl and high density polyethylene that shows
resistance to stain when tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D-543
G. Fungal and Bacterial Resistance: Provide rigid vinyl and high density polyethylene that does not
support fungal or bacterial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G-21 and ASTM G-22.
H. Color Consistency: Provide thermoplastic components matched in accordance with SAE J-1545 (Delta E) with a color difference no greater than 1.0 units using CIE Lab, CIE CMC, CIE LCh,
Hunter Lab or similar color space scale systems.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
WALL GUARD SYSTEM 10260 - 1
SECTION 10260
WALL GUARD SYSTEM
I. Cold, heat and chemical resistance: Provide wood handrails and leaning rail with a finish that
complies with the acceptable provisions of ANSI/KCMA A161.1-1990 for cold check, heat and
chemical resistance.
J. Environmental Compliance: Provide wood handrail or leaning rail with a finish that does not off
gas or emit any VOC, after a full cure, as tested in accordance to EPA, NESHAP, Method 24,
40CFR, Volume 60, Appendix A
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced
installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Fire Performance: ASTM E 119, ASTM E 814, and local regulations.
C.
Sequencing and Scheduling: Do not cover up firestopping installations that will become
concealed behind other construction until authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have
examined each installation.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite.
B.
Inspect materials at delivery to assure that specified product have been received.
C.
Store in original packaging in a climate controlled environment away from direct sunlight.
1.6
WARRANTY
A. Standard IPC limited lifetime warranty against material and manufacturing defects.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: No Substitutions will be permitted:
1.
2.2
IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, InPro Corporation, PO BOX 406, Muskego, WI
531530 USA. Telephone: 800-222-5556. Fax: 888-715-8407.
MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Continuous aluminum retainers shall be fabricated from 6063-T5 aluminum, with a
mill finish. Continuous Aluminum Wall Guard shall be fabricated from 6063-T5 Aluminum
with an anodized finish.
B.
Inspect Vinyl: Rigid vinyl profiles shall be extruded from chemical and stain resistant polyvinyl
chloride with the addition of impact modifier. No plasticizers shall be added (plasticizers may
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
WALL GUARD SYSTEM 10260 - 2
SECTION 10260
WALL GUARD SYSTEM
aid in bacterial growth).
C.
Polycarbonate: Clear Wall Guards shall be extruded from clear polycarbonate material.
D. Store High Density Polyethylene: High density polyethylene profiles shall be extruded from
100% post consumer recycled compound.
2.3
COMPONENTS
A. Fasteners: All mounting systems accessories appropriate for substrates indicated on the
drawings shall be provided.
B.
2.4
Molded corners and end caps shall be made of injection molded thermoplastic.
WALL GUARDS
A. Model number: 200 (1 1/8” height and width)
2.5
FINISHES
A. Rigid Vinyl Profile: Color to be as noted on finish schedule. Wall guard shall have a pebblette
.060 texture.
B.
High Density Polyethylene Profile: Color to be selected, by the architect, from the IPC finish
selection. Wall guard shall have a pebblette texture.
C.
Molded Components: Corners, returns, and end caps shall be of a color and texture matching
the extruded covers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Review extent of work with authorities having jurisdiction and obtain approval of installation
thicknesses and methods.
B.
Locate the wall guard or chair rail system as indicated on the approved detail drawing for the
appropriate substrate and in compliance with the IPC installation instructions. Install wall guard
or chair rail system level and plumb at the h indicated on the drawings.
C.
Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations. Securely anchor to wall in
accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
D. Protect, inspect and repair work until final acceptance.
E.
At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the IPC clean up and
maintenance instructions
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
WALL GUARD SYSTEM 10260 - 3
SECTION 10260
WALL GUARD SYSTEM
END OF SECTION 10260
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
WALL GUARD SYSTEM 10260 - 4
SECTION 11132
PROJECTION SCREENS
11132
PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Electrically operated and manually operated front projection screens for all classrooms
indicated on Drawings.
This section is provided for informational purposes only. Owner will provide all
projection screens. GC to coordinate with Owner for delivery to project site. GC to
provide mounting hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications": Suspension systems for projection screens.
Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry": Wood backing for screen installation.
Division 16 Sections: Electrical wiring, connections, and installation of remote control
switches for electrically operated projection screens.
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for approval product data and shop drawings.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers
which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced
installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces
where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to
take place.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer: Draper Shade and Screen Co.
1.
B.
No substitutions will be considered.
Electrically Operated Projection Screens:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Type: Tab tensioned automatic screen.
Operation: Electric, remote operation. Manual Pull Down
Mounting: Wall or Ceiling as Noted on Drawings.
Viewing Surface: Fiberglass matte white surface. Pearlescent finish.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 1
SECTION 11132
PROJECTION SCREENS
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Edge Treatment: Black masking borders.
Extra Drop: Black, 12 inches long.
Size of Viewing Surface: 69”x92” (120” Diagonal). Confirm with Architect prior to
purchasing.
Controls: Low voltage controls, 24 Volt; with 3-button switch and neutral decorator face
plate for flush wall mounting.
Model: Da-Lite "Tensioned Cosmopolitan Electrol" Audio-Visual Format.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved
submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with
uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.
B.
Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage.
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 2
SECTION 12492
VERTICAL BLINDS
12492 VERTICAL BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A. SUPPLIER: Furnish and install Vertical Blinds (Premium Quality)
B. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
1. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry
2. Section 08520: Aluminum Windows
1.02
REFERENCES
A. FLAME-RESISTANT MATERIALS SHALL PASS OR EXCEED ONE OR MORE OF THE
FOLLOWING TESTS:
• National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 701 (small scale for horizontal applications)
• Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 302 Flammability of Interior
Materials
• California Administrative Code Title 19
• Federal Standard 191 Method 5903 (used by Port Authority of New York and New Jersey for
drapery, curtain, and upholstery material)
• Boston Fire Department Test BFD IX-1
• New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature shall be submitted indicating materials,
finishes, construction and installation instructions and verifying that product meets requirements
specified. Manufacturers recommendations for maintenance and cleaning shall be included.
B. DRAWINGS AND DIAGRAMS: Wiring diagrams of any motorized components or units,
working and assembly drawings shall be supplied as requested.
C. SAMPLE: Responsible contracting officer or agent shall supply one sample shade of each type
specified in this contract for approval. Supplied units shall be furnished complete with all
required components, mounting and associated hardware, instructions and warranty.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Supplier: Manufacturer, subsidiary or licensed agent shall be approved to supply the products
specified, and to honor any claims against product presented in accordance with warranty.
B. INSTALLER: Installer or agent shall be qualified to install specified products by prior
experience, demonstrated performance and acceptance of requirements of manufacturer,
subsidiary, or licensed agent. Installer shall be responsible for an acceptable installation.
C. UNIFORMITY: Provide Vertical Blind of only one manufacturer for entire project.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Product shall be delivered to site in manufacturer’s original packaging.
B. Product shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes and operating
mechanisms.
1.06
JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Prior to shade installation, building shall be enclosed.
B. Interior temperature shall be maintained between 60° F. and 90° F. during and after installation;
relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. Wet work shall be complete and dry.
1.07
WARRANTY:
A. Lifetime Limited Warranty. Warranty limitations apply to vertical headrail, cord, & fabrics.
Specific product warranties available from manufacturer or its authorized agent.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VERTICAL BLINDS 12492 - 1
SECTION 12492
VERTICAL BLINDS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Hunter Douglas Contract/ 12250 Parkway Centre Dr. / Poway, CA 92064/ Phone: 800-7278953 Fax: 800-205-9819/ Website: www.hunterdouglascontract.com, or architect approved
equivalent. Contact the following for project assistance and dealer referral @ 800-964-2580:
(Mideast/Midwest) Keith Burgess ext. #827311, (Southern/Central) Christopher Hagen ext.
#827312, (Western/Mountain/Upper Midwest) David Cover ext. #827313, (Northeast) Patrick
LeClair ext. #827314, (Southwest) Matthew Craven ext. #827317.
B. Product substitutions must be approved by architect minimum of 30 days prior to close of bid.
2.02 VERTICAL BLINDS
A. PRODUCT: Hunter Douglas “Contract Vertical Blind”
B. MATERIALS:
1. LOUVERS: Curved .008” gauge 3 ½” wide heat-treated extruded aluminum, dip coated
with baked polyester coating. Finish with manufacturer’s standard colors selected by
architect (See Finish Schedule) from manufacturer’s available contract colors.
2. CHANNEL: Standard type (Permalign) measuring 1 ¾” X 1 5/16” X .045” thick
constructed of painted ivory aluminum. Internally fit with .24” diameter heavy-duty
extruded aluminum tilt rod, engineered thermal plastic carrier trucks, end caps and
components required for specified performance and designed for smooth, quiet, trouble
free operation.
3. CARRIER TRUCKS: Engineered thermal plastic 7/16” thick and 1 5/8” wide with
wheels and worm-and-spur gears to ensure rotation with perfect alignment and
synchronization. Solid molded engineered thermal plastic asymmetrical carrier stems
provide ease of louver installation and removal. Wheel-less lead carrier moves along
elongated bearing surface.
4. SPACER LINKS: Stainless steel 5/16” X .008” spacer links smoothly space and
stabilize carrier trucks.
5. ROTATION: Standard #10 qualified nickel-plated brass tilt chain provides 180 degrees
direct rotation by activating tilt gear within end cap assembly (#10 standard with
covered end cap assembly and 3 to 1 ratio) in turn actuating heavy-duty extruded
aluminum tilt rod and worm-and-spur gears in carrier trucks. Located on either side of
individual blind unit as per architect’s request.
6. TRAVERSING: Stretch resistant, non-fraying, and lint free lock nit polyester cord
provide traversing capabilities for side, center, and off-center draws.
7. MOUNTING HARDWARE: Manufacturer’s standard L- bracket with clip (outside
mounts) & clip only (inside mounts) provide required support.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Blind measurements shall be accurate to within + 1/8” or as recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A. SUBCONTRACTOR shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surfaces,
installation conditions and field measurement for this work.
B. OTHER INTERACTING TRADES shall receive drawings of shade systems, dimensions,
assembly and installation methods from subcontractor upon request.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. INSTALLATION shall comply with manufacturer’s specifications, standards and procedures as
detailed on contract drawings.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VERTICAL BLINDS 12492 - 2
SECTION 12492
VERTICAL BLINDS
B. ADEQUATE CLEARANCE shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and
hardware.
C. CLEAN finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of debris.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION:
A. Demonstrate operation method and instruct owner’s personnel in the proper operation and
maintenance of the blinds.
3.04 SCHEDULE:
A. EXTERIOR WINDOWS:
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
VERTICAL BLINDS 12492 - 3
SECTION 12494
SHADES
12494 SHADES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manually operated sunscreen roller shades.
B.
Manually operated room-darkening shades.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades
and accessories.
B.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies
for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.
C.
Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for
installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric
Materials to Fungi.
B.
NFPA 701-99 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Submit Environmental Certification and Third Party Evaluation per Section 1.5
Qualifications.
C.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features,
finishes and operating instructions.
3.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
4.
Mounting details and installation methods.
5.
D.
Prepare shop drawings on Autocad or Microstation format using base sheets provided
electronically by the Architect.
Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as
indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SHADES 12494 - 1
E.
1.5
SECTION 12494
SHADES
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and
aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors
and patterns.
F.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade
components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements.
Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to
indicate interior faces.
G.
Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning
materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single
manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products
comparable to those specified in this section.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum
of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical
burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.
D.
Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and
tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system
testing.
E.
Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642,
ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.
F.
Environmental Certification: Submit written certification from the manufacturer, including
third party evaluation, recycling characteristics, and perpetual use certification as specified
below. Initial submittals, which do not include the Environmental Certification, below will
be rejected. Materials that are simply 'PVC free' without identifying their inputs shall not
qualify as meeting the intent of this specification and shall be rejected.
G.
Third Party Evaluation: Provide documentation stating the shade cloth has undergone third
party evaluation for all chemical inputs, down to a scale of 100 parts per million, that have
been evaluated for human and environmental safety. Identify any and all inputs, which are
known to be carcinogenic, mutagenic, teratogenic, reproductively toxic, or endocrine
disrupting. Also identify items that are toxic to aquatic systems, contain heavy metals, or
organohalogens. The material shall contain no inputs that are known problems to human or
environmental health per the above major criteria, except for an input that is required to
meet local fire codes.
H.
Recycling Characteristics: Provide documentation that the shade cloth can and is part of a
closed loop of perpetual use and not be required to be down cycled, incinerated or otherwise
thrown away. Scrap material can be sent back to the mill for reprocessing and recycling into
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SHADES 12494 - 2
SECTION 12494
SHADES
the same quality yarn and woven into new material, without down cycling. Certify that this
process is currently underway and will be utilized for this project.
I.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name,
fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations
indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Perpetual Use Certification: Certify that at the end of the useful life of the shade cloth, that
the material can be sent back to the manufacturer for recapture as part of a closed loop of
perpetual use and that the material can and will be reconstituted into new yarn, for weaving
into new shade cloth. Provide information on each shade band indicating that the shade
band can be sent back to the manufacturer for this purpose.
Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is
complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
WARRANTY
A.
Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth (except EcoVeil™): Manufacturer's standard
non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty.
1.
EcoVeil standard non-depreciating 10-year limited warranty.
B.
Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including
scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc.; 42-03 35th Street, Long Island City,
NY 11101. ASD. Tel: (718) 729-2020. Fax: (718) 729-2941. Email:
info@mechoshade.com, www.mechoshade.com.
B.
Substitutions: Not permitted.
APPLICATIONS/SCOPE
A.
2.3
Roller Shade Schedule:
1.
Shade Type 1: Manual operating, chain drive, sunscreen roller shades in all exterior
windows of rooms and spaces shown on the Drawings.
SHADE CLOTH
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SHADES 12494 - 3
A.
2.4
SHADE BAND
A.
2.5
SECTION 12494
SHADES
Environmentally Certified Shadecloth: MechoShade Systems, Inc., EcoVeil group, 1350
Series, fabricated from TPO for both core yarn and jacket, single thickness, non-raveling
0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick fabric.
1.
Weave: 5 percent open 2x2 basket weave.
2.
Color: See Finish Schedule.
Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket,
shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and
open hem pockets are not acceptable.
1.
Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams
(including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of
appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a
sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all
shades within one room.
2.
Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment:
a.
Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness
required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less
than 1.55 inch (39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55
inches (64.77 mm) for motorize shades are not acceptable.
b.
Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism.
c.
Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade
band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off" spline
mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets.
d.
Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples,
and/or rivets.
e.
Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of:
adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable.
SHADE FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb,
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
B.
Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed
trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to
roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either
direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design.
Fabricate hem as follows:
1.
Bottom hem weights.
C.
Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling
of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H)
ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be
responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of
the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or
tempered steel, as required.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SHADES 12494 - 4
D.
2.6
SECTION 12494
SHADES
For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required
to meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to Architect.
Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width,
height, or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such
standards, assure proper use of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper
tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands.
E.
Provide battens for railroaded shades when width-to-height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed
manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper
use and placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands.
F.
Blackout shadebands, when used in side channels, shall have horizontally mounted, rollformed stainless steel or tempered-steel battens not more than 3 feet (115 mm) on center
extending fully into the side channels. Battens shall be concealed in a integrally-colored
fabric to match the inside and outside colors of the shadeband, in accordance with
manufacturer's published standards for spacing and requirements.
1.
Battens shall be roll formed of stainless steel or tempered steel and concave to match
the contour of the roller tube.
2.
Batten pockets shall be self-colored fabric front and back RF welded into the
shadecloth. A self-color opaque liner shall be provided front and back to eliminate
any see through of the batten pocket that shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm)
high and be totally opaque. A see-through moiré effect, which occurs with multiple
layers of transparent fabrics, shall not be acceptable.
COMPONENTS
A.
Access and Material Requirements:
1.
Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets
without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center
supports to be removed.
2.
Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands
without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.
3.
Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade
hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not
be acceptable.
B.
Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets:
1.
Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at
front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be
adjustable for future change.
2.
Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular
and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any
kind.
3.
Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll
fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring
exposed fasteners of any kind.
4.
Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands
(multi-banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer’s design
criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade
band.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SHADES 12494 - 5
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
SECTION 12494
SHADES
Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to
be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on
each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees
total offset.
Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube.
Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not
acceptable
Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated
steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.
Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly:
a.
MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all
MechoShade accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, room
darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded
shades.
b.
M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a
welded 3/8 inch (9.525 mm) steel pin.
c.
The brake shall be an over -unning clutch design which disengages to 90
percent during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a
pull force of 50 lbs. (22 kg) in the stopped position.
d.
The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which
the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an
articulated brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in
raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently
lubricated. Products that require externally applied lubrication and or not
permanently lubricated are not acceptable.
e.
The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket,
and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and
reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments.
Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. (41 kg) minimum breaking
strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
INSTALLATION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SHADES 12494 - 6
A.
3.4
SECTION 12494
SHADES
Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written
instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face
of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.
B.
Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding
or malfunction throughout entire operational range.
C.
Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
D.
Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain
roller shade systems.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SHADES 12494 - 7
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16100 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL
INDEX
DESCRIPTION
PARAGRAPH #
PAGE #
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
16100-2
SCOPE OF WORK
2
16100-2
CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
3
16100-3
VISIT TO SITE
4
16100-3
VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENTS AND CONDITIONS
5
16100-4
EXISTING CONDITIONS AND UTILITIES
6
16100-4
ITEMS NOT SHOWN OR SPECIFIED
7
16100-4
REGULATIONS AND CODES
8
16100-4
PERMITS, CERTIFICATES, AND FEES
9
16100-6
GUARANTEE AND WARRANTIES
10
16100-6
SEQUENCE OF WORK
11
16100-7
CHANGES TO THE SCOPE OF WORK
12
16100-7
TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
13
16100-8
TESTING
14
16100-9
SUBSTITUTIONS
15
16100-11
SHOP DRAWINGS
16
16100-11
SAMPLES
17
16100-13
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS, MANUALS, AND DEMONSTRATION
18
16100-13
SUMMARY OF SUBMISSIONS
19
16100-14
SAFETY
20
16100-15
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
21
16100-16
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 1
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16100 - GENERAL
1.
2.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1
The applicable provisions of the Division 1 General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions,
Special Contract Requirements, Amendments and Additions to the General Conditions, and
all project addenda are hereby made an integral part of this section.
1.2
These specifications apply to all electrical work performed.
1.3
When apparent conflict exists between these specifications and the contract drawings,
within the specifications, or within the drawings, the engineer will determine the intent.
1.4
The term "provide" means "furnish and install". The terms "contractor" and "E.C." mean
"electrical contractor", unless otherwise noted. All work indicated in specifications
division 16000 and on the electrical drawings is by the electrical contractor, unless
otherwise noted.
1.5
The terms "unless otherwise noted" or "unless otherwise indicated" in any form of wording
mean "unless specifically indicated otherwise on the electrical drawings, in the electrical
specifications, or in the General Conditions and Requirements to the specifications and/or
contract". These terms do not mean "unless indicated otherwise on the general
construction, mechanical construction, or other disciplines' drawings or specifications",
except where specifically so worded on the electrical drawings or electrical specifications.
1.6
Materials and equipment manufacturers and catalog numbers specified constitute the type
and quality of design, material, workmanship, ruggedness of construction, resistance to
vandalism, exact operating and performance characteristics, features, configuration,
dimensions, etc.. Where multiple manufacturers are shown in the drawings and/or
specifications, not all manufacturers shown may be capable of providing materials and
equipment meeting the specifications, field conditions, etc.. Manufacturers not specifically
shown on the drawings or specifications shall be considered, provided the products equal or
exceed the requirements of the drawings and specifications (including equaling or
exceeding products and/or manufacturers specifically shown on drawings and
specifications). Manufacturers, whether shown on the drawings or specifications or not, are
acceptable only if they can meet the specifications, conditions, and requirements specific to
this project. Provide materials and equipment as required (include all costs in bid).
1.7
For any equipment indicated on the drawings as furnished by the owner, contact the owner
prior to submitting bid to obtain all requirements of such equipment as necessary to provide
a complete installation. Provide all ancillary equipment as necessary which is not furnished
by the owner but which is required for a complete installation of owner furnished
equipment.
SCOPE OF WORK
2.1
The work governed by these specifications consists of providing all labor, materials,
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 2
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
equipment, services, and related items/work necessary to complete all the electrical work as
indicated and described in the drawings and specifications.
2.2
Electrical work includes but is not limited to:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.
4.
Power distribution and wiring
Interior lighting
Fire alarm system modifications
Telephone raceway/pathway system
Temporary power and lighting
CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
3.1
Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of the various systems
and approximate and relative locations of the materials and equipment defined by the
specifications. Coordinate with and obtain the approval of the owner, architect, and
engineer for the exact locations of all materials and equipment. Check the drawings,
specifications, and all fabrication and shop drawings (including fabrication and shop
drawings of other trades) to verify space conditions, headroom requirements,
characteristics, and for coordination. Where space conditions and headroom requirements
appear inadequate, notify the engineer before submitting a bid. No consideration or
allowance will be granted for failure to notify the engineer, or for any alleged
misunderstanding of the requirements above. Completely furnish, install, connect, and
interconnect all components of all systems in accordance with contract requirements,
manufacturer's instructions, applicable codes and standards, and best practices of the trade.
3.2
Minor deviations, variations, changes, and corrections from layouts shown on the drawings
(based on coordination, conditions, manufacturer's instructions, codes and standards, shop
drawings, and verification of measurements and conditions) are permitted to facilitate
construction provided the changes do not represent potential changes in scope of work (see
the section of these specifications "Changes to the Scope of Work") and provided the
changes are acceptable to the owner, architect, and engineer.
3.3
Before submitting bid, examine and check all drawings and specifications relating to all
work, including electrical, mechanical, plumbing, general construction, fire protection, and
any other trades' drawings and specifications (as well as Division 1 General Conditions)
and become fully informed as to the extent and character of work required and its relation
to the work of other trades. No consideration, claims, charges, or compensation will be
granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the work to be performed, or the force and
intent of these specifications.
VISIT TO SITE
4.1
Before estimating work, visit the project site and verify all measurements and field
conditions affecting the work. The contractor is fully responsible for the correctness of all
measurements and for any connections to existing work. Submission of bid is considered
evidence that this contractor has visited and examined the site. No consideration, claims,
charges, or compensation will be granted for extra work as a result of the contractor's
failure to visit the site or verify conditions and measurements.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 3
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
5.
6.
VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENTS AND CONDITIONS
5.1
The electrical contractor is solely responsible for verifying field measurements, conditions,
and drawing and specifications information (for all trades) before ordering materials and
equipment and before commencing work. The electrical contractor is solely responsible for
verifying shop drawings (including shop drawings of other trades) before releasing related
materials and equipment and before rough in. No consideration, claims, charges, or
compensation will be granted due to any differences between the actual dimensions and any
dimensions indicated on the drawings.
5.2
Report any apparent discrepancies or conflicts found at once to the engineer for
consideration and wait for a decision before proceeding with any work in the affected area.
5.3
The engineer's decisions in cases of discrepancies, conflicts, and related to verification of
measurements and conditions are final and binding upon the contractor, make all
installation accordingly.
EXISTING CONDITIONS AND UTILITIES
6.1
7.
8.
Information and data indicated on the drawings regarding existing conditions (including
underground utilities) is from the best available sources. However, no assurance is made as
to completeness and/or accuracy.
ITEMS NOT SHOWN OR SPECIFIED
7.1
Provide any items of material not indicated on the drawings and/or not specified, but which
are required for the complete and proper installation and/or operation of any part of the
work, as if indicated and specified.
7.2
Provide any work not indicated on the drawings and/or not specified, but which is required
for compliance with applicable codes and regulations, as if indicated and specified.
7.3
No consideration, claims, charges, or compensation will be granted for performing work
required for complete and proper installation/operation or required for compliance with
applicable codes and regulations.
REGULATIONS AND CODES
8.1
Perform work in accordance with all respective requirements of all applicable federal, state,
and local codes, standards, regulations, ordinances, laws, etc. and industry standards. This
includes applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.), National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA), International Building Code (IBC/BOCA), Factory Mutual
(FM), Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IES, IESNA), Institute of
Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Insulated Power Cable Engineer's Association,
National Electrical Contractors' Association (NECA) "Standard of Installation", National
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 4
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), National Electrical Safety Code
(N.E.S.C.), Underwriter's Laboratories (UL), United States Department of Labor
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), utility companies requirements,
etc..
8.2
Where UL listing or labeling (in any form) is indicated in the drawings or specifications or
is otherwise required by the N.E.C. or other applicable code, provide equipment and
materials as either listed or labeled by a qualified product evaluating organization (UL or
approved equal) acceptable to the local authority having jurisdiction. Include all costs in
bid. No extra claims or compensation shall be granted under any circumstance associated
with providing UL listed equipment.
A.
The electrical contractor is fully responsible for verifying (before submitting bid) the
applicability and extent of code required UL listing with the local authority.
Specifically verify if the municipality has any requirements that "listable" (capable of
being listed) products must be "listed". Provide accordingly where applicable.
B.
Submission and/or approval of shop drawings (which may or may not show UL
listing) do not relieve the contractor of the responsibility to meet UL listing
requirements.
C.
Where products required (by specifications/code) as UL listed are installed without
UL listing or as non-listed (without prior written approval), the contractor shall
remove the products and install UL listed products at no cost to the owner. Written
approval will only be considered if all of the following are satisfied:
1)
The contractor is fully responsible for (including all costs) and must prepare
and submit any and all information necessary for review and evaluation of
products (by the authority having jurisdiction, engineer, architect, and owner).
This includes all processing costs for all parties involved and costs for any
special or independent third party inspections, investigations, evaluations,
engineering services (including sealing by a registered professional engineer),
etc. which may be required or requested in conjunction with approval. In the
absence of UL listing, the contractor is fully responsible for proving that
products are acceptable.
2)
The contractor must show one (1) or more of the following:
a)
b)
c)
That UL listed products are not available.
That providing available UL listed products involves excessive costs or
hardships.
That UL listing of products involves requirements that unreasonably
exceed the requirements of the specifications, codes, and project
conditions.
3)
Products must meet or exceed all specified requirements, industry standards,
code requirements, and conditions specific to the project.
4)
There must be no change in contract price (except that the owner reserves the
right to require credit pricing).
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 5
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
5)
8.3
9.
10.
Where acceptable to the owner.
Where N.E.C. article numbers are referenced in the drawings and specifications, they apply
to the latest edition. Where the authority having jurisdiction has not adopted the latest
edition, refer to the equivalent applicable code requirement article.
PERMITS, CERTIFICATES, AND FEES
9.1
Apply for, obtain, pick-up, and pay for (pay all costs associate with) all permits, licenses,
certificates, etc., required for execution of the project. Procure all permits immediately
upon notice to proceed with the contract. The contractor is fully responsible for verifying
all permits, licenses, certificates, etc. which are required. Submit (see the section of these
specifications "Summary of Submissions") copies of all permits, licenses, certificates, etc.
in conjunction with this project for record. Prepare all information and data for submittal to
any authority as required to obtain permits and certification of compliance for the permits.
This specifically includes this contractor reproducing contract drawings for permit
submission, which shall be sealed by the electrical engineer upon request.
9.2
Obtain and submit (see the section of these specifications "Summary of Submissions") six
(6) copies of inspection certificate(s) from authorities having jurisdiction indicating
approval of the electrical installation. Arrange and pay for all electrical inspections
(performed by an approved Underwriters Inspection Agency) associated with inspection
certificate(s).
GUARANTEE AND WARRANTIES
10.1
The electrical contractor is fully responsible to guarantee all electrical equipment and work
(applies to all materials and equipment, including lamps for luminaires) and is fully
responsible for all manufacturers' warranties from material purchase (by the contractor),
through the date of final acceptance by the owner, to the expiration date(s) of the guarantee
and warranties. Guarantee and provide warranties for a period after the date of final
acceptance by the owner as per Division 1 General Conditions, unless longer periods are
specifically indicated otherwise on the electrical drawings or specifications.
Guarantee/warranty periods of less than one (1) year after date of final acceptance are not
permitted under any circumstance.
10.2
Wherever "warranties" are indicated elsewhere in the specifications, provide and submit
(see the section of these specifications "Summary of Submissions") written manufacturers'
warranties for equipment. Include all costs in bid associated with providing specified
warranties periods (including purchasing any required extended or special warranties to
meet the specified periods). Submission of written warranties showing periods, conditions,
or coverage of less than the periods, conditions, and coverage specified does not relieve the
contractor or manufacturers' of the responsibility to provide warranties with periods,
conditions, or coverage as specified. Manufacturers' warranties do not relieve the
contractor of any responsibility associated with the electrical contractor's guarantee.
10.3
The electrical contractor shall guarantee and respective manufacturers shall warranty
equipment and materials from defects in workmanship, materials, and operation. Provide
guarantee/warranties including all service, maintenance (excluding routine maintenance),
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 6
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
materials, labor, travel, all other work, and all expenses required as part of
guarantee/warranties. Provide all guarantee/warranties service at no extra cost to the owner
under any circumstance. Provide all guarantee/warranties service in timely manner.
10.4
11.
12.
Completely replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the owner, any equipment (as part of this
project) improperly installed or damaged before or after installation until expiration of the
guarantee period. Completely replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the owner, any
equipment (including existing equipment and equipment installed by any other contractor
or party) damaged by the electrical contractor (or any subcontractor thereof).
SEQUENCE OF WORK
11.1
Perform work in areas or general sequences (including applicable project phasing) as
determined and directed by the owner and architect. Submit (see the section of these
specifications "Summary of Submissions") a complete schedule of construction for
approval, showing delivery of equipment, erection of equipment, pertinent work related to
installation, and when equipment will be placed in operation. Fully coordinate exact
sequencing, phasing, and scheduling with all contractors, the architect, and the owner in
detail and obtain approval of sequencing, phasing, and scheduling before starting work.
11.2
Perform all work in such a manner and associated with sequencing, phasing, and
scheduling as required and include all costs and manpower allocations in bid. For example,
to complete a particular sequence or phase of the work, it may be necessary to perform
work in physical areas of the project areas which are covered by and/or part of prior phases
or subsequent phases of work (i.e. work in initial phases of the project may involve
installing the electrical service and electrical distribution equipment in areas which are
proposed for renovation as part of a later phase; this would require installing the electrical
service and electrical distribution equipment as part of the initial phase). Verify all such
conditions, implications, requirements and include costs in bid. No consideration, claims,
charges, or compensation will be granted under any circumstance for sequencing, phasing,
and scheduling.
11.3
Maintain service at all times (except as provided elsewhere in the drawings and
specifications for shutdowns) and minimize disruptions to all active areas, activities, and
operations in and around the scope of work. This specifically includes activities and
operations of the owner, third parties in the vicinity of the project, roads and highways
surrounding the project, and utility companies serving the project. Coordinate specific
requirements with the owner before submitting bids.
11.4
Maintain service of life safety systems (specifically emergency lighting and fire alarm) at
all times.
CHANGES TO THE SCOPE OF WORK
12.1
Changes to the scope of work include any change effecting the overall nature or cost of the
project. Examples of changes to the scope of work include, but are not limited to, additions
or deletions of equipment or items of work, substitutions not equivalent or superior to
equipment specified, substitutions with characteristics or operation varying from equipment
specified, changes which effect the ultimate use or functioning of equipment or areas of the
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 7
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
building, changes considered to be "substantial", any change which any party (contractors,
sub-contractors, owner, architect, engineers, etc.) believes may involve a possible change in
contract price, etc..
12.2
Make all changes to the scope of work in complete accordance with the general conditions
of the specifications. Submit (see the section of these specifications "Summary of
Submissions") changes to the scope of work immediately upon proposal of changes. Do
not proceed with any work associated with or affected by changes to the scope of work
unless the owner approves changes in writing or authorizes proceeding in writing.
12.3
All applicable provisions of the contract drawings and specifications, including addenda
and prior changes, apply to all changes to the scope of work, unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
12.4
In addition to all requirements of the general conditions, submit all pricing related to
changes to the scope of work as indicated below. Pricing will not be reviewed until the
required breakdowns (summarized below) are submitted.
12.5
Submit pricing for a proposed change to the scope of work with detailed breakdown as
follows.
12.6
13.
A.
Submit a complete detailed breakdown of all material associated with the proposed
change in scope of work. Itemize each unit of material and the respective cost.
B.
Submit a complete detailed breakdown of all labor associated with each respective
item of the above material breakdown. Itemize labor hours and classification for
each item of material. Summarize total labor costs, broken down by worker
classification and/or billing rate.
Where instructed to proceed with a change to the scope of work on a time-and-material
(T&M) basis, submit pricing with detailed breakdown as follows.
A.
Submit a complete detailed breakdown of all material. Submit copies of all receipts,
invoices, and stock material lists.
B.
Submit a complete detailed breakdown of all actual labor hours. Submit copies of
time sheets. Summarize total labor costs, broken down by worker classification
and/or billing rate.
TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING
13.1
For this specification section only, the term "responsible" (in any form) means "responsible
to pay all costs (pay to the electrical contractor) to erect the described work". For this
specification section only, the term "erect" (in any form) means "furnish, install, maintain,
and remove".
13.2
The electrical contractor is responsible for temporary power and lighting service/source and
distribution during construction. Provide service capacity as required for construction.
Provide service including any required utility or private metering.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 8
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
14.
13.3
The electrical contractor is responsible for all temporary lighting, all 120 V power for small
construction tools, and all other temporary power not exceeding 120 V or 20 A. Power for
large tools and equipment exceeding 120 V or 20 A (including arc welders, etc.) is the
responsibility of the contractor requesting such power. Temporary power during
construction (exceeding 120 V or 20 A) to permanent equipment installed as part of this
project (for installing, testing, operating, etc., including mechanical equipment, elevators,
etc.) is the responsibility of the contractor requesting such power.
13.4
Temporary service to any contractor or subcontractor trailer is the responsibility of the
contractor requesting such service.
13.5
Where utility power is not available and during shutdowns of utility power, the contractor
requesting power under these conditions is responsible for providing portable generator(s),
associated temporary wiring, and fuel (as required to meet power requirements during these
conditions). Generator power to owner loads during construction is not required (unless
specifically indicated on the drawings).
13.6
The electrical contractor is responsible for temporary power to existing and/or other owner
loads, equipment, and wiring as indicated on the drawings.
13.7
The electrical contractor shall erect all temporary power equipment and wiring as required
for complete temporary power installation, regardless of the contractor who is responsible
for the temporary power.
13.8
Erect all temporary power and lighting during construction in accordance with OSHA and
the N.E.C.. This includes required ground fault circuit interrupter (G.F.C.I.) protection for
personnel and "assured grounding program".
TESTING
14.1
After completing installation of equipment and wiring and prior to energizing or placing in
service, test all electrical equipment, conductors, systems, and each and every part thereof
to insure continuity, proper splicing, freedom from unwanted grounds, acceptable
insulation values, proper operation and functioning, and a complete workmanlike
installation to the satisfaction of the engineer and owner.
14.2
Completely test all equipment installed. This includes all equipment furnished and
installed by the electrical contractor as well as equipment furnished by others and installed
by the electrical contractor and equipment furnished and installed by others and wired by
the electrical contractor.
A.
Electrical tests of panels, switches, and circuit breakers are not required, except that
meg-ohm meter testing is required.
B.
Electrical tests of motors are not required.
C.
Electrical tests of motor starters are not required.
D.
Visual and mechanical checks are required for all equipment (including all panels,
switches, circuit breakers, motors, motor starters, and all other equipment) without
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 9
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
exception.
14.3
Test all equipment and wiring as per the latest edition of InterNational Electrical Testing
Association (NETA) standards (Acceptance Testing Specifications (NETA-ATS) for new
equipment/wiring and Maintenance Testing Specifications (NETA-MTS) for existing
equipment/wiring), unless indicated otherwise. For each piece of equipment, perform
testing as shown for that equipment in respective NETA standards. Where equipment is
not specifically shown in NETA standards, perform testing as shown for equipment most
closely resembling the equipment to be tested. Perform all tests shown in respective NETA
standards, unless indicated otherwise. Tests shown as "optional" in NETA standards are
not required unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings or specifications.
Utilize suitable instruments in making all tests, as per NETA standards. Battery, magneto,
or similar hand-held testers may be used for preliminary conductor continuity checking but
are not acceptable for final results, which must be obtained utilizing proper equipment only
(i.e. meg-ohm meter, etc.).
14.4
Provide all testing performed by a NETA accredited independent testing firm employed by
the electrical contractor or by the electrical contractor's direct employees (at the contractor's
option). Provide continuity and insulation resistance meg-ohm meter testing of 600 V and
less conductors performed by the electrical contractor's direct employees only.
14.5
If requested by the owner or engineer, provide a recording type (i.e. "Dranetz") meter
measuring phase-to-phase voltage, phase to neutral voltage, phase currents, harmonic
content, and surges in the system. Perform testing for a period of one (1) week.
Completely set up and take down meter and submit printout tapes formal test results.
14.6
For all testing performed, submit (see the section of these specifications "Summary of
Submissions") complete typewritten and tabulated test results for review and approval by
the engineer and owner. Submit test result bound together in a single three-ring binder (one
(1) binder per set of test results) including a table of contents. Submit quantity of sets as
directed in the General Construction specifications, but in no case less than three (3) sets.
Submit results upon project completion, except under conditions below.
14.7
Where any abnormal, questionable, "failing", or "borderline" test results are encountered or
where discrepancies are noted during testing, submit results immediately to the engineer
before energizing equipment. Do not energize until authorized in writing by the engineer.
Test results submitted under these circumstances are not required to be bound or complete.
14.8
Where connecting to or otherwise modifying existing wiring, test wiring as follows.
A.
Test existing wiring before performing work to confirm integrity (where testing is
performed, the electrical contractor is not responsible for the prior existing condition
of wiring).
B.
Test new wiring before connecting to existing wiring.
C.
Test connections of new to existing wiring (test new wiring and existing wiring
together) and modified existing wiring after performing work.
Where this testing is not performed, the condition of existing wiring will be assumed to be
a direct and sole result of work preformed and the electrical contractor will be held fully
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 10
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
responsible for the condition of existing wiring. Where this testing is not performed and
where existing wiring is not in acceptable condition for maintained use or service, the
electrical contractor shall repair or replace wiring to the satisfaction of the owner at no cost
to the owner.
14.9
15.
16.
For all testing indicated above as performed by a NETA accredited independent testing
firm, the firm shall be approved by the University.
SUBSTITUTIONS
15.1
Materials and equipment manufacturers and catalog numbers specified constitute the type
and quality of design, material, workmanship, ruggedness of construction, resistance to
vandalism, exact operating and performance characteristics, features, configuration,
dimensions, etc.. The engineer will consider substitutions of similar equipment superior to
specified equipment (meeting or exceeding all characteristics of the specified equipment).
15.2
Submit shop drawings associated with substitutions complete with documentation
necessary to establish compliance with the specifications (see the sections of these
specifications "Shop Drawings" and "Summary of Submissions"). Submit samples of
substitutions where requested (see the sections of these specifications "Samples" and
"Summary of Submissions"). If documentation and/or samples are not submitted when
required, the request for substitution will be denied.
15.3
Determination of compliance with specifications rests with the engineer. When a request
for substitution is denied, furnish the equipment specified. The engineer's decisions in
cases of substitutions are final and binding upon the contractor, provide equipment
accordingly.
15.4
Pay all costs associated with a substitution where granted. For the provisions of this
section, "substitutions" includes equipment where characteristics or operation vary
significantly from equipment specified (including equipment of the specified
manufacturer). This includes costs incurred by any party (electrical contractor, other
contractors, sub-contractors, owner, architect, engineers, etc.), costs resulting from
differences of details, configuration, ratings, operation, characteristics, and dimensions
between the specified and substituted equipment, costs to provide features of the specified
equipment which may be manufacturer's options of the substituted equipment, and costs to
remove and replace work already installed and any other remedial work as a result of
substitutions. Approval of substitutions is conditional that there is no cost change to the
contract, unless specifically indicated on the shop drawings submittal and corresponding
approval. The electrical contractor is fully responsible for coordinating with the owner,
architect, and other trades to identify all possible cost impacts associated with any
substitution before releasing equipment and before any party proceeds with work effected
by the substitution.
15.5
Submit bid based on the items as specified. Substitutions will be considered only after a
contract has been awarded.
SHOP DRAWINGS
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 11
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
16.1
Submit (see the section of these specifications "Summary of Submissions") shop drawings
of all equipment and materials proposed to be furnished for review and approval by the
engineer. Submit quantity of sets as directed in the general construction specifications, but
in no case less than ten (10) sets.
16.2
Submit shop drawings for all equipment and materials including, but not limited to
luminaires, solid state energy saving ballasts, raceways, conductors, cable, termination
methods, grounding, wiring devices, safety switches, enclosed circuit breakers, branch and
distribution panels, transformers, contactors, time clocks, photocells, fire alarm system,
emergency power and lighting system equipment, engraved plastic nameplates, and any
other items requested by the owner, architect, or engineer.
16.3
Stamp or mark shop drawings with the contractor's approval, as evidence that they were
checked for accuracy and that all dimensions, characteristics, ratings, operation, features,
data, relation to existing conditions, and coordination with work and shop drawings of other
trades were completely verified before submission. Approval of shop drawings by the
engineer does not relieve the contractor of responsibilities to review shop drawings in
detail, to comply with drawings and specifications, for errors contained in shop drawings,
for coordination, and to provide equipment as UL listed.
16.4
Where any characteristics, ratings, operations, or features differ from the specified
equipment (where not equal to or superior to the characteristics, ratings, operations, and
features of the specifications and specified equipment), circle, highlight, or otherwise
clearly designate and identify the specific differences.
16.5
In the event that shop drawings are not acceptable to the engineer (including as provided
below for conditional approval), submit acceptable shop drawings within seven (7) days of
notification.
16.6
Approval of shop drawings, including approval of substitutions, is conditional that there is
no cost change to the contract, unless specifically indicated on the shop drawings submittal
and corresponding approval.
16.7
Approval of shop drawings is conditional upon the contractor fully and completely
complying with all review comments by the owner, architect, and engineer. Where the
contractor fails to or is unable to fully and completely comply with every review comment,
then the shop drawings are disapproved (whether or not they are stamped or noted as
"approved" in any manner in any review comment) and must be resubmitted as within
seven (7) days (as indicated above). Immediately upon receipt of shop drawing review
comments, the contractor is responsible for carefully reviewing all comments in detail and
for complying with comments. Where unable to fully satisfy any comment or where the
contractor takes exception to any comment, revise and resubmit acceptable shop drawings
(or, where taking exception, notify the engineer in writing) within seven (7) days. Where
the contractor fails to comply with these requirements (including resubmitting/notifying
within the seven (7) day period specified), the contractor shall provide acceptable
equipment meeting all specified requirements and all review comments (including
removing unacceptable equipment [if installed] and replacing with acceptable equipment)
at no cost to the owner.
16.8
Do not release equipment until shop drawings are approved. The electrical contractor is
responsible for all changes where equipment is released before approval and/or where
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 12
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
equipment does not comply with all approval conditions.
17.
18.
16.9
In addition to the quantity of shop drawings submitted for approval (see above), submit one
(1) copy of approved shop drawings to the general contractor, the mechanical contractor,
and each other contractor and trade for review and coordination. The electrical contractor
is not required to submit copies direct to subcontractors or vendors to other contractors (this
is the other contractors' responsibility). The electrical contractor is responsible for all
changes and other costs where the electrical contractor fails to submit shop drawings to
other parties for coordination.
16.10
Obtain copies of all shop drawings relating in any way to electrical work from all other
contractors, subcontractors, and trades. Review shop drawings and coordinate with
electrical work. Notify the architect and engineer immediately where discrepancies are
found. The electrical contractor is responsible for all changes and other costs where the
electrical contractor fails to obtain shop drawings or fails to coordinate shop drawing
information. Approval of other trades submittals by the architect or engineers (or lack of
review by the architect or engineers) does not relieve the electrical contractor of the
responsibility to review other trades shop drawings in detail and for coordination.
16.11
No extra claims or compensation shall be granted under any circumstance associated with
any party's failure or delay in properly submitting, transmitting, obtaining, reviewing,
and/or coordinating shop drawings.
SAMPLES
17.1
Submit (see the section of these specifications "Summary of Submissions") samples of
materials and equipment for approval only where specifically requested by the owner,
architect, or engineer. Submit samples along with complete catalog data, installation
instructions, operating and maintenance (O&M) information, etc. specifically applying to
the samples submitted, to facilitate proper evaluate the quality of the sample. Specifically
designate and identify each sample as to the service and location where each sample is to
be used on the project.
17.2
Submit samples within 30 days of the engineer's request, except where the sample is
ancillary to a substitution. Where samples are ancillary to a substitution, submit samples
within seven (7) days of the engineer's request.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS, MANUALS, AND DEMONSTRATION
18.1
Prepare and submit (see the section of these specifications "Summary of Submissions") asbuilt record drawings showing conditions exactly as installed.
A.
Indicate the exact locations and elevations of all equipment and devices and
underground, concealed, and hidden work (including raceways, junction and pull
boxes, etc.).
B.
Indicate exact layout, connections, and conductor routing for all grounding.
C.
Indicate all substitutions, including marked-up lighting fixture/luminaire schedule
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 13
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
and symbol list as required.
18.2
During the progress of work, maintain an accurate record of all deviations, variations,
changes, and corrections from the layouts shown on the drawings. Maintain this
information on a "record working" set of drawings and specifications kept at the job site.
18.3
Upon completion of work, incorporate all information from the "record working" drawings
onto a "marked-up as-built" set of drawings. Submit the "marked-up as-built" drawings to
the engineer for review, comment, and approval.
18.4
Following approval of "marked-up as-built" drawings, prepare "final as-built" drawings
utilizing the latest version of Autocad (or compatible) software. Submit one (1) set of
"final as-built" drawing originals, sets of "final as-built" blueprint drawings as directed in
the general construction specifications (but in no case less than three (3) sets), and "final asbuilt" drawings in disk format. Submit photocopies of all panel circuit directories with
"final as-built" drawings.
18.5
Upon completion of work and following approval of "marked-up as-built" drawings,
incorporate all information from the "record working" specifications onto "final (markedup) as-built" specifications. Submit sets of "final as-built" specifications as directed in the
general construction specifications (but in no case less than three (3) sets).
18.6
Submit operating and maintenance (O&M) manuals for all new equipment furnished as part
of this contract. Provide O&M manuals including installation, operating, and maintenance
instructions for the equipment. Wherever "proof-of-purchase" is required as part of any
manufacturer's warranty (whether manufacturer's warranty is specified or not), submit with
O&M manuals. Where any proof-of-purchase is required but not submitted (or where
insufficient information is submitted), the electrical contractor is fully responsible and
liable for providing the warranty. Submit all O&M manuals bound together in a single
three-ring binder (one binder per set of manuals) including a table of contents. Submit
quantity of sets as directed in the general construction specifications, but in no case less
than three (3) sets.
18.7
Submit O&M Manuals specifically including the following for all equipment.
18.8
19.
A.
Manufacturer recommended maintenance schedule.
B.
Estimated man-hours and material cost to perform scheduled maintenance.
C.
Manufacturer's complete list of spare parts.
Explain and demonstrate the complete electrical system and all work installed by the
electrical contractor to the owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Demonstration is
to instruct owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of systems as well as to
prove to the owner correct and adequate operation of all parts of the electrical system.
Provide a demonstration period of one (1) full working day for the general electrical
installation. Conduct all demonstrations at the project site and after all systems are fully
operational.
SUMMARY OF SUBMISSIONS
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 14
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
19.1
Submit items as indicated elsewhere in the specifications (applicable sections are shown for
convenience) and as summarized as follows. Information below indicates relative schedule
of submission.
19.2
Submit within ten (10) days of receiving notice to proceed; resubmit within seven (7) days
of notification:
A.
B.
C.
19.3
Submit within 30 days of request (within seven (7) days for substitutions):
A.
19.4
Scope of work changes, w/ breakdowns (see 16100-11)
Test results, abnormal/failing only (16100-15)
Short circuit and coordination report (where specified for adjustable circuit breakers)
Submit upon substantial completion of the project:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
20.
Samples (see 16100-18)
Submit during the project as applicable (refer to respective specifications sections for
conditions and schedule of submission):
A.
B.
C.
19.5
Permits, licenses, certificates (see 16100-9)
Schedule of work (see 16100-10)
Shop drawings (see 16100-17)
Approved inspection certificate(s) (see 16100-9)
Written manufacturers' warranties (see 16100-14)
Test results (see 16100-15)
As-built drawings (see 16100-19)
O&M manuals (see 16100-19)
Spare parts (where specified elsewhere)
SAFETY
20.1
Perform all work and work practices in strict accordance with all applicable local, state, and
federal codes, standards, regulations, and requirements including OSHA, state labor and
industry, the N.E.C., ASTM, the National Electrical Safety Code, NFPA, etc..
20.2
The term "live" means "energized or capable of being energized at any time for any reason,
either intentionally or accidentally".
20.3
Suitably protect all live equipment against accidental contact at all times. Install and
maintain covers on all live equipment. Where covers are not installed, provide suitable
insulating barriers at all live parts. Suitable barriers include arc-resistant NEMA GPO-2 or
GPO-3 and UL 94 V-0 electrical grade fiberglass reinforced epoxy compound sheets,
rubber insulating blankets, suitable thermoplastic insulating materials, etc. as per OSHA,
ASTM, and the N.E.C.. Cardboard and similar materials are not acceptable. Provide
OSHA approved signs reading "Danger: High Voltage" at locations of live parts and on
doors/gates leading to rooms/fences/areas containing the equipment and keep doors/gates
locked at all times.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 15
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
21.
20.4
Protect and enclose equipment operating at over 600 V at all times. Equipment is
considered adequately protected where all requirements of N.E.C. Articles 110.30 through
110.34 (including all other articles and codes referenced therein) are satisfied at all times.
Where equipment must be exposed for work, or where work is to be performed around
normally exposed live parts, provide suitable insulating barriers (suitable for the voltage
involved), warning signs, and door/gate locking, etc. as required above. Provide OSHA
approved warning tape (reading "Danger: High Voltage") around the equipment and all
code required working spaces at equipment.
20.5
When working on equipment or wiring, properly label and use lockout devices and tags (in
accordance with OSHA requirements) to prevent unauthorized or accidental energizing of
equipment and wiring.
20.6
Perform all work in or associated with confined spaces (including manholes, hand holes,
vaults, crawl spaces, etc.) in accordance with all safety codes referenced above. Obtain
appropriate permits where required by the above codes and/or the owner.
20.7
When working in, on, or near areas subject to vehicular traffic (including public and private
roadways, driveways, parking lots, etc. and including loading and unloading
equipment/materials in the vicinity of traffic), perform all work and provide appropriate
work zone traffic control in accordance with all safety codes referenced above as well as
state department of transportation regulations, requirements, and recommendations. Where
requested by the owner, architect, or engineer, submit a traffic control plan detailing
proposed work zone traffic control and associated safety procedures.
20.8
Perform the following in complete accordance with applicable University standard
procedures. Exercise appropriate care when performing "hot work" (including, but not
limited to cutting, welding, brazing, grinding, etc.). Promptly remove all debris on a daily
basis. Stage and store only materials required for the day's work, except as otherwise
permitted by University standard procedures. Exercise all appropriate fire safety.
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
21.1
The electrical contractor is not responsible for and is not required to remove equipment
contaminated by hazardous materials, except as indicated below. For this specification
section, the term "hazardous material(s)" applies to any materials classified by federal,
state, or local authorities as environmental or health hazards (including, but not limited to,
polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's), asbestos, mercury, radioactive materials, etc.). For this
specification section, the term "contaminated" (in any form) means "contains or is
contaminated by hazardous material(s)".
21.2
The electrical contractor (and all applicable subcontractors) shall be fully insured for
performing all work related to, on, and around contaminated equipment and for all work
specifically shown in this specifications section as by the electrical contractor. Submit
proof of insurance to the owner as part of or along with other applicable insurance
submittals (as per Division 1 General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, and Special
Contract Requirements).
21.3
Immediately notify the owner if any electrical equipment or wiring to be removed or
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 16
SECTION 16100
GENERAL ELECTRICAL
modified as part of this project is contaminated or suspected as contaminated. Identify all
areas where disruptive work is proposed (including, but not limited to, excavation, cutting,
penetration, drilling, etc.) in advance of performing work so the owner can arrange to have
any necessary abatement completed, include all costs and schedule time accordingly. No
consideration, claims, charges, or compensation will be granted under any circumstance for
any delays resulting from abatement of hazardous materials.
21.4
When performing work with, on, and around equipment contaminated or suspected as
contaminated, assume that the equipment is contaminated until/unless proven otherwise by
testing. Exercise care and suitably guard and protect equipment at all times from the start
of work until the equipment is either proven by testing as not contaminated or is removed
from the project site.
21.5
When removing existing luminaires containing ballasts (fluorescent, H.I.D., etc.), consider
all ballasts as being contaminated by PCB's, unless ballast factory nameplate specifically
indicates that the ballast does not contain PCB's. The electrical contractor shall completely
disconnect, remove, and dispose of all ballasts not contaminated by PCB's. For ballasts
considered as contaminated by PCB's, remove ballasts from luminaires, cut all ballast
wiring leads within 51 mm (2") of the ballasts, and neatly place ballasts in owner furnished
drum containers (i.e. 55-gallon). The owner shall dispose of PCB contaminated ballasts in
drum containers. For luminaires (with ballasts considered as contaminated by PCB's)
where there are signs of ballast rupture or leakage, carefully remove the entire luminaire
and turn over to the owner (owner shall dispose of luminaire where PCB leakage is
suspected).
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
GENERAL ELECTRICAL 16100 - 17
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16200 - ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
INDEX
DESCRIPTION
PARAGRAPH #
PAGE #
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
16200-2
INSTALLATION
2
16200-2
GROUNDING
3
16200-3
WIRING METHODS
4
16200-4
WIRING INSTALLATION
5
16200-6
FASTENERS, SUPPORTS, AND HANGERS
6
16200-8
CHASES, RECESSES, AND OPENINGS
7
16200-9
CUTTING, PATCHING, FIRE-STOPPING, AND PAINTING
8
16200-10
SLEEVES
9
16200-11
FLASHING AND ACCESS PANELS
10
16200-11
LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS
11
16200-11
ELECTRIC SERVICE
12
16200-13
UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
13
16200-13
DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, RELOCATION, AND RE-FEEDING
14
16200-14
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 1
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16200 - ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
1.
2.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1
The applicable requirements and conditions of specifications section "General Provisions"
of specifications division 16100, General Electrical, are hereby made an integral part of this
section.
1.2
The work governed by these specifications includes but is not limited to that as defined in
specifications section "Scope of Work" of specifications division 16100, General Electrical.
INSTALLATION
2.1
Provide all equipment and materials in accordance with the recommendations and
instructions of the respective manufacturers. This includes recommendations and
instructions for equipment furnished by other trades or the owner and installed or connected
by the electrical contractor.
2.2
Perform all work in an approved first class and workmanlike manner and conform to the
best practices of the trade and to all requirements of the N.E.C..
2.3
Protect and preserve all existing, new and proposed raceways, wiring, materials, devices,
luminaires, and equipment from corrosion, dirt, paint, building materials, acid, solvents,
chemicals, water, ice, tools, overload, freezing, heat, combustion, theft, damage, abrasion,
inadvertent removal, improper installation (including where installation has not been
completely or properly coordinated), conflicts, interference, vandalism, etc. at all times.
Repair or replace all equipment and materials lost or damaged as the result of inadequate
protection. Cap and plug open ends of raceways and equipment during construction until
wiring is ready to be installed.
2.4
Coordinate with and obtain approval of the owner and architect for all exact locations of all
outlets, raceways, materials, and equipment. Where requested by the owner, architect, or
engineer, submit sketches/drawings of proposed raceway routing, equipment locations, and
any other details of installation specifically requested.
2.5
Completely coordinate installation and routing of all wiring, materials, and equipment in
the field and with shop drawing information of all trades prior to rough in of wiring or
releasing equipment. Completely inspect equipment and materials upon receiving in the
field (including equipment received by other trades where installed or connected to by the
electrical contractor) and verify exact installation requirements and details (compare to
installation and routing as coordinated above) prior to installing, preparing installation,
modifying, or handling in any manner which would restrict the ability to return material or
equipment in the event of potential installation complications.
2.6
Cooperate and fully coordinate all work with the work of all other trades, contractors,
subcontractors, and the owner, including work as part of other contracts and projects related
to and/or in the vicinity of the specified work. Coordinate the locations of pipes, ducts,
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 2
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
structure, reinforcement, foundation components, floor/wall/ceiling construction, raceways,
branch and distribution panels, luminaires, devices, electrical outlets, air outlets, motor
controls, and all other equipment in order to avoid conflicts, interference, or placing
services at the wrong locations. Coordinate all demolition, disconnection, removals,
relocations, extension, and re-feeding associated with existing equipment and wiring.
Coordinate with shop drawings of all trades. Install all wiring and equipment in such a way
to maintain clearance and clear access to all equipment requiring access by code or for
operating, servicing, maintaining, replacing, examining, etc.. This includes access to
electrical equipment and devices as well as mechanical, architectural, and other equipment
including, but not limited to, valves, dampers, sensors, meters, gauges, clean-outs, access
doors and panels, operating mechanisms, motors, pumps, fans, air handling and other
mechanical equipment, etc.. This specifically includes coordinating wall mounted
electrical devices and outlets with wall mounted HVAC equipment (including baseboard,
radiation, cabinets, etc.).
3.
2.7
Provide all work indicated on the electrical drawings and electrical specifications but
involving disciplines of other trades performed by the electrical contractor (or applicable
sub-contractors to the electrical contractor), unless specifically indicated otherwise.
Perform work in complete accordance with all general construction specifications
applicable to the work. This applies to all work including, but not limited to, cutting and
patching, excavation, backfill, surface restoration (including paving), concrete, metal
fabrication, fire stopping and sealing, painting, etc..
2.8
Properly isolate all materials and equipment against the transmission of vibration or noise
to, from, or between any parts of the building.
2.9
The electrical contractor is fully responsible for determining and verifying all exact details
of installation. Where installation details or similar information is shown on the drawings
or is otherwise forwarded to the contractor (including during construction), the information
represents the minimum criteria required and serves as a guide to the contractor but does
not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for determining and verifying installation
details.
GROUNDING
3.1
Completely ground and bond all equipment in strict and complete accordance with all
applicable requirements of the N.E.C..
3.2
Ground and bond all metal raceways, cable armor, cladding, and shielding, supports,
transformers, cabinets, cable trays, service equipment, and the neutral conductor in
accordance with the requirements of the N.E.C..
3.3
Provide insulated grounding conductors run with all wiring.
3.4
Install all metallic raceways in such a way to provide a continuous grounding path without
the use of the insulated grounding conductor required above. Include all bonding jumpers
and conductors (in addition to the insulated conductor required above) as required for
flexible conduit, loosely jointed raceways, etc.. Provide suitable raceway fittings for a
completely grounded raceway system as required, including the use of fittings approved
and/or UL listed for grounding, grounding bushings, grounding lock nuts, etc..
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 3
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
3.5
Provide all grounding and bonding connections as per specifications section "Grounding
Materials" of specifications division 16300, Electrical Materials.
3.6
Wherever connections to grounding electrodes or electrode systems are required by code,
connect and bond to the following.
3.7
4.
A.
Provide new driven (made) grounding rod electrodes, for all services and where
equipment is located on or below the second floor of a building.
B.
Connect to the domestic cold water piping system and any other metal piping system
where required by the N.E.C. (excluding piping prohibited from bonding/grounding
by the N.E.C.).
C.
Connect to the structural steel and/or metal building frame, where applicable.
D.
Connect to all existing grounding electrode systems.
Wherever the following is installed as part of this project (including where installed by
other contractors), connect and bond to the grounding electrode system.
A.
Ground new metal piping systems where required by the N.E.C..
B.
Ground new structural steel and/or metal building framing.
3.8
Where driven (made) grounding rod electrodes are installed, provide grounding resistance
not exceeding one (1) ohm. Verify proper ground resistance by testing as per the section
"Testing" of this specifications division 16100. Where measured resistance exceeds the
maximum value, install additional ground rod(s) at the location and/or set ground rods in
suitable UL and N.E.C. approved chemical ground enhancement material as required to
obtain proper values, include all costs in bid.
3.9
Detail all grounding on as-built record documents.
3.10
Wherever new wiring or equipment is installed at or near roofs of buildings with lightning
protection system(s), bond wiring/equipment to the existing lightning protection system(s)
as required by lightning protection codes and standards.
WIRING METHODS
4.1
The wiring methods in this section apply to all systems (including power, lighting,
emergency, control, telecommunications, data, fire alarm, sound, security, CCTV, and any
other system), unless specifically indicated otherwise.
4.2
In finished areas, run all wiring hidden or concealed in/behind ceilings, walls, and floors,
include all cutting and patching as required. In unfinished areas, wiring may run exposed.
Run exposed wiring following building lines. Do not run raceways under the slab or
embedded in concrete walls or concrete floors unless specifically indicated otherwise or
impossible to otherwise run wiring.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 4
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
4.3
Utilize steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) for all wiring unless indicated otherwise.
4.4
Steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC) may be utilized for all wiring except conditions
indicated above as requiring only steel RMC
4.5
Where permitted by code, electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used for interior branch
wiring in locations not subject to abuse or injury. Utilize steel RMC for panel feeders and
conditions indicated above as requiring only steel RMC.
4.6
Utilize flexible conduit for flexible connections to motors, equipment requiring flexibility,
equipment subject to vibration (including transformers), and where required for adjustment,
in lengths not to exceed 1.8 m (6'0"). Flexible conduit may be utilized for flexible
connections to luminaires only where wiring is concealed or located above accessible
ceilings (in lengths not to exceed 1.8 m (6'0")). Exposed visible flexible conduit is not
permitted for luminaires, except adjustable luminaires. Flexible conduit may be used
where existing walls are fished in lengths not to exceed the portion in the wall plus 0.9 m
(3'0"). Utilize liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC, "Sealtite"), unless indicated
otherwise. Utilize only LFMC in damp, wet, and outdoor locations, mechanical rooms, and
for N.E.C. Hazardous Classified Locations (except as indicated below). Utilize flexible
metal conduit (FMC, "Greenfield") in dry locations only (except conditions indicated above
as requiring only LFMC). Where flexible connections are required in N.E.C. Class I,
Division 1 Hazardous Classified Locations, utilize only flexible unions UL listed as
suitable for the application. Flexible conduit/fittings of any type are not permitted as a
substitute for conduit bends or offsets under any circumstance.
4.7
"Romex" nonmetallic-sheathed cable (type "NM"), "BX" armored cable (type "AC"), and
metal clad cable (type "MC") are not permitted under any circumstance. Polyvinyl chloride
rigid nonmetallic conduit (PVC RNC), electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT), liquidtight
flexible nonmetallic conduit (types LFNC-A and LFNC-B), high-density polyethylene
(HDPE) conduit, type "A" nonmetallic conduit, and type "EB" nonmetallic conduit are not
permitted under any circumstance. Wiremold style Surface raceway are not permitted
under any circumstance.
4.8
Provide all wiring within air handling plenum spaces in complete accordance with the
N.E.C.. Provide wiring methods utilizing metal conduit raceways (as permitted by the
specifications) only.
4.9
Provide all systems wiring (fire alarm, clock, intercom, sound, security, etc.) in raceway.
Open runs of cables of any type are not permitted for the wiring of any of these systems.
4.10
Except as indicated otherwise on the drawings, 21 mm (3/4") raceways are the minimum
permitted. No raceway smaller than 21 mm (3/4") is permitted under any circumstance
(except where specifically approved in writing by the owner and engineer for the individual
condition encountered). Where luminaires, devices, or equipment have factory knockouts
or hubs smaller than 21 mm (3/4") size (or smaller than conduit sizes specified on the
drawings), provide suitable reducing conduit fittings or provide field knockouts at
equipment to match conduit size. Where the contractor installs conduits smaller than the
minimum size (without prior written approval), the contractor shall remove the conduit and
install new conduit of the specified size at no cost to the owner.
4.11
Except as indicated otherwise on the drawings, #12 A.W.G. conductors are the minimum
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 5
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
permitted for power and lighting and #14 A.W.G. conductors are the minimum permitted
for control and signal systems. #10 A.W.G. conductors are the minimum permitted for
outdoor wiring, night lighting circuit wiring, and emergency power and lighting wiring.
#10 A.W.G. conductors are the minimum permitted where circuits exceed 23 m (75'0") for
120/208 V circuits or exceed 46 m (150'0") for 277/480 V circuits, measured to the center
of the load.
5.
4.12
Provide a separate neutral conductor with each branch circuit where a neutral is required or
indicated on the drawings. Multi-wire branch circuits with a shared common neutral are
not permitted, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. Utilize multi-wire
branch circuits with a shared common neutral conductor for lighting controlled by "dual
switching" where the lighting is connected to two (2) circuits.
4.13
Multiple branch circuits may be installed in the same raceway (including surface raceways)
where permitted by code and provided all of the following conditions (A through D below)
are met.
A.
Apply appropriate N.E.C. de-rating factors and adjust conductor sizes accordingly.
Wiring sizes indicated on the drawings are based on each circuit run in an individual
raceway (and are not adjusted for de-rating factors), except where multiple branch
circuits in a common raceway are specifically indicated on the drawings (wiring is
adjusted for applicable de-rating factors in this case, but only for the specific wiring
combination shown on the drawings).
B.
Provide no conductor (after de-rating adjustment) exceeding #10 A.W.G., except
grounding conductors as provided below (or as otherwise specifically approved in
writing by the engineer).
C.
Common equipment grounding conductors are permitted in lieu of individual
equipment grounding conductors for each individual circuit. Provide minimum
single equipment grounding conductor size two (2) standard wire sizes larger than the
size as determined in accordance with the N.E.C.. Provide isolated grounding
conductors (where required) individually for each circuit and in addition to common
equipment grounding conductors.
D.
Provide raceway fill (after de-rating adjustment) not exceeding 30% (provide
maximum number of conductors permitted not exceeding 75% of the maximum
number allowed by Code [i.e. refer to N.E.C. Chapter 9 and Appendix C] to allow for
future wiring). Adjust minimum conduit size to maintain 30% maximum fill.
WIRING INSTALLATION
5.1
Securely support and fasten all raceways, cables, outlets, boxes, equipment, etc. in place as
required by the N.E.C.. Support at intervals as required by the N.E.C., but in no case
exceeding 3.0 m (10'0"). Refer to the section of this specification "Fastenings, Supports,
and Hangers" for information.
5.2
Where any run of wiring passes vertically through more than one (1) floor level (including
where installed in open vertical chases), support at every floor level. For conduits 63 mm
(2.5") and larger, utilize only suitable pipe riser clamps (B-Line #B3373 series), suitable
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 6
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
wall bracket offset pipe clamps (National Pipe Hanger Corp. (NPHC) figure #430 series),
or engineer approved heavy duty steel brackets (fabricated of not less than 6.5 mm (1/4")
thick steel and of type, design, and arrangement suitable for the specific application and
weights involved) for these floor level supports. Conduit clamps and strut type supports are
not acceptable for this application. Equal equipment as manufactured by B-Line, Erico,
and NPHC shall be considered.
5.3
Make all changes in direction of 27 mm (1") and larger conduits with standard elbows or
case metal fittings. Fabricate field-made bends and offsets in conduit with suitable
hickey/conduit-bending machine. Make conduit bends of the long radius type without
kinks, flattening or crushing. Do not install crushed or deformed raceways. Avoid trapped
raceways in damp and wet locations. Exercise care to prevent the accumulation of plaster,
dirt, or trash in raceways, boxes, fittings and equipment during the course of construction.
Entirely free clogged or obstructed raceways or replace raceways
5.4
Provide raceway ends cut squarely and reamed. Provide raceway installation (including
pull boxes as required) so there is no more than a total of 360 degrees of bends in any run
of raceway. Provide pull boxes at intervals not greater than every 30 m (100'0"), unless
otherwise indicated on drawings.
5.5
Maintain a separation of not less than 155 mm (6") between all raceways and hot water
lines, steam lines, and any other surface with temperature exceeding 104 degrees F (40
degrees C), whenever possible. When not possible to maintain the 155 mm (6") separation,
provide insulation pipe covering on the electrical raceways.
5.6
Provide a suitable insulating or grounding type (as required) bushing on each conduit
terminating in a pressed steel box and for each conduit stub. Bushing is not required where
conduit terminates in a suitable conduit connector/termination fitting which includes an
integral bushing or which provides smoothly rounded surface suitable and approved for use
without a bushing.
5.7
Wherever steel RMC terminates in boxes or enclosures, utilize suitable threaded conduit
hubs. Provide conduit hubs including insulated throats and providing positive grounding
and a weatherproof seal. Utilize Appleton #HUB series hubs, or approved equal. Separate
hubs are not required where boxes or enclosures include integral threaded hubs.
5.8
Wherever raceways pass across structure expansion joints, provide suitable conduit
expansion fittings. Where expansion fittings are not UL listed for grounding, provide
external flexible copper grounding strap. Wherever expansion fittings are installed, provide
a suitable junction box located not farther than 7.6 m (25'0") from the expansion fitting
location. Coil suitable slack conductors in this junction box to allow functioning of
expansion fittings.
5.9
Where metal raceway is installed in contact with or entering earth or concrete in outdoor,
wet, or damp locations, coat raceway with engineer approved coal tar or epoxy based
corrosion resistant coating (3M, Benjamin Moore, Carboline, or approved equal).
5.10
Running threads are not permitted.
5.11
Do not run wiring horizontally across floors, to avoid tripping hazards and facilitate
cleaning floors.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 7
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
6.
5.12
Install wiring in such a manner to avoid infiltrating water into the wiring system (during or
after construction). Install wiring in such a manner so any water which does infiltrate
cannot become trapped or accumulate and cannot drain into electrical or other equipment.
5.13
Install exposed wiring (including visible wiring and wiring in accessible ceiling spaces or
other accessible locations) parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or
intersections of vertical planes and floors or ceilings.
5.14
Install concealed wiring (except as provided above for wiring in accessible spaces) as
straight and direct as possible. Detail routing of all concealed wiring on record (as-built)
documents.
5.15
Provide all splices only in suitable code-sized junction or outlet boxes. Splices are not
permitted in any type of conduit body under any circumstance.
5.16
Do not install any wires in raceways until all raceway work is completed and closed in such
a manner as to prevent the possibility of water or other foreign matter entering raceways.
5.17
Wherever empty or spare raceways are installed, provide suitable pull wires with
identification tags securely attached to each end. Where empty or spare raceways do not
terminate in boxes or enclosures, provide suitable conduit caps. Utilize only conduit fitting
type caps appropriate for the conduit involved. Rubber and plastic conduit plugs, duct
sealing compounds, and tape are not acceptable.
FASTENERS, SUPPORTS, AND HANGERS
6.1
Provide all fastenings, supports, hangers, clamps, and anchors of the type made for the
specific purpose for which they are used.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
6.2
Utilize wood screws for fastening to wood.
Utilize toggle bolts or bolt fastenings for fastening to hollow tile, terra cotta, hollow
masonry units, lath, and similar construction.
Utilize machine screws/bolts with nuts for fastening to structural steel.
Utilize metallic expansion shield anchors and machine screws/bolts for fastening to
concrete, brick, and solid masonry. Wooden plugs with screws and plastic expansion
shield anchors are not acceptable.
Threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and provided with washers and nuts
may be used in lieu of expansion anchors, machine screws, and wood screws under
the applications indicated above.
Utilize engineer approved adhesive fastening on roofing areas (mechanical fasteners
are not be permitted to be driven into roofing surfaces).
Threaded C-clamps are not permitted.
To prevent swaying, vibrating and/or sagging, rigidly and firmly install raceway and cable
(where cable wiring methods are permitted elsewhere in this specification).
A.
Support with malleable or wrought steel clamps, hangers, or with fabricated "strut
type" supports. Provide "strut type" supports as B-Line, Kindorf, Power-Strut,
Unistrut, or approved equal (steel only, aluminum is not acceptable unless
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 8
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
6.3
Provide all supports and fasteners of the following materials, unless indicated otherwise.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
7.
specifically indicated on the drawings).
Stamped metal one-hole and two-hole straps are permitted to secure EMT and cable
wiring methods permitted by the specifications in exposed and concealed dry indoor
locations not subject to abuse or injury only.
Stamped metal wrap around "Mineralax" type hangers are permitted to secure EMT
and cable wiring methods permitted by the specifications in hidden and concealed
dry indoor locations not subject to abuse or injury only. "Mineralax" type hangers
are not permitted for visible exposed wiring.
Additional manufactured fastening systems specifically designed for the purpose
shall be considered to secure cable wiring methods permitted by the specifications,
but only where submitted for review and approval before commencing work.
Do not weld raceways, clamps, hangers, or straps to steel structure.
Wire (including ceiling support wires), perforated pipe straps, plastic ties, "J" hooks,
and bridle rings are not acceptable.
Utilize stainless steel for all applications, unless indicated otherwise. Utilize stainless
steel only when underground or in contact with earth or floors in outdoor areas,
mechanical rooms, kitchens, and other areas subject to the possible presence of water
on the floor/ground.
Steel protected by hot-dip or mechanical galvanizing after fabrication may be utilized
for all conditions except conditions indicated above as requiring only stainless steel.
Clean areas where galvanizing is cut or damaged and touch-up with suitable zinc
dust/zinc oxide paint.
Steel protected by pre-galvanizing before fabrication, epoxy coating, zinc electrolytic
plating, or other engineer approved corrosion resistant coating may be utilized for
interior locations not subject to abuse or injury.
Other materials providing equivalent strength and corrosion resistance to the above
shall be considered.
Supports and fasteners without corrosion protection, protected only by painting, or
protected only by oil coating are not acceptable under any circumstances.
For electrical fasteners (at conductors and all current-carrying parts), utilize only
materials and types approved by the N.E.C. and UL listed for the application.
6.4
Provide all fastening, supports, wall brackets, ceiling trapeze, and hangers as required for
the installation of all equipment and wiring. Install all fastenings, supports and hangers in
such a way and at such intervals as required by Code or otherwise required to support the
equipment. The electrical contractor is responsible for verifying that supports are adequate
for the load supported, based upon weight, stresses which may be applied to the support
(including when installing equipment, pulling wiring, or physical impacts to equipment),
vibration, etc. Submit calculations for any supports where requested by the engineer.
6.5
Where the contractor installs fasteners or supports not meeting specified requirements
(without prior written approval) the contractor shall remove the fasteners and supports and
install new fasteners and supports as specified at no cost to the owner.
CHASES, RECESSES, AND OPENINGS
7.1
Provide, including all excavation, cutting, patching, fire stopping, sealing, backfill, surface
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 9
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
restoration, and painting, all required openings, chases, and recesses in the construction for
all work.
8.
7.2
Where openings are required in new or modified structure, furnish the exact location, size,
and other necessary information to the contractor installing or modifying the structure in
ample time to have them incorporated during construction as approved by the architect and
engineer. If the electrical contractor fails to comply with these information requirements,
then the electrical contractor shall perform the necessary cutting and patching at his own
expense under the direct supervision of the general contractor.
7.3
Where openings in masonry are required, make by coring only.
7.4
Locate and provide all openings (including openings for junction and outlet boxes and
luminaires) in such a manner to maintain any required fire rating, waterproof, and sound
transmission integrity in accordance with all applicable codes and standards (including, but
not limited to IBC/BOCA, NFPA, and UL). Where boxes are located in opposite sides of
fire/sound rated walls, maintain minimum spacing between boxes as required. The general
contractor shall provide fire rated enclosures around luminaires and boxes to comply where
required to comply with fire rating requirements.
CUTTING, PATCHING, FIRE STOPPING, AND PAINTING
8.1
Perform all required cutting, patching, fire stopping, sealing, backfill, surface restoration,
and painting associated with the electrical installation. Perform in accordance with general
construction specifications and as indicated elsewhere in this specification. Coordinate all
requirements with the general contractor. This includes cutting and patching associated
with suspended ceiling tiles and grid.
8.2
Completely restore (including painting where applicable) all surfaces to match existing
condition as directed and approved by the owner, architect, and engineer.
8.3
Completely seal and fire stop all penetrations of all fire and/or smoke rated walls, floors,
ceilings and any other construction (including all construction required to be rated by any
code) to a rating matching or exceeding the fire rating of the construction. Refer to
architectural drawings and specifications for information on fire ratings of building
construction and include all costs in bid. Provide the complete installation (including fire
stopping methods and materials) complying with all applicable fire rating codes and
standards (including the N.E.C., NFPA, IBC/BOCA, and UL (including the UL "Fire
Resistance Directory").
8.4
Completely seal and weatherproof all penetrations of exterior, at or below grade, and wet
location walls and floors and roof penetrations.
8.5
Paint all exposed raceways, boxes, enclosures, etc. as directed by the owner and architect.
8.6
Provide baked enamel painted finish for all equipment and materials as directed by the
owner and architect.
8.7
Touch up damages to prime and/or finished paint coats on equipment. This includes
touching-up stainless steel surfaces to avoid superficial surface rust (i.e. at cut surfaces and
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 10
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
welds).
9.
10.
11.
SLEEVES
9.1
Provide sleeves in all construction. Provide sleeves of minimum 0.85 mm (22 ga.)
galvanized steel, sized for passing raceway/cable, and of the proper design for sealing and
flashing around the sleeves where required. Locate and set sleeves extending
approximately 51 mm (2") above floor in concealed locations, unfinished rooms, and
mechanical spaces. Locate and set all sleeves flush with finished surfaces in finished areas
unless otherwise directed by the owner and architect.
9.2
Seal the space between the raceway/cable and sleeve and between the sleeve and structure
in an engineer and code approved manner. Seal and fire-stop all penetrations to a fire
rating not less than the wall, ceiling, floor, or member penetrated. Completely seal and
waterproof all penetrations of exterior walls, roofs, mechanical room floors, or any other
area subject to weather or water.
FLASHING AND ACCESS PANELS
10.1
Base flashing is by the general contractor. Counter flashing (provide of 0.47 mm (28 ga.)
copper) is by the electrical contractor under all circumstances.
10.2
Provide access panels for all items requiring accessibility for operation and maintenance or
where required by code. Provide access panels of not less than 1.6 mm (16 ga.) steel frame
and not less than 1.9 mm (14 ga.) steel panel, with tamper-proof fasteners, and compatible
with the type of construction in which they are installed.
10.3
The electrical contractor shall furnish all access panels and the general contractor shall
install access panels under the direction of the electrical contractor.
LOCATIONS AND MOUNTING HEIGHTS
11.1
The approximate locations of luminaires, pipes, switches, radiation, receptacles, outlets and
other equipment and materials are indicated on the drawings. Provide actual locations and
mounting heights as determined by, confirmed with, and approved by the owner and
architect during field construction (prior to rough-in). Where equipment or devices are
installed without prior approval/confirmation or without prior written notification (see
below) and the location or mounting height is not acceptable to the owner and architect,
relocate the equipment and all associated wiring as directed by the owner and architect at
no cost to the owner.
11.2
Provide mounting heights complying with all applicable federal, state, and local disabled
("handicapped") access codes, standards, and requirements, including the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA).
11.3
Provide mounting heights for all equipment as follows. Utilize standard mounting heights
indicated below for all equipment, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings or otherwise
directed by the owner and architect. Where installation conditions and/or obstructions
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 11
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
make it impossible to install equipment at the standard height, the mounting height may be
adjusted as required by conditions, provided the mounting height falls within the listed
maximum and minimum heights. Notify the architect and engineer in writing of all
conditions where deviating from standard mounting heights. Provide mounting heights not
greater than the maximum mounting height and not less than the minimum mounting height
under any circumstance, unless specifically approved in writing by the owner, architect,
and engineer.
11.4
All mounting heights listed below are above finished floor (AFF), unless indicated
otherwise. Mounting heights listed as "to bottom" are measured to the lowest operable part
of the equipment or the lowest visual indicating device on the equipment. Mounting
heights listed as "to top" are measured to the highest operable part of the equipment or the
highest visual indicating device on the equipment.
Standard
Mounting Heights
Minimum
Maximum
Control Devices
Wall Switches & lighting controls
Thermostats & other controls
46" (1.17m) to ctr.
46" (1.17m) to ctr.
15" (0.38m) to bot. 48" (1.22m) to top
15" (0.38m) to bot. 48" (1.22m) to top
Receptacles and Outlets
Receptacles, tele/data, & similar *
Wall mounted telephones
18" (0.46m) to ctr.
46" (1.17m) to top
15" (0.38m) to bot. 48" (1.22m) to top
27" (0.69m) to bot. 48" (1.22m) to top
Fire Alarm Equipment
Horns/speakers/strobes/bells **
80" (2.03m) to bot.
80" (2.03m) to bot. 96" (2.43m) to bot.
All equipment mounted above counters
***
15" (0.38m) to bot. 46" (1.17m) to top
Other Equipment
Other equipment mounted on standard
electrical outlet boxes
46" (1.17m) to ctr.
15" (0.38m) to bot. 48" (1.22m) to top
Contact the engineer for any equipment not listed or similar to equipment above.
*
**
***
11.5
Specifically coordinate with any wall-mounted radiation, if present
For ceilings lower than 90" (2.29m), mount fire alarm signaling devices 6" (0.15m) below the
ceiling. Fire alarm signaling devices may be ceiling mounted if mounted on the lowest portion of
the ceiling, if mounted not higher than 9.14 m (30'0") above the lowest floor level in the room and if
located and spaced in accordance with NFPA requirements.
Standard mounting height for above counter equipment is 6" (0.16m) above back splash or 8"
(0.20m) above counter where no back splash is present.
Where any equipment or device protrudes more than 100 mm (4") from the finished wall
surface, mount at height conforming with the ADA and in accordance with the following.
Contact the engineer where maximum and minimum heights listed above conflict with
mounting requirements summarized below.
A.
Mount so the bottom of equipment/device is 0.68 m (2'3") AFF or less.
B.
Mount so the bottom of equipment/device is 2.0 m (6'8") AFF or greater.
C.
Projecting equipment/devices are permitted mounted with the bottom between 0.68 m
(2'3") and 2.0 m (6'8") AFF where protected with a suitable warning barrier in
accordance with ADA requirements.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 12
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
D.
12.
ELECTRIC SERVICE
12.1
13.
Projecting equipment/devices are permitted mounted with the bottom between 0.68 m
(2'3") and 2.0 m (6'8") AFF without warning barrier protection only where
specifically approved in writing by the engineer.
Provide all electrical service work conforming with applicable University utility standards
and requirements.
UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
13.1
Provide complete power wiring and final connections for utilization equipment as indicated
on the drawings. This includes, but is not limited to, all mechanical, kitchen,
manufacturing, computer, medical, office, copier, fixed, and portable equipment and
apparatus. Coordinate all requirements with the contractor supplying the equipment (the
supplying contractor).
13.2
Provide connections complete and including power wiring from the electrical contractor
provided local disconnecting means to each piece of equipment. If required, pass power
wiring through supplying contractor furnished control equipment (including thermostats,
relays, timers, integrated controllers, starters, contactors, VFD's, etc.). Provide a single
point connection or multiple-point connections (by separating one larger circuit into smaller
circuits at controller and/or equipment) as required (include all costs in bid). The electrical
contractor is responsible for taking deliveries of all control equipment (which power wiring
passes through) from the supplying contractor and for mounting and passing power wiring
through this control equipment. Locate control equipment as indicated on mechanical or
other trades documents or as otherwise coordinated with and approved by the owner,
architect, mechanical engineer, and the supplying contractor.
13.3
All control wiring and associated raceway is by the supplying contractor, unless
specifically indicated on the drawings. All central/common control panels are by the
supplying contractor (power wiring is by the electrical contractor), unless specifically
indicated on the drawings.
13.4
Provide safety switches as local disconnecting means at all equipment. Provide switches
regardless of whether shown on the drawings or not. Provide switches regardless of
whether or not the equipment includes integral unit switches or circuit breakers. Provide
outdoor switches as NEMA-3R and indoor switches as NEMA-1.
13.5
For all equipment rated 120 V or 277 V and 20 A or less, provide either direct connection,
including thermal overload switch where disconnecting means is required, or suitable
receptacle where equipment is supplied with cord and plug (combination of plug and
receptacle serves as disconnecting means), include all costs in bid.
13.6
Prior to rough in of raceway or purchasing any associated electrical equipment, obtain shop
drawings from the supplying contractor and verify all requirements. The electrical
contractor is fully responsible for contacting and obtaining copies of approved shop
drawings from the supplying contractor. This includes fully coordinating the locations of
all equipment and wiring in/serving elevator shafts, pits, and machine rooms.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 13
SECTION 16200
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES
13.7
14.
Where heat tracing, control power transformers and control power supplies (rated 500 VA
and less), electric alarm bells, plug-in condensate pumps, ultraviolet germicidal lamps in
HVAC equipment, electrically operated security devices, door hardware, dampers, and
valves (including sinks/toilets/urinals), etc. are specified on mechanical, plumbing, fire
protection, or architectural drawings or specifications, provide appropriate wiring and
power connections (whether shown on electrical drawings or not). Verify and coordinate
voltage and wattage/amperes in field and provide wiring accordingly. Obtain power from a
suitable nearby branch circuit. Include all disconnecting means switches, junction boxes,
receptacles, and other equipment as required by code or manufacturer recommendations.
Provide ground fault protection (utilizing protective devices complying with the N.E.C.) for
all heat tracing.
DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, RELOCATION, AND RE-FEEDING
14.1
Disconnect, remove, relocate, and/or re-feed existing wiring and electrical equipment as
indicated on the drawings (including, but not limited to, as indicated in electrical notes on
the drawings) and otherwise provided in contract documents. Assume that all demolition
and new construction requires disconnecting, removing, relocating, and re-feeding unless
verified otherwise in the field. No consideration, claims, charges, or compensation will be
granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the scope of disconnecting, removing,
relocating, and re-feeding or as a result of failure to verify existing conditions.
14.2
Fully verify all requirements associated in any way with demolition, removals, relocations,
and re-feeding and include all costs in bid. Visit site prior to submitting bid and investigate
and verify all existing conditions (including verifying conditions above all accessible
"drop" ceilings and in accessible chases).
14.3
Prior to commencing any removals, completely verify all conditions and exact
requirements related to re-feeding, maintaining, or affecting service to existing electrical
equipment, devices, and wiring and mechanical, architectural, and other equipment and
system in the field during construction. Where equipment or wiring is removed which is
required to re-feed equipment, maintain service, or effects systems to remain, replace or
reinstall the equipment and wiring as required. No extra claims or compensation shall be
granted to re-feed, reinstall, replace, reconfigure, etc. wiring and equipment where removed
without first verifying all conditions.
14.4
Wherever electrical equipment and wiring is removed from visible finished surfaces, patch
and restore the surface to the original condition matching existing adjacent surfaces. This
includes all required painting, filling all openings (including channels and filling holes left
from supports), etc..
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL WORK PRACTICES 16200 - 14
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16300 - ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
INDEX
DESCRIPTION
PARAGRAPH #
PAGE #
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
16300-2
RACEWAYS
2
16300-2
OUTLET, SWITCH, AND JUNCTION BOXES
3
16300-3
COVER PLATES
4
16300-4
CONDUCTORS AND CABLE (600V)
5
16300-4
SPLICES, TAPS, AND CONNECTIONS
6
16300-5
GROUNDING MATERIALS
7
16300-7
IDENTIFICATION, NAMEPLATES, AND TAGS
8
16300-8
CONNECTIONS, LUGS, AND BUS BARS
9
16300-10
LOCKS AND KEYS
10
16300-11
RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES
11
16300-11
FUSES
12
16300-12
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
13
16300-12
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 1
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16300 - ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
1.
2.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1
The applicable requirements and conditions of specifications section "General Provisions"
of specifications division 16100, General Electrical, are hereby made an integral part of this
section.
1.2
The work governed by these specifications includes but is not limited to that as defined in
specifications section "Scope of Work" of specifications division 16100, General Electrical.
1.3
Provide all materials and equipment (products) as new, the best in grade and quality, and
manufactured in the United States of America with standards and ratings as specified
herein. No substitution or deviation from the materials and equipment specified is
permitted except by written permission from the engineer. Provide all materials and
equipment bearing Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) labels where applicable.
1.4
Replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the owner, any materials and equipment damaged
before or after installation.
1.5
Materials and equipment manufacturers and catalog numbers specified constitute the type
and quality of design, material, workmanship, ruggedness of construction, resistance to
vandalism, exact operating and performance characteristics, features, configuration,
dimensions, etc.. Where multiple acceptable manufacturers are shown in the drawings
and/or specifications, not all manufacturers shown may be capable of providing materials
and equipment meeting the specifications, field conditions, etc.. Showing acceptable
manufacturers indicates that the manufacturer is acceptable only if they can meet the
specifications, conditions, and requirements specific to this project. Provide materials and
equipment as required (include all costs in bid).
RACEWAYS
2.1
2.2
Steel Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC) and Steel Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
A.
Provide steel RMC as full weight, heavy wall, mild steel pipe, galvanized inside and
outside.
B.
Provide steel IMC as standard wall steel pipe; otherwise the same as steel RMC.
C.
Provide fittings for steel RMC and steel IMC of high grade steel, having rust resistant
finish, providing ample wiring space, having smooth round edges, and having full
threaded hubs.
D.
Utilize only fully threaded screw-on fittings with steel RMC and steel IMC.
Compression, set screw, bolt on, or other thread-less fittings are not permitted.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 2
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
2.3
3.
A.
Provide EMT of high grade steel and galvanized inside and outside. Enamel coating
only is not acceptable.
B.
Provide fittings for EMT of high-grade steel, having rust-resistant finish, providing
ample wiring space, having smooth round edges, and of the thread-less compression
type without set screws. Die cast, set screw, and indenter fittings are not permitted.
Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) and Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC)
A.
Provide FMC ("Greenfield") of high-grade steel, galvanized inside and outside,
having a smooth interior, and providing a continuously effective ground. Provide
fittings for FMC of high grade steel, having rust resistant finish, providing ample
wiring space, having smooth round edges, of the two (2) screw type, UL listed and
N.E.C. approved for grounding.
B.
Provide LFMC ("Sealtite") with an overall PVC sheath; otherwise the same as FMC.
Provide fittings for LFMC of high grade steel, having rust resistant finish, providing
ample wiring space, having smooth round edges, UL listed and N.E.C. approved for
grounding, and of the sealing compression gland type.
C.
Where applicable, provide FMC and LFMC manufactured to comply with N.E.C.
Article "Places of Public Assembly".
OUTLET, SWITCH, AND JUNCTION BOXES
3.1
Provide boxes of proper types and sizes as required at all outlets and junctions indicated on
the drawings and as otherwise required.
3.2
In unfinished areas, mount boxes flush or exposed. In finished areas, mount boxes flush in
ceilings, walls, and floors, include all cutting and patching as required. Where impossible
to mount flush in finished areas or where surface wiring is required to serve equipment in
finished areas, finished style (Wiremold #V5730 to #V5760 series or approved equal by
Hubbell or Thomas & Betts) surface boxes are permitted. Standard style pressed steel
boxes are not permitted in finished areas. Where the contractor installs improper boxes in
finished locations (without prior written approval), the contractor shall remove the boxes
and install new boxes flush mounted (including cutting and patching to flush mount boxes
and wiring and including replacing or reinstalling wiring) at no cost to the owner.
3.3
Utilize boxes of either unit or ganged construction and of sizes required for devices
installed. Provide boxes as galvanized pressed steel (unless indicated otherwise), not less
than 4" square, and with the proper size knockouts to facilitate wiring.
3.4
For flush mounted boxes, provide box shape permitting surfacing materials to be on
straight lines and to fit closely around the box. Provide boxes in plastered, drywall (GWB),
and similar walls, partitions, and ceilings with suitable plastering rings.
3.5
Utilize cast and/or malleable rust-resisting steel boxes for wiring in exterior, wet, or damp
locations and for exposed visible steel RMC and IMC runs. Utilize aluminum or alloy
boxes only where aluminum conduit is permitted by the specifications and used.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 3
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
4.
5.
3.6
For all boxes in floors, utilize only boxes specifically designed, N.E.C. approved, and UL
listed for floor installation. Provide as required to maintain fire rating of the floor.
3.7
Provide all boxes for lighting outlets with studs of a size suitable for the weight of the
luminaire supported (in no case less than 10 mm (3/8")). Provide the stud of integral
construction with the box or of the type inserted from the back of the box. Studs held to the
box with bolts to support luminaire weight are not permitted.
3.8
100 mm (4") diameter "octagon" boxes are not acceptable, except under the following
conditions. Octagon boxes are permitted in conjunction with luminaire mounting studs
where studs are required above. Octagon boxes are permitted where required to mount
equipment where equipment is not compatible with square or ganged type boxes (including
the use of adapter rings on square boxes).
3.9
Secure boxes firmly in place and set true, square, and flat or flush (as applicable) with
finished surfaces. Keep all unused knockouts closed or close with suitable threaded plugs
(for threaded knockouts or hubs) or knockout seals (for unthreaded knockouts). Install
flush mounted boxes so the covers are flush with the finished surface.
3.10
Provide all boxes with cover plates as specified below.
COVER PLATES
4.1
Provide cover plates for switches, receptacles, outlet and junction boxes, and other devices
of 1.0 mm (0.04") thick metal with paint finish or of non-magnetic stainless steel (as
directed by the owner and architect, include costs in bid for painted or non-magnetic
stainless steel), unless indicated otherwise.
4.2
Utilize suitable pressed galvanized steel code gauge raised covers for exposed wiring
methods in unfinished areas and accessible hidden locations. Flat pressed galvanized steel
code gauge covers may be utilized on junction boxes (where devices are not installed) or
for ganged devices (three (3) gang or greater only). Tile and/or plastering rings style
covers are not permitted for exposed wiring methods under any circumstance.
4.3
Utilize cast rust-resisting steel or #302 stainless steel covers with gaskets for boxes in wet,
damp, or exterior locations or other locations where cast steel boxes are utilized.
4.4
Provide suitable blank covers on all unused boxes and boxes for future use (including
boxes where devices are not installed at the time that electrical work is completed;
specifically including telephone/data outlets where jacks and covers are not installed).
CONDUCTORS AND CABLE (600 V)
5.1
Provide all wiring (for all systems) utilizing multiple single conductors in raceway, unless
indicated otherwise. Conductor sizes indicated in the specifications and on the drawings
are the minimum that will be accepted. Where the contractor installs conductors smaller
than the minimum size, the contractor shall remove conductors and install new conductors
of the specified size at no cost to the owner.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 4
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
6.
5.2
Provide all conductors (including conductors in cables, where permitted) as 600 V, having
flame retardant, heat resistant, and moisture resistant insulation, and marked in accordance
with UL and the N.E.C.. Unless indicated otherwise, provide all conductors identified both
as type "THHN" and as type "THWN" ("THHN/THWN"), rated 90 degrees C for dry and
damp locations and rated 75 degrees C for wet locations. Conductors identified as type
"XHHW" (in lieu of type "THHN/THWN") are permitted only where conductors are of the
compact stranded type (type "XHHW" is not permitted for solid conductors or for standard
concentric or compressed stranded conductors). Provide all conductors for all systems of a
type suitable for installing in dry, damp and wet locations. Conductors suitable for dry
locations only and conductors suitable for dry and damp locations only are not acceptable
(except as specifically otherwise provided for plenum rated systems cables).
5.3
Provide all conductors of soft drawn copper wire of 98% conductivity. Aluminum (AL)
conductors are not acceptable, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings.
5.4
Where permitted elsewhere in this specification, provide metal clad cable (type "MC")
having interlocked steel or aluminum cladding and having conductors as specified above,
including an insulated grounding conductor. Provide conductors #10 A.W.G. and smaller
as solid and conductors #6 A.W.G and larger as stranded. Conductors #8 A.W.G. may be
solid or stranded. Provide type "MC" cable UL listed and N.E.C. approved to provide an
acceptable grounding path. Provide fittings for type "MC" cable of suitable pressure
pad/clamp type, high grade steel, having rust resistant finish, providing ample wiring space,
having smooth round edges, and having full threaded hubs. Fittings utilizing set screws are
not acceptable. "Snap-in" fittings of any kind (including, but not limited to, fittings
designed to fasten in knockouts or hold cable with spring tension, fittings without treaded
hubs, and fittings designed to be installed without the use of tools) are not acceptable.
Install type "MC" cable in complete accordance with N.E.C. Article 330. Where permitted
by the N.E.C. (including Article 604), UL listed manufactured wiring systems consisting of
cables identified as type "MC" may be utilized wherever specifications allow the use of
type "MC" cables.
SPLICES, TAPS, AND CONNECTIONS
6.1
Make all splices, taps, and connections at locations indoor and above ground only. Splices,
taps, and connections are not permitted below grade (including below any floor level where
the floor is in direct contact with earth, i.e. basement slabs, slabs on grade, etc.), or where
subject to being submerged under any circumstance. Route raceways and wiring as
required and include all costs in bid. Where below grade splices/taps are installed by the
contractor, the contractor shall remove the raceways, wiring, splices, and taps and install
new raceways and wiring in such a manner to completely avoid below grade splices/taps at
no cost to the owner.
6.2
Perform all splices/taps in suitable code sized outlet and junction boxes only, not in
raceways, conduit bodies, or equipment cabinets. Clean each strand of conductors carefully
before connecting.
6.3
Where connecting to existing aluminum wiring, utilize only suitable crimp-on compression
connectors/lugs. Bolted pressure type connectors/lugs are not acceptable under any
circumstance. Where aluminum wiring terminates in factory installed bolted pressure lugs
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 5
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
at equipment, utilize suitable crimp-on compression adapters (Ilsco #CPM, #ACM, and
#ACO types or approved equal).
6.4
Insulation piercing type splices, taps, and connections of any kind are not permitted under
any circumstance (including where applied after removing insulation).
6.5
Provide connections at equipment, apparatus, and devices as required for a complete
installation and as follows. Coordinate all requirements with equipment to connect.
6.6
A.
Where equipment includes factory "pig tails" for connections, make connections as
specified above for splices and taps.
B.
For stranded wiring #10 A.W.G. and smaller, utilize suitable crimp-on "Stacon" type
terminals. Where equipment terminals include pressure pads, wiring may terminate
directly at equipment without crimp-on terminals. Connecting stranded wiring
directly at wire binding screw terminals (i.e. wrapped around screw) is not permitted
under any circumstance.
C.
For solid wiring #8 A.W.G. and smaller, provide wiring connecting directly at
terminals.
D.
For wiring #6 A.W.G. and larger and #8 A.W.G. stranded wiring, utilize suitable
crimp-on compression lugs. Where equipment is provided with factory-installed
lugs, wiring may connect directly at factory lugs.
Where equipment (including equipment furnished by other contractors or the owner) is
provided with factory installed lugs and the factory-installed lugs do not facilitate the
specified wiring sizes, provide complete connections as required and as summarized for the
following options. Options "A" and "B" apply where the specified conductors are either
larger than the maximum conductor for the lug or smaller than the minimum conductor for
the lug. Option "C" applies where the specified conductors are larger than the maximum
conductor for the lug.
A.
Remove factory lugs and provide new suitable field-installed lugs. This option is not
permitted where removal and replacement of lugs would violate UL listing or where
factory lugs are not removable.
B.
Utilize suitable crimp-on compression reducing adapters to splice between specified
conductors and conductors compatible with factory lugs. Perform this splice within
the equipment enclosure containing the factory lugs (where there is sufficient N.E.C.
required space for splices) or in a code sized junction box outside of the equipment
enclosure (where sufficient space is not available). Install splices as indicated above
for splices and taps. Provide conductors between the reducing adapters and the
factory lugs insulated, as short as practical, and sized as per the N.E.C. and the
factory lugs. Utilize Burndy types #YSV, #YRV-L, #Y-R (Cu), and #YRB (Cu/Al)
reducing adapters, or approved equal. Coordinate exact types and sizes with actual
conductors involved.
C.
Utilize suitable crimp-on compression pin type adapters on the end of conductors
connecting in the factory-installed lugs. Utilize Burndy types #YE-P, #YE-P-FX
(Cu), #AYP, and #AYPO (Al) pin adapters, or approved equal. Coordinate exact
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 6
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
types and sizes with actual conductors and factory lug size involved.
6.7
7.
Provide splices and taps as follows.
A.
For stranded wiring #10 A.W.G. and smaller and solid wiring #8 A.W.G. and
smaller, make splices/taps by twisting conductors together and utilizing suitable
pressure type "wire nut" connectors. Tightly over-wrap with vinyl insulating tape.
Utilize UL listed wire nuts with internal coiled square metal binding spring ("all
plastic" and porcelain wire nuts are not acceptable under any circumstance). For
splices/taps in wet locations, utilize only "self-sealing" wire nuts with integral water
repellent non-hardening sealant (Ideal #60 "DB Plus" or approved equal).
B.
For wiring #6 A.W.G. and larger and for #8 A.W.G. stranded wiring, make
splices/taps utilizing suitable crimp-on compression connectors. Bolted type
connectors are not permitted, except where available crimp-on compression
connector configurations do not correspond to combinations and arrangement of
conductors to be connected. Wrap with rubber insulating tape or vinyl mastic of
type, thickness, and insulation level equal to or exceeding the original insulation then
tightly over wrap the entire assembly with vinyl insulating tape covering all rubber
tape/mastic without gaps or voids.
6.8
Splices, taps, and connections (and associated materials) as manufactured by Burndy,
Elastimold, G&W, Homac, Ideal, Ilsco, Mac Products, O-Z/Gedney, Plymouth, Raychem,
Skotch/3M, and Thomas and Betts/Blackburn shall be considered.
6.9
Refer to the section of this specification "Connections, Lugs, and Bus Bars".
GROUNDING MATERIALS
7.1
Provide all material used for grounding of non-ferrous copper. Aluminum is not
acceptable.
7.2
Provide all driven (made) grounding rod electrodes of copper or copper clad steel, 19 mm
(3/4") diameter by 3.0 m (10'0") long (minimum).
7.3
Provide all grounding conductors in accordance with the section of this specification
"Conductors and Cable (600 V)", except as follows. Grounding conductors may be
insulated or bare, except as follows. Wherever grounding conductors #6 A.W.G. and
smaller are insulated, provide insulation colored green. Provide "isolated" grounding
conductors as insulated only (green with yellow tracer). Provide grounding conductors run
in raceway/cable with wiring as insulated only (bare conductors are not permitted for
grounding conductors run with wiring, except cable wiring methods permitted elsewhere in
the specifications where insulated grounding conductors are not available).
7.4
Provide all grounding connections as per the sections of this specification "Splices and
Taps" and "Connections, Lugs, and Bus Bars", except as modified below. Grounding
connections do not require insulation.
7.5
For wiring #4 A.W.G. and larger, provide all grounding connections utilizing exothermic
weld process (Erico/Cadweld, Thermoweld, Thomas & Betts, or approved equal). CrimpWilliams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 7
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
on compression type connectors are not permitted, except where available exothermic weld
process connection configurations do not correspond to combinations and arrangement of
conductors to be connected. Bolted type connectors are not permitted, except where
available exothermic weld process and crimp-on compression connector configurations do
not correspond to combinations and arrangement of conductors to be connected. Where
equipment is provided with factory installed lugs, #4 A.W.G. and larger wiring may
terminate directly at factory lugs.
8.
7.6
Utilize only exothermic weld process connections for all concealed grounding connections;
compression, mechanical, and other grounding connections are not permitted concealed.
Where available exothermic weld process connection configurations do not correspond to
combinations and arrangement of conductors to be connected in concealed locations, utilize
combinations and arrangement of conductors as required to facilitate exothermic weld
process connections and extend from the concealed connection location to an accessible
location where crimp-on compression or bolted type (as permitted) connections may be
utilized.
7.7
Accessible connections of wiring #6 A.W.G. and smaller to piping and similar
materials/equipment may utilize multiple bolt type ground clamps. Accessible connections
of wiring #6 A.W.G. and smaller to driven (made) grounding rod electrodes may utilize
one-piece, single bolt "acorn" type ground clamps.
7.8
Provide conduit grounding bushings of galvanized malleable iron with provisions to accept
factory or field installed copper only lug where required.
IDENTIFICATION, NAMEPLATES, AND TAGS
8.1
Provide all new electrical equipment with engraved three (3) layer laminated plastic
nameplates describing the equipment, load/device served, ratings, circuit(s) feeding the
equipment, etc. as indicated below. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for existing
electrical equipment where modified or connected to as part of this project or where
specifically indicated on the drawings. Provide these engraved plastic nameplates in
addition to any code required or manufacturers' standard nameplates.
8.2
Provide engraved plastic nameplates for all electrical equipment, including, but not limited
to, existing branch panels (where connected to as part of this project) and any equipment
containing fuses, power outlets. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for all receptacles
and switches where dedicated to serving specific equipment.
8.3
Provide engraved plastic nameplates for convenience receptacles.
8.4
Secure engraved plastic nameplates with suitable screws or rivets, self-adhesive nameplates
are not acceptable. Provide engraved plastic nameplates with white letters on black
background, unless indicated otherwise. Provide engraved plastic nameplates with 6.5 mm
(1/4") minimum lettering, unless indicated otherwise. Provide engraved plastic nameplates
on the front and/or cover of the equipment plainly visible when the cover (where
applicable) is closed, unless indicated otherwise.
8.5
Submit shop drawings showing proposed sizes (overall and lettering sizes) and exact
proposed wording (including exact arrangement of wording) of all engraved plastic
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 8
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
nameplates for review and approval.
8.6
Provide all engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with the following example.
Equipment names are the alphanumeric designation for equipment indicated on the
drawings (i.e. "MDP", "PP1", "EF-1", etc.). Equipment descriptions identify the equipment
in "plain English" (see example). Indicate the operating voltage of the equipment,
including phase and wires (see example). Where equipment includes overcurrent devices
(i.e. main breaker panels, fused switches, enclosed circuit breakers, etc.) show the
appropriate amperes on the engraved plastic nameplate. Where equipment does not include
overcurrent devices (i.e. main lug panels, unfused switches, contactors, transformers, etc.)
show the amperes of the overcurrent device protecting the circuit serving the equipment.
Remarks include information as described below.
EXAMPLE ENGRAVED PLASTIC NAMEPLATE WORDING
Equipment Name (use 10 mm (3/8") lettering):
Equipment Description:
Equipment Voltage, Phase, Amperes:
Remarks:
8.7
A.
Branch Panel: Provide engraved plastic nameplate showing panel name and use
(description) as indicated on the single line diagram and/or respective panel schedule.
Remarks indicate the panel and circuit number or transformer feeding the panel.
B.
Fusible Device: On the inside cover of each fused device, provide an engraved
plastic sign indicating the proper fuse size (as indicated on the drawings or as
required). Provide nameplate reading, "USE ___A FUSE ONLY" (fill in the proper
fuse rating).
Provide engraved plastic nameplates for power outlets, thermal overload switches, and for
receptacles and switches where dedicated to serving specific equipment. Show the
equipment served, the voltage and ampere rating, and the circuit feeding the equipment.
Utilize 3.2 mm (1/8") high minimum lettering. Provide as per the following example:
Equipment Name and Description:
Equipment Voltage and Amperes:
8.8
MO-1 MICROWAVE OVEN
120V, 20A - PP1-12
Where specifically indicated on the drawings only, provide engraved plastic nameplates for
convenience receptacles showing the voltage and ampere rating and the circuit feeding the
receptacle. Utilize 3.2 mm (1/8") high minimum lettering. Provide as per the following
example:
Equipment Voltage and Amperes:
Equipment Circuit:
8.9
PP1
POWER PANEL
120/208V-3PH-4W, 100A
FED FROM MDP - CCT. 4
120V, 20A
PP1-14
Provide engineer approved wrap-around adhesive or tube type wire tags or markers for all
conductors, except conductors in feeders tagged as indicated below. Provide tags/markers
indicating the panel or device where the wiring originates and the conductor circuit number
(or other identifying number/letter/designation unique to the conductor). Tag/mark neutral
and grounding conductors with the respective circuit number(s) of the corresponding phase
conductor(s).
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 9
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
8.10
Where any conductor size differs from the conductor size normally expected for the
respective overcurrent device (for any reason, whether specified or not, including voltage
drop consideration, N.E.C. "tap rule" application, ampacity derating considerations, etc.),
provide engineer approved tags at the point where the wiring terminates at the overcurrent
device reading, "WIRING IS ADJUSTED FOR VOLTAGE DROP/TAP
RULE/DERATING, USE MAXIMUM ___A FUSE/CB" (indicate the proper reason for
the adjustment and fill in the proper overcurrent device ampere rating). For feeders, this
information may be included on the tags specified above.
8.11
Provide all new and existing branch panels (where connected to or modified as part of this
project) with accurate and descriptive typewritten circuit directories. For existing panels,
provide directories including all modifications as part of this project as well as all previous
"penciled in" changes and information. Actual tracing and identifying of existing circuits is
not required, unless specifically indicated on the drawings. Submit photocopies of circuit
directories at project close out as part of as-built record documents.
8.12
Identify conductors in complete accordance with the N.E.C. and as indicated below
(including identifying grounding and grounded (i.e. neutral) conductors, where applicable).
For conductors #6 and smaller, identify by natural insulation color. For conductors #4 and
larger (and for cable wiring methods where applicable colors are not readily available from
cable manufacturers), identify by natural insulation color or by a 155 mm (6") long
(minimum) band of colored vinyl electrical tape on conductors at all terminations and in all
boxes and enclosures. Where "tracers" are required, identify by natural insulation color
including narrow stripes of the tracer color. Where conductors including tracer stripes are
not readily available, provide a 25 mm (1") band of tape (apply over and in the center of the
55 mm (6") band of tape, where applicable) of the tracer color at all terminations and in all
boxes and enclosures.
8.13
Identify phases of all conductors where more than one phase conductor is present (in
raceways, cables, boxes, enclosures, etc.) with methods as indicated above. Utilize
standard color-coding throughout the project as follows:
120/208 V SYSTEM
A-phase
Black
B-phase
Red
C-phase
Blue
Neutral
White
Ground
Green
277/480 V SYSTEM
A-phase
Brown
B-phase
Orange
C-phase
Yellow
Neutral
White with brown tracer(s)
Ground
Green
Isolated ground conductors (any system): Green with yellow tracer(s)
9.
CONNECTIONS, LUGS, AND BUS BARS
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 10
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
10.
9.1
The following provisions apply to all electrical equipment.
9.2
Provide all lugs, bus bars, windings, conductors, and connections of all electrical
equipment of copper only. Aluminum is not permitted. CU/AL dual rated lugs are not
acceptable, except where factory installed lugs are provided with equipment and where
copper-only lugs, or drilled pads to accept compression or other field installed lugs, are not
options in manufacturer's standard catalogs. Where factory lugs are capable of being
removed/replaced in the field, remove the factory lugs and provide new suitable fieldinstalled copper only lugs (except where removal and replacement of lugs would violate
UL listing). Do not utilize compression lugs for branch circuit breakers rated 20 A and less
in branch panels, even if available in manufacturer's catalogs.
9.3
Exceptions are permitted only where connecting to existing aluminum wiring to remain,
and then only with written approval of the University and engineer.
LOCKS AND KEYS
10.1
11.
Provide all locks for lighting and power panels, fire alarm and signaling cabinets and all
other electrical systems or locked apparatus with keys which are alike and as per University
standard. Utilize Best Company locks only.
RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES
11.1
Provide all receptacles and wall switches as industrial and specification grade, totally
enclosed in non-flammable and heat resistant heavy-duty thermoset or thermoplastic case,
with terminal screws on the side of the case. Pigtail conductor connections are not
permitted (except for specialty devices where side terminal screws are not available options
in the manufacturer's catalog). Provide color as selected and approved by the owner and
architect.
11.2
Provide receptacles as duplex, parallel blade, side wired, three (3) wire, grounding type, 20
A, and 120 V unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings.
11.3
Where indicated on the drawings, provide isolated ground type receptacles with the
receptacle grounding terminal electrically isolated and insulated from the receptacle
mounting yoke. Where indicated on the drawings, provide with integral transient
overvoltage surge suppressor (with integral light emitting diode (LED) indicating integrity
of surge protection) with surge suppression components rated 150 V, 210 J (at 10 x 1,000
μs), and 13 kA (minimum) and complying with UL-1449. Provide all wiring serving
isolated ground receptacles with separate equipment and isolated grounding conductors as
per specifications section "Grounding" of specifications division 16200, General Electrical.
Where isolated ground type receptacles are shown in nonmetallic raceways or nonmetallic
boxes, either ground the metal receptacle yoke (in addition to grounding the receptacle
ground terminal) with the equipment (raceway) grounding conductor (utilizing methods
approved by the N.E.C.) or substitute a standard (i.e. non-isolated-ground) type receptacle
(but with surge suppression where specified) so the receptacle yoke is grounded by the
isolated ground conductor, at the contractor's option.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 11
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
12.
13.
11.4
Provide wall switches as single pole, three-way, or four-way as required, heavy duty flux
tumbler type, UL "T" rated, specification grade, and rated 20 A, 277 V and 120 V.
11.5
For all switches where locking provisions are required by Code or indicated on the
drawings and for all thermal overload switches, provide a suitable handle locking guard
capable of visibly padlocking in the open or closed position (with switch handle position
visible when locked).
11.6
Provide dimmer switches of thin profile slide type, Lutron Skylark Contour series or
approved equal by Hubbell or Leviton, unless indicated otherwise. Dimmer switches of the
rotary type and/or with raised profile (with raised cooling fins) are not acceptable. Provide
with full wattage rating as indicated on the drawings, do not "de-rate" by removing cooling
fins or heat sink sections (unless specifically indicated on the drawings). Where multiple
dimmer switches or dimmer switch(es) along with standard type switches (single pole,
three-way, and four-way) are shown grouped together on the drawings, gang switches
together with a single overall cover plate (conform with N.E.C. Article 404.8(B) "Voltage
Between Adjacent Switches", where applicable). Utilize special cover plates as required by
the combination of switches involved. Where ganged with dimmer switches, utilize single
pole, three-way, and four-way switches of the slide type with appearance and manufacturer
matching dimmer switches.
FUSES
12.1
Provide an N.E.C. cartridge fuse for each fuse-gap in the work. Furnish three (3) spare
fuses of the rating installed to the owner for each fused device. Specifications are based on
equipment as manufactured by Cooper/Bussman. Equal equipment as manufactured by
Ferraz Shawmut and Littlefuse shall be considered.
12.2
Provide fuses of the dual element time delay, current limiting, and non-renewable type with
voltage rating not less than the operating voltage and coordinated with the respective fuse
clips and with short circuit rating of 200,000 A. Provide fuses as class "RK1" (600 A and
less, Cooper/Bussman #LPN/S-RK series) or class "L" (over 600 A, Cooper/Bussman
#KRP-C series). Class "CC" fast acting (Cooper/Bussman #LP-CC series) or time delay
(Cooper/Bussman #KTK-R series) fuses, as recommended by manufacturer, are permitted
for control applications.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
13.1
This section applies to all circuit breakers installed within or in conjunction with branch
and distribution panels, enclosed circuit breakers, contactors, starters, and any other
electrical equipment, unless indicated otherwise.
13.2
Provide all circuit breakers of the molded case type unless specifically indicated otherwise.
Provide readily removable from the front of panels and equipment without disturbing
adjacent units, having quick-make and quick-break toggle mechanisms and non-fusible
contacts, having inverse time and short circuit characteristics, which trip free on overload
or short circuit so that they cannot be held closed on overload, clearly indicating whether
they are in the open, tripped, or closed position. Provide automatic release obtained
through the medium of a bimetallic thermal type element (ambient compensated) engaged
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 12
SECTION 16300
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS
in the releasing latch of the breaker or mechanism.
13.3
Provide circuit breakers in branch panels with short circuit ratings as indicated in the
respective equipment specifications. Provide circuit breakers as part of enclosed circuit
breakers, contactors, starters, and any other electrical equipment with short circuit ratings
not less than the short circuit rating of the first overcurrent device on the line side of the
breaker, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
13.4
Provide field-installed handle locking devices for all circuit breakers not requiring switch
control, for all circuit breakers feeding emergency lighting equipment (including battery
equipment) and fire alarm controls, and for all circuit breakers fed from an emergency
generator system (where applicable).
13.5
Provide 15 A and 20 A single pole circuit breakers "SWD" rated. Provide branch panel
(250 V and less) circuit breakers rated 70 A and less as "HACR" rated. Provide enclosed
circuit breakers and circuit breakers in distribution panels rated 250 A and less as "HACR"
rated.
13.6
Refer to the section of this specification "Connections, Lugs, and Bus Bars".
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 16300 - 13
SECTION 16400
LIGHTING SYSTEM
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16400 - LIGHTING SYSTEM
INDEX
DESCRIPTION
PARAGRAPH #
PAGE #
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
16400-2
BALLASTS AND WIRING
2
16400-2
LAMPS
3
16400-3
LUMINAIRES
4
16400-3
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
LIGHTING SYSTEM 16400 - 1
SECTION 16400
LIGHTING SYSTEM
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16400 - LIGHTING SYSTEM
1.
2.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1
The applicable requirements and conditions of specifications section "General Provisions"
of specifications divisions 16100, General Electrical, and 16300, Electrical Materials, are
hereby made an integral part of this section.
1.2
Provide lighting systems consisting of all components necessary for a complete installation.
Refer to the lighting fixture/luminaire schedule on the drawings for additional information.
1.3
Luminaires including, but not limited to, those manufactured by the following shall be
considered: Abolite, Cooper, Columbia, Contech, Elliptipar, Emergilite, General Electric,
Hubbell, Insight, Kenall, Kim, Kirlin, Kurt Versen, Light Guard, Lightolier, Lithonia, LSI,
Prescolite, Sim-Kar, Sterner, Stonco, Tivoli, Williams, Winona, ZSLI.
BALLASTS AND WIRING
2.1
Completely coordinate exact lamp types (including configuration, dimensions, bases, pins,
etc.), ballasts, starters, capacitors, sockets, luminaire construction and arrangement (as
related to facilitating lamps and related equipment), and all applicable ancillary equipment
as required and provide a complete and compatible installation.
2.2
Submit shop drawings of all ballasts proposed for use (multiple manufacturers and series
are permitted, provided all ballasts conform to the specifications). Where luminaires are
installed by the contractor which include ballasts that do not meet the specifications
(without prior written approval) the contractor shall remove ballasts and provide new
ballasts meeting the specified criteria at no cost to the owner.
2.3
Provide all fluorescent ballasts (including ballasts for compact fluorescent luminaires) of
the high power factor solid-state electronic energy saving type, unless indicated otherwise
on the drawings. "Hybrid" ballasts or magnetic energy saving ballasts are not permitted
unless specifically indicated on the drawings. Low power factor ballasts are not permitted
unless specifically indicated on the drawings. Magnetic or any other type ballasts not
identified/listed as energy saving type are not permitted under any circumstance.
2.4
Provide all solid-state electronic energy savings ballasts for straight and "U-tube" lamps as
follows. Utilize Motorola #G1/2-RN-T8 series ballasts or approved equal by Advance
(Mark-V series), Magnetek (Triad series), or Valmont (Ultra-Miser series). Provide only
ballasts meeting or exceeding the criteria specified below (Note: Not all ballasts of the
manufacturers' and series' listed above meet the following criteria, only ballasts meeting the
criteria are acceptable).
A.
B.
C.
D.
Minimum power factor: 0.90
Maximum total harmonic distortion (THD): 15%
Minimum ballast factor: 0.85
Maximum lamp crest factor: 1.5
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
LIGHTING SYSTEM 16400 - 2
SECTION 16400
LIGHTING SYSTEM
E.
F.
3.
4.
Rating: UL-P, "A" sound rated
Provide arranged for rapid starting of lamps, instant starting is not acceptable.
LAMPS
3.1
Completely coordinate exact lamp types (including configuration, dimensions, bases, pins,
etc.), ballasts, starters, capacitors, sockets, luminaire construction and arrangement (as
related to facilitating lamps and related equipment), and all applicable ancillary equipment
as required and provide a complete and compatible installation.
3.2
Provide lamps for luminaires as indicated on the drawings. Provide all luminaires with
lamps (even if lamp types and/or quantities are not shown on drawings) as required for a
complete installation.
3.3
Acceptable lamp manufacturers include Osram/Sylvania, General Electric, and Philips
only.
3.4
Maintain compatibility and consistency of lamp types and manufacturers (as well as lamp
colors, except where different lamp colors are indicated on the drawings) throughout the
project as much as possible. Provide luminaires so lamps are completely interchangeable
between different luminaire types shown on the luminaire schedule with the same type
lamps, wherever possible. For each combination of lamp type and color utilized on the
project, provide all lamps of a single manufacturer. Different manufacturers are permitted
for different lamp type and color combinations (except that for this provision, all straight
and "U-tube" fluorescent lamps are considered as a common type and all compact
fluorescent lamps are considered as a common type; i.e. provide all 32 W, 25 W, 17 W, and
U31 W T-8 lamps of the same manufacturer). Utilizing more than one (1) manufacturer for
any lamp type and color combination is not permitted (except where specifically approved
in writing by the engineer and owner).
3.5
Provide all lamps (of all types) of the energy saving type, unless specifically indicated
otherwise on the drawings. Lamps which are not energy saving are not permitted (unless
specifically approved in writing by the owner, architect, and engineer. Provide all lamps of
a type suitable for use ("burning") in any position (unless specific burning positions are
indicated on the drawings).
3.6
Provide fluorescent lamps as per the lighting luminaire schedule. Provide lamp color
temperature of 3,500 degrees K, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Provide
straight and "U-tube" lamps of the T-8 type (unless indicated otherwise).
LUMINAIRES
4.1
Provide luminaire types and manufacturers as indicated on the drawings. Where a
luminaire type designation (i.e. letter) is not shown at a luminaire symbol, include costs in
bid to provide any applicable type of luminaire used for the same symbol anywhere else on
the drawings.
4.2
Support all luminaires (including outlet boxes and/or conduits used to support luminaires,
where permitted) in complete accordance with all applicable requirements of the N.E.C.
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
LIGHTING SYSTEM 16400 - 3
SECTION 16400
LIGHTING SYSTEM
(including, but not limited to, code requirements for mounting and support of luminaires,
outlet and other boxes, conduits, raceways, and devices). Provide all required mounting
hardware, including pendant kits, fasteners, hangers, wall mounted brackets, concrete
bases, conduits, supplementary supports, grounding, etc., as required for a complete
installation. Support all luminaires completely independent of suspended ceilings and
direct from the structure (suspended ceilings are permitted to provide supplemental lateral
support to luminaires which are vertically supported direct from the structure), except as
follows. Luminaires are permitted to be supported from/by suspended ceilings only where
both the general contractor's suspended ceiling installation and the electrical contractor's
method of securing luminaires to the suspended ceiling are in complete accordance with
N.E.C. requirements for supporting luminaires. Supporting luminaires with or from
conduits or raceways is not permitted, except that luminaires specifically designed for
conduit support may be supported utilizing only rigid steel conduit (supporting with any
other type conduit or raceway, including IMC, EMT, PVC, surface raceway, and flexible
conduit, is not permitted under any circumstance). Supporting luminaires from screw
shells of lamp holders is not permitted under any circumstance. Supporting luminaires or
wiring from trees or vegetation is not permitted under any circumstance.
4.3
Refer to architectural drawings, reflected ceiling plans, and details for exact locations of all
luminaires. Verify final location of all luminaires with the owner, architect, and lighting
designer (where applicable) prior to rough-in.
4.4
Perform field measurements, verify proper clearances, and verify all exact mounting and
installation conditions and requirements prior to ordering luminaires.
4.5
Provide integral thermal protection for all recessed luminaire housings.
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
LIGHTING SYSTEM 16400 - 4
SECTION 16510
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16510 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
INDEX
DESCRIPTION
PARAGRAPH #
PAGE #
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
16510-2
SUBMITTALS
2
16510-2
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS
3
16510-3
MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND DEVICES
4
16510-3
LOCKS AND KEYS
5
16510-4
INSTALLATION
6
16510-4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
7
16510-5
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16510 - 1
SECTION 16510
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16510 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1
The applicable requirements and conditions of specifications section "General Provisions"
of specifications divisions 16100, General Electrical, and 16300, Electrical Materials, are
hereby made an integral part of this section.
1.2
Extent of fire alarm and detection system work is indicated on the drawings and schedules.
Fire alarm work includes modifying the existing fire alarm system to facilitate new fire
alarm devices as indicated on the drawings. Types of fire alarm and detection equipment
includes the following:
A.
B.
2.
Control panel modifications
Audio/visual horn/strobes and visual strobes
1.3
Provide the fire alarm system (including operation, equipment, devices, wiring, installation,
and programming) in complete accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local codes
and standards (including National Electrical Code (N.E.C.), Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers (IEEE), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriter's
Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), American National Standards Institute (ANSI),
National Electrical Contractors' Association (NECA) "Standard of Installation", Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA), United States Department of Labor Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA), all local municipal authorities having jurisdiction (local
authorities), etc.). Provide fire alarm system controls and all new and existing system
components (including devices, equipment, modules, interfaces, etc.) UL listed to operate
together. Provide all signaling devices of an ADA approved type and as required for ADA
approved audible and visual coverage throughout all areas of the project.
1.4
Specifications are based on equipment indicated on the Electrical Symbol List on the
drawings. Only equipment matching and fully compatible with (including maintaining
NFPA, UL, FM, and other applicable listings and approvals) the existing fire alarm controls
will be considered. The electrical contractor is fully responsible for verifying all
compatibility requirements and all exact existing devices in the field before submitting
shop drawings and shall provide the system accordingly. Include all costs in bid.
Manufacturer and catalog numbers of equipment indicate the type and quality of the
equipment required.
SUBMITTALS
2.1
Submit shop drawings including, but not limited to, shop drawings on equipment and
devices (specifically showing manufacturers, model numbers, and listing information),
rough in diagrams, standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams, installation layout
drawings (specifically showing locations of all devices, equipment, and wiring and
information on ceiling height and construction [on architectural background plans which
shall be made available to the contractor for this purpose]), installation instructions, written
warranty, and battery and voltage drop calculations. Submit quantity as indicated
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16510 - 2
SECTION 16510
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
elsewhere in the specifications to the engineer for review and approval. In addition to
submitting to the engineer, submit additional sets (quantity as per the fire marshal) to the
local fire marshal for review, approval, and permits.
3.
4.
2.2
Include all costs in bid associated with preparing and submitting shop drawing information.
This includes sealing (by a registered professional engineer) diagrams if required by the
local authority.
2.3
Upon project completion, submit operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals (include with
other project O&M manuals). Submit at least three (3) original copies of all fire alarm
system software.
2.4
Upon project completion, submit certification of the entire system to the owner and local
authorities.
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS
3.1
Provide all components of the alarm and detection system products matching and
maintaining current operation, functioning, and system arrangement. Construct as required
for a complete installation.
3.2
Perform all modifications as required to maintain current fire alarm system operation and
operation as required by code.
3.3
Existing fire alarm system sequence of operation and functions shall remain.
MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND DEVICES
4.1
CONTROL PANEL MODIFICATIONS: Modify the existing fire alarm control panel as
required to facilitate all new devices specified:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
4.2
Existing system components may be reused as much as practical where they support
new devices
Where necessary to facilitate new signaling devices, provide supervised signal circuit
modules (complete and including modules to synchronize all new visual indicating
devices) as required
Where necessary to facilitate new output functions (elevator interfaces, HVAC
equipment shut-downs, door releases, etc.) provide relaying as required
Modify, upgrade, and/or replace the power supply where necessary to facilitate new
devices
Modify, upgrade, and/or replace batteries and related components as required to
provide battery backup to operate the system under "normal" and "trouble"
conditions for a minimum of 24 hours and then operate the system in "alarm"
condition for a minimum of 5 minutes at the end of the 24-hour period
Where necessary to facilitate new initiating devices, provide suitable device
termination, zone, and/or loop modules as applicable
STROBE ONLY ASSEMBLIES: Provide flashing strobe visual notification appliances
with code approved wording "FIRE" as required. Provide UL listed, flush mounted (mount
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16510 - 3
SECTION 16510
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
on flush outlet box), ADA approved type wired using Class "B" supervised circuits.
Provide visually synchronized (utilizing synchronized type appliances in conjunction with
suitable synchronizing control modules in signaling circuits) to prevent photosensitive
reactions. Provide with adjustable output settings (15, 30, 75, and 95 or 110 cd). Base
pricing and wiring and power supply sizing on maximum settings. Lower output settings
shall be considered only where they provide audible and visual coverage meeting or
exceeding ADA and code requirements (throughout all areas of the project where coverage
is required or otherwise shown on the drawings) and where the manufacturer submits
calculations/criteria showing compliant coverage. Include costs in bid to provide additional
signaling appliances where necessary to provide compliant coverage.
5.
6.
LOCKS AND KEYS
5.1
Refer also to the section of this specification "Locks and Keys" of specifications section
16300 "Electrical Materials".
5.2
Provide all fire alarm system equipment enclosures and keyed and/or key operated devices
(including pull stations and duct detector test/reset stations) utilizing keys which are alike
and which match existing fire alarm system keys.
INSTALLATION
6.1
Provide fire alarm wiring in complete accordance with all requirements of other sections of
the electrical specifications, except as modified below. Utilize wiring methods in
accordance with specifications section 16200 "Electrical Work Practices".
6.2
Provide all fire alarm system wiring as directed, recommended, and approved by the system
manufacturer and meeting all system manufacturer minimum requirements (including
where manufacturer's requirements exceed the requirements of the specifications and the
N.E.C.). #14 A.W.G. conductors are the minimum permitted. Provide all wiring utilizing
solid conductors. Stranded conductors are permitted only where in accordance with N.E.C.
Article 760. The fire alarm system may utilize individual conductors wiring in conduit
and/or multi-conductor cables (in conduit where otherwise required by the specifications).
6.3
Provide multi-conductor cables (where utilized) as follows. Provide insulation rated not
less than 300 V. Utilize only cables having an overall red jacket and approved by the
N.E.C. and NFPA for use with fire alarm systems. Plenum rated cables may be utilized,
but only in dry locations (plenum cables, even when installed in conduit, are prohibited in
damp and wet locations). In damp locations, utilize only cables specifically listed and
identified for use in damp or wet locations. Provide all cables in wet locations (including
underground and embedded in concrete slabs at or below grade) specifically designed for
outdoor and submerged use and specifically listed and identified for use in wet locations.
6.4
Provide raceways for the fire alarm system dedicated to fire alarm wiring. Fire alarm
raceways may not contain wiring of any other system (including power, lighting, controls,
telecommunications, etc.). Where fire alarm wiring is recommended or required by the
manufacturer to be separated from other fire alarm wiring due to noise, interference, or
other concerns, install wiring in separate raceways as required (or physically separate
wiring as per manufacturer recommendations where wiring is permitted elsewhere to run
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16510 - 4
SECTION 16510
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
without raceway). Paint outlet, junction, device, and other boxes, conduit bodies, and
covers associated with the fire alarm system red. Paint exposed fire alarm raceways red.
7.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
7.1
Completely test the entire system as per "Testing" in specifications section 16100 "General
Electrical". Perform the following additional testing.
7.2
Completely test the entire system to demonstrate proper operation, functioning, capability,
and compliance with all code and specification requirements. Inspect equipment, devices,
relays, signals, etc. for malfunctioning. Correct malfunctions and retest to demonstrate
satisfying the above requirements.
7.3
The electrical contractor and manufacturer's representative shall fully certify (in writing)
the entire system and system operation, including documenting successful testing of the
system. Submit copies of certification to the owner and local authorities.
7.4
Provide testing, adjustment, programming, equipment start-up, and operation and
maintenance instructions performed by specially trained personnel employed by the fire
alarm system manufacturer's representative. Provide these performed throughout the
duration of the project, up through final testing and acceptance of the system by the owner
and local authorities, include all costs in bid. No extra claims or compensation will be
granted for any manufacturer's representative services during the project, including where
associated with changes to the scope of work where performed before final testing and
acceptance of the system.
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS 16510 - 5
SECTION 16550
SYSTEMS PATHWAYS
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16550 - SYSTEMS PATHWAYS
INDEX
DESCRIPTION
PARAGRAPH #
PAGE #
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
16550-2
RACEWAYS AND SLEEVES
2
16550-2
SEALING AND FIRE-STOPPING
3
16550-3
GROUNDING
4
16550-3
OUTLET BOXES
5
16550-4
WIRING ACCESS PATHWAYS
6
16550-4
WIRING
7
16550-5
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SYSTEMS PATHWAYS 16550 - 1
SECTION 16550
SYSTEMS PATHWAYS
DIVISION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 16550 - SYSTEMS PATHWAYS
1.
2.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1
The applicable requirements and conditions of specifications section "General Provisions"
of specifications divisions 16100, General Electrical, and 16300, Electrical Materials, are
hereby made an integral part of this section.
1.2
This specifications section applies to all pathways and related work for communications
systems wiring (including only telecommunications, data, sound, security, and CCTV,
where applicable), whether the wiring of each respective system is installed by the
electrical contractor, the owner, the owner's vendor(s), or other contractors. The term
"wiring installer" applies to the party installing wiring of the respective system. The
installer of each system shall be as indicated elsewhere in these specifications and/or the
drawings.
1.3
This specifications section does not apply in any way to wiring as part of power, lighting,
emergency, over 600 V, control, fire alarm, and any other systems.
1.4
Provide all telephone, data, and security raceways and pathways in complete accordance
with the latest edition of the "University Standards", including "Construction Specifications
for Data, Voice, and Video Communications Networks at the University of Pennsylvania"
(applies to telephone and data), "Campus Security System Construction Specifications, the
University of Pennsylvania", and "Campus Security System Typical Drawing Package, the
University of Pennsylvania" (applies to security); as modified by these specifications and
indicated on the drawings.
1.5
Where the term "PENN-NET" is used in the drawings or specifications it is a generic term
used for convenience to represent voice, data, and video communications.
1.6
The contractor is responsible for obtaining copies of the University Standards and for
installing telephone, data, and security raceways accordingly. Copies of the University
Standards are available, respectively, from the University ISC Networking Department
(Mr. Matthew Bixler, Phone: 215-898-1208, Fax: 215-898-9348), the University Office of
Telecommunications (Mr. Thomas McCoy, Phone: 215-898-2297, Fax: 215-898-1994),
and the University Division of Public Safety, Security Services (Mr. Chris Algard, Phone:
215-573-7800).
1.7
Provide all telephone, data, and security raceways and equipment in complete accordance
with industry standards referenced in the University Standards.
RACEWAYS AND SLEEVES
2.1
Provide all raceways and sleeves (including all fittings, conduit bodies, boxes, supports,
etc.) for communications systems wiring in complete accordance with other sections of this
specification except as modified below and unless specifically indicated otherwise.
Information in the electrical specification and the electrical drawings for this project
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SYSTEMS PATHWAYS 16550 - 2
SECTION 16550
SYSTEMS PATHWAYS
modify requirements of the University Standards.
2.2
Provide minimum sizes for conduits and sleeves as follows, unless indicated otherwise.
Provide pull strings in all raceways.
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.3
Install conduits so bends in conduit runs do not exceed a maximum total of 180 degrees
between manholes, pull boxes, junctions boxes, conduit bodies, etc.. Provide all bends of
the long radius sweep type, with radius not be less than ten (10) times the conduit trade size
(i.e. 1.0 m (40") for 103 mm (4") conduit and 270 mm (10") for 27 mm (1") conduit).
2.4
Flexible conduit is not permitted for telephone, data, and security wiring, unless
specifically approved in writing under the following circumstances only. Where flexible
conduit is utilized, minimum sizes are 129 mm (5") for main service, trunk line, and
primary pathways and 35 mm (1.25") for branch secondary pathways.
A.
B.
3.
4.
27 mm (1") for telephone and data branch secondary pathway conduits.
53 mm (2") for branch secondary telephone and data sleeves, unless indicated
otherwise.
21 mm (3/4") for security branch secondary pathway conduits.
27 mm (1") for branch secondary security sleeves, unless indicated otherwise.
Where existing walls are fished.
Where physically impossible to install fixed (non-flexible) conduit.
SEALING AND FIRE-STOPPING
3.1
Seal and fire-stop all raceways and sleeves in complete accordance with other sections of
this specification and as required by code except as modified below and unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
3.2
Seal once wiring is installed. Where wiring is not installed at this time, seal all empty
conduits.
3.3
Seal all underground conduits and conduits entering the building with suitable rubber
conduit plugs as soon as conduits are installed and prior to installation of wiring in
conduits. Once wiring is installed, reseal conduits with suitable rubber conduit plugs, water
plugs, or duct sealer as required. Provide all seals water and gas tight.
GROUNDING
4.1
Provide all grounding in complete accordance with other sections of this specification and
as required by code except as modified below and unless specifically indicated otherwise.
4.2
Maintain complete mutual separation between the communications and data grounding
system, the security grounding system, and the electrical power grounding system, except
at a single point of connections to the electrical power grounding electrode system as close
a possible to the grounding electrode and/or electrical service.
4.3
Bond all raceways, conduits, cable trays, messengers, etc. to the respective systems ground
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SYSTEMS PATHWAYS 16550 - 3
SECTION 16550
SYSTEMS PATHWAYS
busses or ground wires.
5.
6.
OUTLET BOXES
5.1
Provide outlets as indicated on the drawings and electrical symbol list.
5.2
Provide minimum depth of outlet boxes as 70 mm (2.75") to facilitate terminating category5 and similar cables. Smaller boxes are permitted only with written approval and only
where construction will not allow use of 70 mm (2.75") deep boxes.
WIRING ACCESS PATHWAYS
6.1
Provide complete pathways as required for telephone, data, and security wiring. This
includes all raceways, sleeves, cable trays, and other wiring access as required. Provide
pathways as specified below. Provide pathways extending between communications
rooms, closets, and backboards and from these locations to each and every communications
systems outlet. Refer to the drawings for additional information.
6.2
Prior to rough in, coordinate all proposed cable routing with the owner and the wiring
installer.
6.3
Primary Pathways: Provide primary wiring access pathways out from communications
closets, rooms, and backboards to serve branch outlets as follows:
6.4
A.
Provide steel strand supporting messengers along all proposed routes of primary
wiring access pathways. This includes all corridors utilized for telephone, data, and
security wiring access. Suitably secure messengers at intervals not exceeding 8'0"
utilizing "J" clips or other approved hardware. Messenger installation and routing is
not indicated on the drawings, provide installation and routing as required. Securely
support all messenger ends and bends utilizing suitable strain relief clamps. Contact
the University for messenger sizing. Supporting messengers are not required where
cable trays and conduits are installed (see below).
B.
Provide conduits and cable trays for primary wiring access pathways where indicated
on the drawings.
Secondary Pathways: Provide secondary wiring access pathways from each individual
branch outlet to the nearest primary pathway as follows:
A.
Provide conduits from each respective outlet, from communications compartments of
surface raceways, and from communications raceways of modular furniture stubbed
and capped into corridor drop ceiling spaces (or other primary pathway locations) or
into communications closets, as indicated on the drawings, refer to the symbol list.
B.
Conduits are permitted to stub into accessible ceiling spaces in other rooms, away
from primary pathway locations. Where conduits do not stub directly into corridors
or other primary pathway locations, provide sleeves through all walls and
obstructions leading from the conduit stub location to the primary pathway location.
Provide sleeve sizes based on the quantity of outlets to be wired as follows. Provide
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SYSTEMS PATHWAYS 16550 - 4
SECTION 16550
SYSTEMS PATHWAYS
multiple sleeves as required to facilitate the total quantity of outlets.
Sleeve Size
53 mm (2")
63 mm (2.5")
78 mm (3")
91 mm (3.5")
103 mm (4")
C.
7.
Maximum Quantity of Outlets
3
4
7
9
12
The wiring installer shall provide support for secondary pathway cable runs, except
as follows. Where quantity of outlets served exceeds twelve (12), the Electrical
Contractor shall provide supports as indicated above for primary pathways.
WIRING
7.1
The wiring installer (the electrical contractor, the owner, the owner's vendor(s), or other
contractors as applicable to each respective system) shall provide only wiring complying
with the all of the following.
7.2
Provide wiring for each respective system as directed, recommended, and approved by the
respective system manufacturer and meeting all minimum requirements of the system
manufacturer (including where manufacturer's requirements exceed the requirements of the
specifications and the N.E.C.).
7.3
Provide all cables as multi-conductor style having an overall jacket (of a color other than
red; red is reserved for fire alarm) and utilize only cables approved by the N.E.C. for use
with the respective system.
7.4
Provide all wiring in plenum spaces in complete accordance with the N.E.C. In dry
location plenum ceilings, utilize only plenum rated cables. For damp and wet location
plenum ceilings and in all other duct and plenum spaces, run wiring (utilize a non-plenum
type suitable for the damp/wet location) in metal conduit. Plenum rated cables may be
utilized for other (i.e. non-plenum) applications, but only in dry locations. Plenum cables,
even when installed in conduit, are prohibited in damp and wet locations.
7.5
In damp locations, utilize only cables specifically listed and identified for use in damp or
wet locations. Provide all cables in wet locations (including underground and embedded in
concrete slabs at or below grade, whether in conduit or direct buried) specifically designed
for outdoor and submerged use and specifically listed and identified for use in wet
locations.
END OF SECTION
Williams Hall & David Rittenhouse Laboratories
Classroom Renovations
SYSTEMS PATHWAYS 16550 - 5